diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-07 13:26:12 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-02-07 13:26:12 -0800 |
| commit | b87247ddb59351699a57726f7c466676850568be (patch) | |
| tree | 5f88a5041ad1137afe7289e5010f7c0dd239c5a5 | |
| parent | 994b7b887e67c3e59b0e69ddc64bf217a17c7871 (diff) | |
47 files changed, 17 insertions, 13930 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7fc8a94 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #55279 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/55279) diff --git a/old/55279-0.txt b/old/55279-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 6b2ec02..0000000 --- a/old/55279-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5684 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Latest Magic, by -Professor Louis Hoffmann and Angelo Lewis - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: Latest Magic - Being original conjuring tricks - -Author: Professor Louis Hoffmann - Angelo Lewis - -Release Date: August 6, 2017 [EBook #55279] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LATEST MAGIC *** - - - - -Produced by Chris Curnow and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - - - - - - - - - - -[Illustration: Angelo Lewis - -“Professor Hoffmann”] - - - - - LATEST MAGIC - - BEING - ORIGINAL CONJURING TRICKS - - INVENTED AND ARRANGED - BY - PROFESSOR HOFFMANN - (ANGELO LEWIS, M.A.) - - Author of “Modern Magic,” etc. - - _WITH NUMEROUS ILLUSTRATIONS_ - - FIRST EDITION - - NEW YORK - SPON & CHAMBERLAIN, 120 LIBERTY ST. - 1918 - - Copyright, 1918 - BY SPON & CHAMBERLAIN - - CAMELOT PRESS, 226-228 WILLIAM ST., NEW YORK, U. S. A. - - - - - TO - J. N. MASKELYNE, ESQ. - FOREMOST OF ENGLISH MAGICIANS, - AND - FEARLESS EXPOSER OF FALSEHOOD AND FRAUD - THIS BOOK IS DEDICATED - BY - HIS FRIEND AND ADMIRER, - THE AUTHOR - - - - -PREFACE - - -The tricks described in the following pages are of my own invention, -and for the most part are entirely new departures: not only the effects -produced, but the appliances by means of which they are produced, being -original. - -From the nature of the case, it follows that few of the items described -have been submitted to the supreme test of performance in public, but -all have been thoroughly thought out; most of the root-ideas having in -fact been simmering in my mind for more than two years past. One or two -of them may demand a more than average amount of address on the part of -the performer; but the majority are comparatively easy, and I believe -I may assert with confidence that all will be found both practicable -and effective. Should any of my modest inventions be found, as is not -improbable, susceptible of further polish, the keen wits and ready -fingers of my brother wizards may safely be trusted to supply it. - -The items entitled _The Mystery of Mahomet_, _The Bewildering Blocks_, -and _The Wizard’s Pocket-book_, have been described in the columns of an -English magical serial, but have never appeared in book shape, and are by -special desire, included in the present volume. - -A final word on a personal matter. Had I been prophet, as well as -magician, when I first began to write on conjuring, I should have chosen -a different pen-name. In the light of later events, my selection was -unfortunate. My identity has long been an open secret, but as I cannot -flatter myself that it is universally known, I take this opportunity to -assure all whom it may concern that I am British to the backbone. - - LOUIS HOFFMANN. - - - - -CONTENTS - - - PORTRAIT OF PROFESSOR HOFFMANN _Frontispiece_ - - PAGE - - PREFACE vii - - - SOME NEW APPLIANCES OF GENERAL UTILITY 1 - Magical Mats 1 - Fairy Flower-Pots 5 - Patter Introducing the Flower-Pots 8 - Adhesive Cards and Tricks Therewith 10 - The Missing Card 12 - - NOVEL APPLICATIONS OF THE “BLACK ART” PRINCIPLE 17 - Black Art Mats and Black Art Patches 17 - A Magical Transposition 23 - The Detective Die 26 - Dissolving Dice 32 - Where is It? 38 - - CARD TRICKS 46 - Arithmetic by Magic 46 - Those Naughty Knaves 49 - Magnetic Magic 55 - The Telepathic Tape 57 - A Card Comedy 60 - The Fast and Loose Card-Box 63 - A Royal Tug of War 64 - Sympathetic Cards 66 - Tell-Tale Fingers 68 - Divination Doubly Difficult 72 - A New Long Card and Tricks Therewith 77 - The Mascot Coin Box 83 - - MISCELLANEOUS TRICKS 88 - Money-Making Made Easy 88 - The Missing Link 92 - Culture Extraordinary 97 - The Bounding Beans 104 - Lost and Found 110 - The Riddle of the Pyramids 115 - The Miracle of Mumbo Jumbo 123 - The Story of the Alkahest 130 - The Oracle of Memphis 137 - The Mystery of Mahomet 146 - The Bewildering Blocks 156 - An “Od” Force 162 - The Mystery of the Three Seals 170 - The Wizard’s Pocket-book 180 - - CONCERNING PATTER 192 - - THE USE OF THE WAND 203 - - A FEW WRINKLES 215 - - L’ENVOI 222 - - - - -LATEST MAGIC - - - - -INTRODUCTORY - - -SOME NEW APPLIANCES OF GENERAL UTILITY - -The little appliances to be presently described are the outcome of -ideas which, after a long period of incubation in my note-books, have -ultimately taken concrete form in what, I venture to believe, will be -found to be practical and useful items of magical apparatus. I may -further claim that they combine in an exceptional degree absolute -innocence of appearance with a wide range of practical utility. Examples -of their uses are indicated in the following pages, but the inventive -reader will find that these by no means exhaust their possibilities of -usefulness. - - -MAGICAL MATS - -The first to be described are of two different kinds, to be known as -the “Card” and “Coin” Mat respectively. They are in appearance simply -circular table--or plate mats, with an ornamental border as depicted in -Fig. 1, and about seven inches in diameter. In the centre of each is an -embossed shield, ostensibly a mere ornament, but in reality serving, as -will presently be seen, an important practical purpose. - -[Illustration: FIG. 1] - -To the casual observer the two mats look precisely alike, but there are -in reality important practical differences between them. The “coin” mat -is covered with leather on both sides, and each has the embossed shield, -so that, whichever side is uppermost, no difference is perceptible to the -eye. In the case of the “card” mat the upper surface only is of leather, -the under side being covered with baize. The object of this difference -is that the exposure (accidental or otherwise) of the baize-covered side -of the card mat may induce in the mind of the spectator the assumption -that the under side of the coin mat is covered in the same way, such -assumption naturally precluding the idea that it is reversible. - -Each mat has a secret space, after the manner of the old “multiplying” -salver, between its upper and under surfaces. The opening in each case is -opposite the lower end or point of the shield before mentioned, so that, -however the mat may be placed, a glance at the shield will always furnish -a guide to the position, for the time being, of the opening. - -[Illustration: FIG. 2] - -In the case of the card mat the secret space (see Fig. 2) is just -large enough to accommodate three playing cards, one upon another. The -corresponding space in the coin mat (Fig. 3) is shorter, narrower and -deeper, being designed to receive, one upon the other, a couple of -half-crowns, or coins of similar size.[1] - -[Illustration: FIG. 3] - -When required for use, the coin mat is prepared, shortly beforehand, by -rubbing the whole of the space within the ornamental border on one of -its faces with diachylon, in the solid form. The diachylon is used cold, -the necessary friction melting it sufficiently, without any additional -heating. This treatment renders the surface of the mat, for the time -being, adhesive, without in any way altering its appearance. To make sure -of its being just right, press a half-crown or penny down firmly upon -it, turn the mat over, and wave it about freely. If the coin adheres -securely, the mat is in working order. - -[1] Where coins of English denominations are referred to in the text, the -American wizard will naturally replace them by corresponding coins of the -U. S. currency. - - -THE FAIRY FLOWER-POTS - -These are, strictly speaking, only flower-pot cases, called in French -_cache-pots_. They may be of leather or cardboard, ornamented on the -outside, but plain black inside, their general appearance being as shown -in Fig. 4. They have neither top nor bottom, and when not in use, can be -opened out flat or rolled up as in Figs. 5 and 6, for greater portability. - -[Illustration: FIG. 4] - -[Illustration: FIG. 5] - -[Illustration: FIG. 6] - -The pair, when needed for use, are exhibited in the first instance as -one only, the one within the other. The professedly single pot, after -being proved empty by exhibiting the interior and passing the hand -through it, is made into two, by simply drawing out the inner one. The -duplication is not presented as a trick, the _modus operandi_ being -self-evident, but it has a pretty effect, and the exhibiting of the two -pots as one in the first instance admits of the presence, within the -outer one, of a secret pocket, open at top, as depicted in Fig. 7, but -folding down, when not in use, flat against its side.[2] - -[Illustration: FIG. 7] - -The main object of this pocket is to enable the performer to “vanish” -a card. The card to be got rid of is dropped ostensibly into the -flower-pot, or rather, the pot being bottomless, _through_ it on to the -table, where, when the pot is lifted, the spectators naturally expect -to see it. It has however disappeared, having in fact been dropped into -the pocket, where it remains concealed. Two, or even three cards may on -occasion be dealt with in the same way. By covering the pocket with the -fingers in the act of picking up the pot, the interior of the latter may -be freely shown after their disappearance. - -The pocket, previously loaded accordingly (though the flower-pot is -shown, to all appearance, empty), may also be used for the production of -a card or cards. - -[2] It is extremely difficult to construct the “pots” so that the pocket -is workable on the concave inner surface, but if they are made four, -five or six-sided the pocket folds against a flat surface and works -perfectly.--ED. - - -PATTER APPROPRIATE TO THE FAIRY FLOWER-POTS - -The flower-pots may be introduced as follows: - -“Permit me to call your attention to one of my latest improvements. -Conjurers have a foolish fancy, as I dare say you have noticed, for -borrowing other people’s hats. If a conjurer wants to collect money from -the air, he collects it in a hat. If he wants to make an omelette, he -cooks it in a hat. If he wants to hatch a few chickens, he does it in a -hat. And, for fear of accidents, he never uses his own hat, but always -borrows somebody else’s. It’s very wrong of us. As Sir William Gilbert -says, about some other forms of crime, - - ‘It’s human nature, P’raps. If so, - O! isn’t human nature _low_.’ - -But we all do it. The worst of it is, we get so in the way of borrowing -hats that we do it without thinking. You will hardly believe that one -evening I came away from the theatre with two hats. One of them was my -own. The other I had borrowed--from under the seat. You don’t believe it? -Well, I said you wouldn’t. I always know! - -“But that is not all. It isn’t only the bad effect on the conjurer’s own -morals, and sometimes on the hat. People are so careless. They do leave -such funny things in their hats. Cannon balls and birdcages; babies’ -socks and babies’ bottles; rabbits and pigeons, and bowls of fish, and -a host of other things. And just when you are going to produce some -brilliant effect, you are pulled up short by finding some silly thing of -that sort in the hat. It’s most annoying. - -“So, after thinking it over, I made up my mind to do away with hats -altogether. Of course I don’t mean for putting on people’s heads, but so -far as conjuring is concerned, and it struck me that a pretty flower-pot, -like this, would form a capital substitute.” (Show as one, the combined -pots, inside and out.) “Much nicer than a hat, don’t you think? It is -prettier, to begin with, and then again, you can see right through it, -and make sure there is no deception. You see that at present the pot is -perfectly empty. - -“But no! I scorn to deceive you. I am like George Washington, except that -I haven’t got a little axe. I cannot tell a lie. At least it hurts me -very much to do so, and I don’t feel well enough to do it now. No! It is -useless any longer to disguise it! The pot is _not_ really empty, for you -see here is another inside it.” (Produce second pot.) “You wouldn’t have -thought it, would you? In fact, you would never have known, if I hadn’t -told you. - -“Of course I could keep on doing this all the evening, but there wouldn’t -be much fun in it, and no time would be left for anything else, so I will -proceed at once to make use of the pots for a little experiment with -cards.” - -(Proceed with any trick for which the card mat may have been prepared.) - -N. B. It will be taken for granted, in the description of tricks -dependent upon the use of the flower-pots, that these have been already -introduced, after the above or some similar manner. - - -ADHESIVE CARDS AND TRICKS THEREWITH - -I believe I may safely claim that the device I am about to describe was, -until I disclosed it some months ago in the _Magazine of Magic_, an -absolute novelty. It consists in the preparation of one card of a pack -(or, better still, of a spare card, to be substituted at need for its -double), by rubbing one or other of its surfaces, shortly before it is -needed for use, with diachylon, in the solid form. - -We will suppose, in the first instance, that the _back_ of the card is -so dealt with. The rubbing does not alter its appearance, but gives it a -thin coating of adhesive matter, and if another card is pressed against -the surface so treated, the two adhere, and for the time become, in -effect, one card only, viz., the one whose face is exposed, the other -having temporarily disappeared from the pack. - -This renders possible many striking effects. To take an elementary -example, let us suppose that the old-fashioned flat card-box, or some -other appliance for magically producing a card, is loaded with, say, -a seven of diamonds. The corresponding card is forced on one of the -company, and taken back into the middle of the pack, on the top of the -prepared card. The performer does not disturb or tamper with the pack in -the smallest degree. He merely squares up the cards, and, pressing them -well together, hands them to be shuffled, meanwhile calling attention to -the card-box, which is shown apparently empty. He then asks the name of -the drawn card, announcing that it will at his command leave the pack and -find its way into the box. - -He now counts off the cards, showing the face of each as he does so, and -leaving it exposed upon the table. The seven of diamonds has disappeared, -being in fact hidden behind the prepared card, which we will suppose to -be in this instance the queen of clubs. - -Leaving the cards outspread upon the table, the performer opens the -card-box, and shows that the missing card has somehow found its way into -it. - -In the hands of a novice, the trick might end at this point; but even a -novice may very well carry it a stage further. To do so, he will in the -first place replace the card in the box, in such a manner that it can be -again “vanished.” In gathering together the outspread cards, he takes -care to place the queen of clubs on top of the rest. As this, however, -is the double card, the actual top card is of course the missing seven -of diamonds. It is an easy matter, in handling the cards, to detach this -from the queen of clubs, and, after a little “talkee-talkee,” show that -it has left the box and returned to the pack. - -The above would, however, be much too crude and elementary a proceeding -to commend itself to the expert. In the trick next to be described the -same expedient is employed after a more subtle fashion. - - -THE MISSING CARD - -The requirements for this trick consist of two complete packs of cards -and an extra card, which we will suppose to be the knave of diamonds. One -of the two packs, which we will call _A_, has on top a card made adhesive -at the back as above described, and its own knave of diamonds at the -bottom. The other pack, _B_, is wholly unprepared. - -The first step is to offer pack _B_ to be shuffled, and when it is -returned to palm on to it the spare knave of diamonds, after which the -pack is left temporarily for the time being in view on the table. -The next step is to pick up pack _A_, and force from it the knave of -diamonds, receiving it back on top of the prepared card, passed to the -middle of the pack for its reception. Squaring up the pack and applying -the necessary pressure, the performer offers it to be shuffled, meanwhile -delivering himself to something like the following effect. - -“Before going further, ladies and gentlemen, I want you to remember -exactly what has been done. A card has been chosen from this pack. It has -been put back again, the cards have been shuffled, and you can all bear -witness that I have not touched them since. Nobody knows, except the lady -who chose it, what card she chose. Whereabouts in the pack it may be at -this moment not one of us knows, even the lady herself. I can assure you -truthfully that _I_ don’t, but I propose, by force of magic, to compel -that card, whatever it may be, to leave that pack altogether, and pass -into the other one. Nay, more than that, I shall compel it to place -itself at any number in that pack you like to name. What shall we say? -Seventh? Good. - -“Now please bear in mind that that pack, like the other, has just -been shuffled, and that I have not touched it since. It is therefore -manifestly impossible that I should know the position of any card in -it. Of course, as there is already a knave of diamonds in the pack, it -is just possible, though scarcely likely, that that card may have been -shuffled into the seventh place. We will see.” - -He counts off cards from the top of the pack on to the table, _faces -down_, not exposing any card till he comes to the seventh, which he holds -up so that all may see it. “Now, Madam, is that your card? I don’t want -to know the name of it yet. It is not your card? I did not suppose it -was, for the chances were over fifty to one against it, but you never can -tell!” - -He gathers up the cards counted off, and without disturbing their order, -replaces them on the top of the pack, thereby bringing the original top -card to the seventh place. - -“Now please observe that I do not touch these cards again till the -miracle has actually happened. I will now ask you, madam, to be good -enough to name your card. The knave of diamonds, you say? That is all -right. Had you taken the knave of clubs, I should have feared for the -success of my experiment, for that knave always gives trouble, if he can; -but the knave of diamonds is a very gentlemanly card, and I have no doubt -that he will readily oblige. Now, Percy (perhaps you didn’t know his name -was Percy), I want you to leave the pack you are in, and place yourself -seventh in the other pack. Go at once, like a good boy. Start at the top, -and go straight down. One, two, three, four, five, six, seven! - -“I should think he has arrived by this time. Let us make sure first, -though, whether he has really left the other pack.” - -Picking up pack _A_, he counts the cards slowly, not looking at them -himself, but showing the face of each before laying it on the table. -“Stop me, please, if you see the knave of diamonds.” He counts, “one, -two, three, four,” and so on to the end. “Fifty-one cards only! Then -there is one card missing, and as you have not seen the knave of -diamonds, and as all the other cards are here, it is plain that it is he -who has left the pack. We have still to find out whether he has obeyed -orders, and gone over to the other pack. You wished him to place himself -seventh, I think. I won’t touch the cards myself. Will some gentleman -come forward, and count them off for me?” (This is done.) “The seventh -card is really the knave of diamonds, is it not? - -“But, you may say, this might be the knave properly belonging to this -pack. Please look through the pack, sir, and if there has been no -deception you will find the proper knave in some other part of it. You -have found the other knave? Then you will admit that that proves clearly -that this first one is the identical card the lady drew.”[3] - -It would be easy to give other combinations dependent on the use of the -adhesive principle, but these may safely be left to the ingenuity of -the reader. If the face, instead of the back, of a given card be treated -with the adhesive, that card will itself disappear from the pack. By -due adjustment two adhering cards may (the one slightly overlapping the -other) be made to form a temporary long or wide card. - -[3] A somewhat more elaborate trick of mine on the same principle (_The -Elusive Card_) will be found described in the _Magazine of Magic_, Vol. -II, pp. 13, 47. - - - - -NOVEL APPLICATIONS OF THE “BLACK ART” PRINCIPLE - - -BLACK ART MATS AND BLACK ART PATCHES - -The Black Art Table has long since established itself in the affections -of the conjurer as one of his most effective aids. At a stage performance -the presence of one or more such adjuncts is almost a matter of course, -but the drawing room performer finds many occasions when, for one reason -or another, the use of such an aid is precluded. Some wizards, as a -matter of personal convenience, decline to burden themselves with more -artistic luggage than can be bestowed in an ordinary handbag. Others, -again, hold (and not without reason) that the use of a special table, -imported by the performer himself, tends to discount the marvel of his -show; as being suggestive of that “preparation” which every artistic -conjurer is anxious to disclaim. It is no doubt an easy matter to arrange -a good enough programme for which the aid of “black art” is not needed, -but this means the exclusion not merely of a valuable auxiliary, but of -many of the most striking magical effects. - -[Illustration: FIG. 8] - -I have pleasure in introducing to the reader a substitute which, though -its capabilities fall a good deal short of those of the actual table, -will answer many of its purposes, apart from special merits of its own, -and which has the further recommendation of exceptional portability. -It may be appropriately entitled the Black Art Mat. It consists of a -piece of Bristol board of size and shape suitable to the purpose for -which it is to be used, covered on both sides with black velvet and -edged with narrow ornamental braid or binding. The one side has no -speciality, but the other has a flat pocket across one or more of its -corners; as indicated in Fig. 8. In the case of a mat of small size the -pocket may extend diagonally from corner to corner as in Fig. 9. The -edge of the pocket may be braided if preferred (the rest of the surface -being ornamented to correspond) but if the mat be well made this is not -necessary. The mouth of each pocket is made slightly “full,” and is held -open a quarter of an inch or so by means of a stiffening along its -inner edge. By having the mill-board foundation cut in half before it -is covered, the mat may be made to fold like a chessboard for greater -portability. - -[Illustration: FIG. 9] - -If some small article, say a coin or ring, is laid on mat just behind the -mouth of the pocket, it may be made to disappear therein, being in fact -swept into the pocket in the act of apparently picking it up. In the case -of a coin, the pocket may by a slight alteration of procedure be used to -effect a “change”; a substitute, palmed beforehand, being exhibited in -place of the one professedly picked up from the mat. - -It is desirable when placing the mat upon the table for use to see that -the mouth of the pocket is duly open and has not been, by any accident, -pressed flat, and so closed. - -The utility of the black art mat, however, does not depend upon the -pocket only. Its unbroken or “plain” side, or indeed a mat wholly without -pockets may also be very effectively used for vanishing purposes. In this -case a little auxiliary appliance comes into play. This is a small velvet -patch, serving as an “overlay.” It may be round or square, according -to the purpose for which it is intended to be used. For coin-vanishing -purposes it is best circular, and about two inches (or less, as the -case may be) in diameter. The foundation is in this case a disc of thin -card covered on both sides with velvet, in colour and texture _exactly -corresponding with that of the mat_, under which conditions the patch, -when laid on the mat, will be invisible. The exact similarity of the two -surfaces is a point of the highest importance for black art effects, and -the velvet used, if not actually silk velvet, should at least be of the -silk-faced kind. Velvet which is all cotton will never give satisfactory -results. - -If a coin be laid on any part of the mat the performer has only (in the -supposed act of picking it up) to lay the velvet patch over it to render -it invisible. If it is desired to reproduce the coin, a handkerchief -shown to be empty, may be laid over the patch, and a moment or two later -picked up again, bringing away the overlay within it, and again revealing -the coin _in statu quo_. A practical example of the use of this device -will be found in the case of the trick entitled _Lost and Found_, _post_. - -[Illustration: FIG. 10] - -Another little device which will be found useful in connection with the -black art mat is a cardboard disc covered as above, to one side of which -a coin, say a half-crown or half-dollar, is cemented as in Fig. 10. Such -a patch, laid on the mat, coin side down, will attract no notice, but -the mere act of turning it over will at any given moment produce the -coin. The “change” of a coin may be expected very neatly by the aid of -this device. Suppose, for example, that the performer desires to retain, -unknown to the spectators, possession of a marked coin just handed to -him. He lays it, to all appearance, in full view upon the table, but as a -matter of fact merely turns over a patch, loaded as above, already on the -table, the borrowed coin remaining in his hand. - -The velvet patch may also be utilised in another way for “changing” a -borrowed coin. The performer, asking the loan of a marked coin, brings -forward held in his left hand a velvet mat (of small size) whereon to -receive it; the right hand meanwhile holding palmed against the second -and third fingers the velvet patch, and between this and the hand a -substitute coin of similar kind. Turning (to the left) towards his table, -with the coin in full view on the mat, he (apparently) picks it up and -holds it aloft with the right hand, placing the now empty mat alone -on the table. What he really does is to lay the velvet patch over the -borrowed coin and to pick the substitute in its place. The original lies -_perdu_ on the mat, whence it is child’s play to gain possession of it at -any later stage of the trick. - -The process may be varied by placing the mat, after receiving the -borrowed coin upon it, at once on the table, and a little later picking -up the mat with the left hand, then proceeding as above indicated. The -advantage of this plan is that the turn to the table to pick up the mat -masks for the moment the right side of the performer and gives him a -convenient opportunity to palm the coin and patch, bestowed in readiness -in the _pochette_ on that side. - -The same principle may be applied with appropriate modifications to card -tricks. The idea of the black art mat is so completely a novelty that I -have not found leisure to give it the full consideration it deserves, -and have probably far from exhausted its possibilities, but I offer by -way of illustration the trick next following, which it seems to me would -be rather effective, particularly as an introduction to some other card -trick. We will call it - - -A MAGICAL TRANSPOSITION - -Prepare two cards, say an eight of hearts and a seven of spades, by -blackening all their edges save one of the narrow ends,[4] and backing -each with velvet matching the mat. Lay the two cards so treated face down -with the white edge towards yourself on the mat at some little distance -apart, or preferably on separate mats. Force corresponding cards on two -members of the company and deliver an oration to something like the -following effect: - -“We hear people talk sometimes about the quickness of the hand deceiving -the eye. I suppose such a thing must be possible, or nobody would have -thought of it, but it seems to me that if it did anything of the kind, -either the hand must be extra quick, or the eye extra slow. I know I -should be afraid to attempt anything of that sort myself, but if you -are a magician of the right sort you have no need to do so, for you can -deceive the eye without any quickness at all. I will prove it to you by -means of these two cards which have been chosen. Please give me one of -them. I don’t mind which.” - -We will suppose that the card handed up is the eight of hearts. - -“Notice please what card this is; the eight of hearts. You can’t possibly -mistake it for any other card, can you? I will turn it down here on the -table. And now for the other card.” (It is held up that all may see -it.) “This one, you see, is the seven of spades. No mistake about that, -either! I will lay that one here.” The card is in each case laid upon the -velvet-covered card of the opposite kind. - -“Please don’t forget which is which. There has been no quickness of the -hand so far, has there? Now I am going to make these two cards change -places.” (You touch each with the wand.) “Presto, change!” (Picking up -the upper and lower cards exactly one upon the other you show what was a -moment previously the eight of hearts, but which now appears to be the -seven of spades.) “One card has changed, you see. And now for the other.” -(You show the other pair after the same fashion.) “And here we have the -eight of hearts. I will now order them to change back again.” You lay -both pairs again face down. - -“Now I again give the cards a touch with my wand, and say ‘Right about! -Change!’ and now, you see” (showing the faces of the original cards), -“they have returned to their original positions. - -“Now you will realise, if you think about the matter, that those two -cards couldn’t in any natural way change places without your seeing them -do it, neither could the one change into the other. But this is where -magic comes in. What I really did was to hypnotise you a little so as -to make you fancy, when I told the cards to change, that the eight of -hearts was the seven of spades, and that the seven of spades was the -eight of hearts. It’s quite simple, when you know it, and you can see for -yourselves that the quickness of the hand has had nothing to do with the -matter. For my own part I like to do things slowly; the more slowly the -better, and then you can all see how it’s done.” - -The trick is simple enough; but it will test the performer’s expertness -as to neatness of execution. He must be careful in the first place to -put each of the drawn cards as exactly as possible on the opposite -velvet-backed card; and in picking up two cards together he should -frame them, so to speak, between the middle finger and thumb at top and -bottom, and the first and third fingers at the sides. Held in this manner -they rest squarely one upon the other and there is little fear of their -“duplicity” (or “duplexity”) being perceived. In the act of again turning -the double card down the upper one should be partially drawn off the one -below it; this facilitating the picking of it up alone a few moments -later. - -An illustration of the use of the same device in a somewhat different -form will be found in the item next described, and in the trick entitled -_“Where is it?” post_. Other ways of using it will suggest themselves to -any reader of an inventive turn. - -[4] Better still, thicken the under edge by the interposition between -card and velvet of a slip of white card, as described in _The Detective -Die, post._ - - -THE DETECTIVE DIE - -This is another of the new departures dependent upon the use of the -velvet mat. Broadly stated, the effect of the trick is as follows. - -One of a group of six different cards laid out in a row or rows -repeatedly changes place with some other, the position which it occupies, -or to which it has moved, being indicated by the cast of an ordinary die. -This may be repeated any number of times.[5] - -The requirements for the trick are as follows: - -1. The Velvet Mat. This should be one with a plain surface, dimensions -preferably eighteen inches by ten, so as to admit of the six cards being -laid in one row. A smaller size, say twelve by nine, may suffice, the six -cards in this case being arranged in two rows. In either case there must -be a space of an inch or so between each pair. - -2. Six cards of like denomination (say for the purpose of illustration -six queens of diamonds), each backed with black velvet and blackened -at the edges all around save at one end. Here the card is thickened by -the interposition of a slip of white cardboard between itself and the -velvet, so that the card as viewed from that end shall show a clearly -visible white edge. Each card has all four of its corners snipped off to -a microscopic extent, say a sixteenth, or less, of an inch. - -3. An ordinary pack of cards one of which (in the case supposed, the -queen of diamonds) bears a mark upon its back recognisable by the -performer, but not conspicuous enough to be noticed by any one else. - -4. An ordinary die and dice-box, or a champagne tumbler to be used in -place of the latter. - -5. A tray or plate, about six inches in diameter, whereon to throw the -die. - -6. The wand. - -_Preparation._ Velvet mat on table, and laid upon it, face down in a row -(or a double row, in the case of a small mat), the six velvet-backed -cards. These, so laid, will be undistinguishable by spectators at a very -short distance from the mat itself. Each is laid with its “white” end -toward the hinder part of the table, so that this shall be visible to the -performer when standing behind it. The marked queen of diamonds is laid -on the top of the pack. The die and dice-box, on their tray, are laid on -the mat, which may partially cover two or more of the six cards. - -_Presentation._ Performer, picking up the pack of cards with his right -hand, transfers it to his left, leaving the queen of diamonds palmed in -the right. Picking up the tray and its contents with the right hand and -advancing with it, he offers the pack to some member of the company, -saying: “Will you kindly look well over this pack of cards and satisfy -yourself that there is nothing exceptional about them; and when you have -done so give them a thorough shuffle. And you, Sir” (handing tray and -die to another spectator), “please test this die in any way your please. -Throw it as many times as you like. I want you to be quite sure that -it throws a different number each time, and that it is not loaded, or -‘faked’ in any way. - -“I don’t like bothering people to examine things, for in most cases it -is a mere waste of time. But in this case I have a special reason for -asking. There is something about this pack of cards and this die which I -myself don’t understand; and I shall be much obliged to anyone who will -help me to do so. As a matter of fact, these cards, though quite ordinary -in other respects, are afflicted with a peculiar restlessness. They -change places without notice and without any apparent reason. If I were -to try to play bridge with them, for instance, I should find as likely as -not that my best trump had invisibly left my hand and passed over to the -enemy, which would naturally upset my game and get me into trouble with -my partner. The die is equally peculiar, but in another way. From some -curious effect of sympathy it knows where a given card is to be found -when I don’t know myself. - -“The only possible explanation I can think of for their peculiarities is -the fact that both cards and die were formerly the property of an old -magician, and that after his death they were shut up together for some -years in the same box with this wand, which also belonged to him, and -that they have imbibed some of its magical qualities. I will give you a -sample of their ‘eccentricities.’” - -Performer takes back the cards and proceeds to force the queen of -diamonds on some member of the company (a lady for choice). Leaving -the drawn card for the time being in her hands, he asks a gentleman to -shuffle and cut the rest of the pack and count off from the cut five -indifferent cards. The card drawn by the lady is then shuffled with -these, so that its position among the six shall be unknown. Performer, -taking these from the holder, deals them in a row (or double row, as the -case may be) upon the velvet mat, placing each exactly over one of the -velvet-backed cards; the white hinder edges of these guiding him as to -their positions. - -“We will now consider these cards as numbered in regular order, One, -Two, Three, Four, Five, Six! Among them somewhere or other, is the card -the lady chose. At what number it stands nobody knows (I can assure you -that I don’t), but the die will tell us instantly. May I ask you, Madam, -to name your card. The queen of diamonds; you say? Good! Now will the -gentleman who holds the die kindly throw it. What is the number thrown? -A three?” (Whatever the number happens to be.) “The die says the card -stands number three. Let us see whether that is correct.” - -He picks up the two cards occupying the position indicated, and shows -the face of the undermost, which is of course seen to be the queen of -diamonds. - -“But now we come to the more remarkable feature of the case. I told you -about the queer way in which the cards change places. Even in this short -time I daresay the lady’s card has got tired of being number three, and -has moved away to some other number. If so, the die will tell us. Throw -it again, Sir, please.” - -This is done, the die bringing up a new number, say “five.” - -“The die declares that the card has moved, and now stands fifth. We shall -soon see whether such is really the case. First, however, let us see -whether it has really departed from number three.” - -Performer has meanwhile replaced the two cards just lifted. He now lifts -the upper one only, which (being one of the indifferent cards) shows -a different face. “The queen has gone, you see. And now to ascertain -whether she has really passed to number five.” - -The two cards standing at that number are lifted together, and again a -queen of diamonds is exhibited. The trick can of course be repeated any -number of times, but it is better not to prolong it beyond a third or -fourth “move.” - -In picking up two cards together, in order to show the undermost, they -are lifted with second finger at top, thumb at bottom and the first and -third fingers at the sides. Thus “framed” so to speak, the two cards -will lie squarely the one upon the other and be undistinguishable from a -single card. When it is desired to lift the upper card alone, it should -be nipped between the second finger at top right-hand corner and thumb -at bottom left-hand corner, when it will be brought away clear without -difficulty. - -There is one contingency for which the performer must be prepared, -namely, that the throw of the die may happen to correspond with the -actual position of the card drawn. Both cards of the pair are in this -case alike, and the performer cannot, at the succeeding throw, show -that the drawn card is no longer in its late position. This possibility -is provided for by having the back of the card marked as before -explained. Should the contingency in question arise, the performer, -having meanwhile noted the marked card, does not call attention to the -disappearance of the queen from that number, but proceeds at once to show -that it has moved to its new position. There is not the smallest fear -that anyone will notice the omission. - -[5] Since the description which follows was written, it has come to my -knowledge that there is already on sale a trick on somewhat similar lines -in point of _effect_ entitled _The Educated Die_. I need hardly say that -my own trick, so far as I am concerned, is absolutely original. The -advertised description of _The Educated Die_ would suit either trick, but -there is little further resemblance between them. - - -THE DISSOLVING DICE - -_To be worked on a Black Art Table_ - -The requisites for this trick are as under: - -1. Three small billiard balls, one red, two white. - -2. A white half-shell to correspond, vested or placed in a pochette. - -3. Three hollow wooden dice, each of such a size as just to contain one -of the balls, and lined inside with velvet to prevent “talking.” One side -of each is left open, but the opening can be closed at pleasure by the -insertion of a loose side with a beveled edge. When this is in position, -the die appears solid. The inner surface of each of the loose sides is -also covered with black velvet, so that when lying with that side upwards -on a black art table it is practically invisible. - -4. Three cardboard covers, fitting easily over the dice. In preparation -for the trick the three balls are placed inside the dice, and these are -placed on the table, open side upward, but with the loose sides inserted -on top, and the covers over them. - -_Presentation._ The opening “yarn” may run as follows: - -“I once read a story about a man who invented a most ingenious piece of -furniture of the ‘combination’ kind. It started, say, as a table, but by -giving it a pull here and a push there, it became a step-ladder. Another -pull and push, and it turned into a mangle, or by just turning a button -or two, you could make it a clothes-horse. - -“The story says that at first it was a great success, but after a little -while the thing began to work too easily, and sometimes changed of its -own accord when least expected, which was a drawback. It was annoying, -naturally, when you were using it as a step-ladder, and hanging up a -picture, to have it suddenly turn into a clothes-horse, and land you on -the floor. It was vexing, too, when it was a table, and the family were -seated round it at breakfast, to have it turn into a mangle, and mangle -the cups and saucers. - -“I shouldn’t care myself to have a piece of furniture like that: it would -make life too exciting. But the story gave me an idea. It struck me what -a convenience it would be, after showing one of my little experiments, -to be able to turn the articles I had been using into what I wanted for -the next. I haven’t got very far as yet, but I have made a beginning in a -small way, and I will show you how it’s done. - -“I have here three wooden dice, with a cover for each of them.” (Take -off all three covers, placing each beside its own die. Then, placing one -of them on the end of your wand, advance with it to the company, tacitly -inviting anyone who pleases to take it off and examine it.) “I use these -covers to spare the feelings of the dice at the critical moment. Like -myself, they are rather bashful. They don’t mind doing the Jekyll and -Hyde business, but they don’t like to be seen doing it. By the way, there -is a very ancient trick (believed to have been invented by Noah in the -Ark, to amuse the boys on a wet Sunday), which is worked by means of a -sham die fitting over the real one. Please take my word for it that I do -not use any such stale device. If I did, you may be quite sure I should -not mention it. These are all three genuine dice. They are rather too -large to play backgammon with, but save as to size, they are merely big -brothers of the regular article. Most of you know, no doubt, that in -properly made dice, the points on opposite sides always together make -seven. Notice please, that each of these dice has the numbers placed -correctly.” (Taking up one of the dice and turning it about.) “You see, -five on this side, two on that; together, seven. Three on this side, four -on that; together, seven. Six on this side, one on that; again seven.” - -This is repeated, in a casual way, with the other two dice, the object -being two-fold, viz.: first, by showing all six sides, to induce the -belief that the dice are solid, and secondly, to enable the performer, -in replacing them on the table, to turn each the other way up, so as to -bring the loose side undermost. This is best done by placing the thumb -on top of the die, with the first and second fingers behind it, then -tilting the die over a little to the front, and slipping the two fingers -underneath it. After showing it on all sides, as above mentioned, it is -an easy matter to replace it with the loose side undermost, as desired. - -“Now, as it happens, I have no immediate use for dice, but I want to -show you a pretty little effect with billiard-balls. Naturally, the -thing to be done is to change the dice into billiard-balls. It’s quite -easy, if you are provided with my patent quick-change combination dice. -All you need to think about is to take care to have even numbers in -front.” (You turn the dice accordingly, and in so doing lift each die -a little, and shift it forward a couple of inches or so, leaving the -loose side undisturbed just behind it, the ball travelling forward with -the die, though still covered by it.) “You don’t see why they should -show even numbers? Because they would look ‘odd’ if they didn’t. Quite -simple,--when you know it. Now I cover all three dice over, to spare -their blushes, as I explained just now. I wave my wand over them and say, -‘Presto! Proximo! Change!’ And we shall find the dice have all turned to -billiard-balls.” - -The right hand lifts the first cover, pressing its sides sufficiently to -lift the die within it, exposing the ball, and in bringing it down again -lands it close to one of the wells of the table. The exposed ball is -picked up with the left hand, and while the attention of the company is -attracted in that direction, the die is allowed to slide out of its case -into the well, after which the ball and cover are brought forward and -handed to someone of the company. - -The other two balls are now uncovered in the same way, but in this case -the dice may be left in their covers, the offer of the first cover, found -empty as above, having sufficiently proved that they really disappear. - -“Well, we have got our three billiard-balls. Good, so far. Next, can any -gentleman oblige me with the loan of a billiard table? Nobody offers: -that’s unfortunate. Well, does any gentleman happen to have a cue about -him. No again? Well, perhaps it would be ‘cuerious’ if any gentleman had. -I beg your pardon, it slipped out unawares. It shall not occur again. - -“It’s unfortunate that I can’t borrow a billiard table and a cue, because -it prevents my showing you my celebrated break of ninety-three off the -red with my eyes shut. When I showed it to Gray, he turned green, but -that is another story. You don’t believe it? Well, I told you it was a -story. - -“Anyhow, as we have got the balls, we must do something with them.” - -The sequel may vary, according to the fancy of the performer, and his -skill in ball-conjuring. For lack of a more effective _dénouement_, the -trick may be brought to a finish as follows: - -Secretly getting the shell ball into his right hand, and picking up the -red ball with the left, the performer proceeds: - -“Well, here we have three balls, one red and two white. To prevent ill -feeling between them, I think we had better make them all the same -colour: and as the white are in the majority, we will have them all -white. It is quite easy, if you know how to do it. You have only to -breathe on the ball, give it a roll round in the hand to take the colour -off, and there you are.” - -After breathing on the ball, you bring the right hand containing the -shell over it, and exhibit it, shell in front. You then transfer it in -the same condition, to the opposite hand. Then pick up one of the two -white balls with the right hand, transfer it to the left and show the two -side by side. Then pick up and add the third ball, in so doing letting -the red ball fall into the right hand, and while calling attention to the -three in the opposite hand, drop it into the profonde. You then bring -up the shell over one or other of the two solid white balls, thereby -transforming the three into two. Drop the solid from the shell into the -right hand, making the two into one; finally causing the disappearance of -this last after the usual manner. - -If the reader (being an expert) is provided with a spare red ball and -red shell, he may offer the choice as to which shall be the colour of -all three, finally causing their disappearance after the manner above -described, or his own version thereof. - - -WHERE IS IT? - -This is another of the tricks dependent on the novel application of the -black art principle. - -For programme purposes the trick may, if preferred, be entitled “The -Erratic Shilling.” Its effect may be broadly described as follows: - -A marked shilling, lent by some member of the company, after being -professedly magnetised or mesmerised by rubbing, is laid upon a black -velvet mat and covered with a playing card, face down. Two other cards -are laid (also faces down), one on each side of the first, at a few -inches distance from it, and the audience are given to understand that -the rubbing has imparted to the coin the power to travel from card to -card at command, and indeed sometimes of its own accord. When the card -which covered the coin is lifted, this is found to be the case. The -shilling is no longer where first seen, but is found to have placed -itself under one of the other two cards. The spectators may be invited to -say under which of the cards they would like the coin to pass, when it -will place itself accordingly. The coin may be identified by the owner -in the course of the trick, as well as at its close. - -The requirements for the trick are as follows: - -1. The velvet mat. - -2. A pack of cards, arranged as presently to be explained. - -3. Three overlays (see p. 20), each consisting, in the present instance, -of a court card, backed with velvet of similar tint and texture to that -with which the mat is covered. Three of the edges of each card are -blackened, but the fourth (one of its shorter sides) is left white, and -thickened by the insertion of an extra slip of white card along that end. -The effect of this is that, as the card lies on the mat, its white edge -is visible from that side, but from no other position. - -4. Three cards, corresponding with the three overlays, which we will -suppose to represent the queen of clubs, and the knaves of spades and -diamonds respectively. The queen is wholly unprepared, but each of the -two knaves has a point of fine wire, or a black bristle projecting a -sixteenth of an inch or so, midway from each of its sides. The “queen” -overlay is furnished with similar points, the object of these being to -enable the performer the more easily to lift a given card with or without -its duplicate overlay. - -In preparing for the trick the two “knave” overlays, each covering a -shilling, are laid beforehand on the mat, velvet side up, eight or ten -inches apart, as shown in Fig. 11, under which circumstances they are -invisible to the spectators at a few feet distance, and very nearly so -to the performer, save that their white edges, turned towards himself, -furnish him with an exact guide to their position. On the top of the pack -are laid, first the two knaves. On these the queen overlay, and uppermost -the unprepared queen. - -[Illustration: FIG. 11] - -In presenting the trick the borrowed shilling is laid on the mat midway -between the two overlays already on the table, and is covered with the -top card of the pack, the third overlay being lifted off with it, and -resting beneath it with its centre as nearly as possible over the coin. - -The two following cards are now laid one on each side of the first, as -in Fig. 12, each on the corresponding overlay, the white edges of these, -visible to the performer, but not to the company, serving as guides to -exact position. When the performer desires to show that the coin is not -under a given card, he raises the card only, lifting it lengthwise, and -leaving the coin covered by the overlay. When he desires to exhibit a -coin, he picks up the card covering it breadthwise between finger and -thumb and with it the overlay beneath it. - -[Illustration: FIG. 12] - -The introductory patter may run as follows: - -“You have all heard, no doubt, of what is called the thimblerig trick, -frequently exhibited at fairs and on race-courses. Some of you gentlemen -may even have parted with a little money over it. For the benefit of the -ladies I will explain what it is. - -“The operator has before him on a small board or tray three thimbles, -or half walnut-shells. He exhibits a small pea, or a pellet the size of -a pea, which he affectionately calls the ‘joker.’ This he places under -one of the thimbles, all three of which he then shifts about on the tray; -inviting the spectators to bet with him as to which thimble the pea is -under. He has two or three confederates, who bet, and naturally win, -but if an outsider is rash enough to back his own supposed smartness he -loses; for as a matter of fact the pea is not placed under either of -the thimbles at all until after the bet is made, when it is skilfully -introduced under whichever thimble best suits the performer. - -“The trick is in truth a mere affair of dexterity; the performer having -acquired by long practise the power of placing the pea under any thimble -he pleases. What I propose to show you is a similar effect, but more -surprising, because, as you will see, there is no room for dexterity, or -indeed any form of trickery; so that I have to depend entirely upon my -magic power. I shall use a shilling, as being more easily seen than a -pea, and three cards from this pack to represent the thimbles. - -“Will some gentleman oblige me with the loan of a shilling; marked in -such a way that he may be sure of knowing it again.” - -Receiving the coin in his right hand, the performer makes believe to -transfer it to his left; wherein he already has a shilling of his own. -Surreptitiously depositing the coin lent to him behind the pack of cards -on the table, he exhibits the substitute on the palm of the left hand and -rubs it with the fingers of the right. - -“I do this,” he explains, “in order to drive out all adverse magnetisms, -and to substitute my own. I will now put the coin in full view on the -table and cover it with a card. See that I do so fairly.” - -After laying down the coin he takes the top card of the pack, and with -it, unknown to the spectators, the overlay beneath it, and lowers them on -to the coin. - -“Notice particularly, please, where I have placed the coin, and notice -too that I do not touch it again. I will now place two more cards, one -on each side of the first one.” He does so, letting the spectators see -clearly that there is nothing in the hand save the card itself, and then -slowly lowering it exactly on to one of the two overlays on the table. -“Now I make a few magnetic passes over the cards, so.” He waves his wand -backwards and forwards above the cards, at a few inches’ distance. - -“And now, where is the coin? Still under the middle card, you would say? -You are mistaken.” He lifts that card lengthwise, leaving the overlay -covering the coin; then replacing the card. “It is no longer there, you -see. In point of fact it has passed under this card.” - -He lifts one of the side cards breadthwise, the overlay coming with -it, and exposes the coin beneath it. “Here it is, you see. We will try -once more.” He replaces the card and then shows, in like manner, that -the coin has passed to the card on the opposite side. After one or two -transpositions have been shown, the audience being allowed to say under -which card the coin shall appear, and the last shift having been to one -of the side positions, the performer says: “I should like you to be -satisfied that it is really the marked coin and no other, that wanders -about in this way. I will ask the gentleman who lent it to me to verify -his mark.” - -He picks up from one of the side positions the coin last uncovered and -brings it forward, but in transit “switches” it for the borrowed coin, -which he has a moment previously picked up from its resting place behind -the pack. It is, of course, this last which he offers for identification, -again exchanging it for the substitute before replacing this in its -former position. The final reproduction must be from under the centre -card, the performer again ringing the changes before returning the coin -to the owner. At the close of the trick all three cards are placed on the -pack, the centre overlay going with them. The other two overlays are left -on the mat, each still covering its own coin, and the whole being carried -off together. If the mat is of the folding kind it can be closed before -removal, effectually concealing the accessories used in the trick. - -Some amount of skill will be found necessary to pick up the card with -or without the corresponding overlay, as may be desired. The difficulty -however speedily disappears with practice. On the other hand, the trick -is well worth the trouble needed to master it, for if the spectators are -convinced (as, given perfect execution, they should be) that it is really -the borrowed coin which travels about as it appears to do, nothing short -of genuine magic will furnish an adequate explanation. - -The performer is of course by no means bound to adopt the _mise en scène_ -above suggested. If preferred, the patter might be based on a supposed -plot between the two knaves to rob the queen, the coin representing the -stolen property, secretly passed from the one to the other when either -was accused of the theft. The story might conclude with an appeal by the -queen to a benevolent magician, through whose good offices her property -is brought back to its original position, and in due course restored to -her. The touch of the mystic wand would naturally play an important part -in effecting the restoration. - - - - -CARD TRICKS - - -ARITHMETIC BY MAGIC - -_Preparation._ The two “flower-pots” (see page 5), separated, are placed -upon the table. Also the card mat (see page 1), loaded with the _ten_ of -any given suit, say diamonds, taken from the pack performer is about to -use, and a double-faced card, representing on the one side the seven, and -on the other the three of the same suit. The deuce and five of same suit -to be laid on the top of the pack. - -Performer, advancing pack in hand, palms off the two top cards, and -offers the rest to be shuffled. This done, he forces these two cards on -different persons. On receiving back one of them, he brings it to the -top; executes a false shuffle leaving it in the same position; brings it -again to the middle by the pass, and has the second card replaced upon -it; then, once again making the pass, brings both together to the top. - -(The use of the Charlier pass is here recommended.) - -The patter may be to something like the following effect: “Two cards have -been chosen, ladies and gentlemen. I can’t say what they are, but I can -very easily find out. I shall simply order them to rise up and paw the -air. It all depends on the strength of the will. I myself happen to have -a very strong will, in fact, I don’t know anyone who has a stronger will, -except my wife. I exert my will, and say, ‘first card, rise!’ and up it -comes, as you see.” - -Stepping well back from the spectators, so that they cannot distinguish -from what part of the pack the card comes, he works up the hindmost card -by the familiar “hand” method. (“Modern Magic,” p. 129.) - -“Here we have one of the two cards. Let us see what it is. The five -of diamonds! Good! And now for the other. Second card; rise! Up comes -another card, you see, the deuce of diamonds. Those are the cards which -were drawn, are they not? - -“Now the question arises, ‘what shall we do with them?’ It is a pity the -ladies didn’t choose bigger cards. You can’t ‘go nap’[6] on a deuce and -a five, can you? I think I can’t do better than use them to show you a -little experiment in conjurer’s arithmetic. Will some young mathematician -among the audience kindly tell us what two and five, added together, -make?” (He waits for reply, but if none, pretends to hear one.) “Seven! -Right first time. And if you take two from five how many remain? Three? -Good again. Really there are lot of clever people about, if you know -where to look for them. - -“Now I want to show you that the cards know all about it themselves; in -fact, they are just as clever at doing sums as we are. I will take these -two cards and drop them into one of these pretty flower-pots. Let me show -you first that it is quite empty.” - -He lays the cards on the little mat while showing inside of flower-pot -(the one with secret pocket), then picks up mat, and transfers it from -hand to hand, showing, without remark, that the hands are otherwise -empty, and lets the two cards slide off it into the flower-pot, the -concealed cards naturally going with them. - -“Now, ladies and gentlemen, what shall the cards do for you, the -addition, or the subtraction sum? It is all the same to me. The addition? -Very good. They can’t talk, so they will call another card from the pack -to give you the answer. Yes, here we have it. Five--and two--are--seven.” - -As he names each card, he produces it from the flower-pot, the third -being the double-faced card, shown as the seven. - -“Now I can hear what some of you are thinking. Oh, yes! I often hear what -people think. You are thinking that if you had said subtraction instead -of addition, I should have been in what is popularly called a hole. But -you are mistaken. Now we will ask the cards to do the subtraction sum. -The seven will go back to the pack, and send another card in its place.” -He drops all three cards back into the flower-pot, and brings them up as -before, save that this time the trick card is made to face the other way. -“_Five_--less _two_--are _three! Quod erat demonstrandum_, as our old -friend Euclid used to say when he had just floored a new poser. As the -cards seem to be in a good humour, we will try them once more, and see if -we can get them to do a little multiplication.” (He drops the three cards -into the flower-pot, as before, but this time lets the fake card fall -into the pocket.) “Five times--two--are ‘ten.’” (Showing the two cards -and the ten, in that order.) - -“Now I will ask some gentleman to see that these three cards really -belong to the pack. The three and seven went back to it as soon as they -were done with. The flower-pot, as you see, is again empty.” (He shows by -lifting it that apparently it is so.) - -If the first choice of the audience is for subtraction the order of -production will naturally be varied accordingly. - -[6] To endeavor to take all five tricks in the game of Napoleon. - - -THOSE NAUGHTY KNAVES - -This item may be described, if preferred, as “Knavish Tricks.” - -_Requirements._ Card mat loaded with knaves of spades, hearts and -diamonds, taken from the pack in use. Knave of clubs on top of pack. - -_Presentation._ Advance, palming off the knave of clubs, and offer pack -to be shuffled. When it is returned, force the knave on one of the -company. Borrow a hat, and after showing that it is empty, place it, -crown downwards, on the table. Receive back the drawn card upon the mat, -remarking that you will place it in the hat, which you do accordingly, -the other three knaves going in with it. Then, assuming a worried -expression, deliver patter to something like the following effect. - -“I am afraid, ladies and gentlemen, that I shall not be able to show -you the experiment I had intended. I have a telepathic nerve in my left -thumb, a sort of private fire alarm, only more so, which always gives me -warning when things are going wrong, and I feel it now. If you have read -‘Macbeth,’ you will remember that one of the witches says: - - ‘By the pricking of my thumbs, - Something wicked this way comes.’ - -“I have often wondered whether that old lady could have been a sort -of great-great-great grandmother of mine. Magic certainly runs in the -family, and we may have inherited it from her. Anyhow, I have just the -same sort of sensation myself. Unfortunately, in my case the warning is -incomplete. I dare say you will remember that story (I rather think it’s -in Macaulay’s ‘Lays of Ancient Rome’), about Little Queen Cole. Her -Majesty had the misfortune to develop a mole upon her nose, and King Cole -was worried about it. He consulted Old Moore and Zadkiel, and all the -leading astrologers of the day, but all they could tell him was - - ‘A mole upon the face - Shows that something will take place, - But not what that something will be.’ - -That’s just my case. My prophetic thumb merely tells me that something is -wrong, but doesn’t say what. It may be drains, or the house on fire, or -something in the county court. You never can tell! - -“Of course it’s nothing of that sort now. In the present case it has no -doubt something to do with the experiment I want to show you. You chose -your card quite freely, did you not, Madam? It never matters to me in the -least what card is chosen, with the exception of one particular card, -which is a holy terror. May I ask if you happened to draw the knave of -clubs? Yes? I feared as much. The knave of clubs is the bane of my life. -He is always endeavouring to get himself chosen, and then he does his -best to upset my arrangements. And the worst of it is, he leads away the -other three knaves. The four of them form a secret society, which they -call ‘The cheerful blackguards.’ The knave of clubs is the president, and -the rest have to do just as he tells them. He communicates with them by -means of a sort of wireless telegraphy, and when he calls they go to him -at once.” (You here make the “click.”) “Did you hear that sound? That’s -his call now, despatched by wireless from the hat to the very middle of -the pack. I have no doubt that we shall find that the other three knaves -have already left it, and joined him in the hat.” (Make believe to look -over the pack, and hand it to a spectator.) “Yes! just as I thought: they -are all gone.” (To a spectator.) “See for yourself, sir. Not a single -knave left. And here they all are, in the hat.” (Whence they are produced -accordingly.) - -As the “click” in some cases adds much to the effect of a trick, and as -it may to some readers be an unfamiliar sleight, I may pause to explain -that it is executed as follows: Take the pack in either hand, held -upright between forefinger and thumb, a little more than halfway down, -with the middle finger curled up behind it as in Fig. 13. With the tip -of the third finger bend back the extreme bottom corners of the last -half dozen or so of the cards, allowing them to escape again smartly. -The sound made by the corners in springing back again constitutes -the “click.” It needs a little practice, but if the cards are held -properly, and the sleight worked smartly, the sound will be audible at a -considerable distance, whilst the movement of the finger producing it is -quite invisible to the spectators. - -[Illustration: FIG. 13] - -But we have not yet done with our trick. You may resume as follows: - -“I will give you a further illustration of what I have to put up with -from the knaves. I should like you to be satisfied that I have nothing -to do with their bad behaviour.” (You palm off the three top cards, and -with the same hand offer the four knaves to a spectator.) “Will you, sir, -make sure that these really are the four knaves, and then place them here -on the top of the pack,”--offered with the left hand. When the knaves -have been laid upon it, you transfer it to the opposite hand, and palm on -to them the three concealed cards, but immediately slide them off again, -with the uppermost of the four knaves beneath them. You hold them up in a -careless way, so that the audience, catching sight of this card, may be -confirmed in the belief that the cards exhibited in the right hand are -really the four knaves. - -“Here we have the four knaves, at present all together. I will now -distribute them in different parts of the pack, as far apart as possible. -One here, nearly at the bottom, one a little higher up, another about -the middle, and this last” (you show it carelessly), “close to the top.” -(This, being a genuine knave, must be placed among the other knaves.) -“They could hardly be placed farther apart than that: but to make things -a little more difficult for them, I will ask some lady to cut the cards.” - -This done, and the cards handed back to you, you repeat the click. -“There it is again: the wireless signal. You can all bear witness that -I have nothing to do with the matter. Now, Sir, will you kindly examine -the pack, and unless I am much mistaken, you will find that the other -three knaves have answered Black Jack’s call, and that the four cheerful -blackguards have got together again, in which case, with your permission, -I will leave them severely alone, and try some other experiment.” - -The expert will recognise this last effect as a “chestnut” among card -tricks, but it is none the worse on that account, and it forms a -particularly appropriate sequel to the principal trick. - -If the performer possesses the “flower-pot,” one of these will naturally -be used in place of the hat. - - -MAGNETIC MAGIC - -_Requirements._ Card mat, loaded with a single known card (precise -nature optional). Pack of cards with corresponding card at top. A -horseshoe magnet, the larger the better for the sake of effect. The two -flower-pots, placed at some distance apart, preferably on separate tables. - -We will suppose that the card selected for the purpose of the trick is -the ten of spades. Performer advances, and delivers patter to something -like the following effect. - -“By way of a change, I should like now to show you a little experiment in -magnetism, but magnetism of a new kind. The old sort was a comparatively -poor affair. It was only useful with iron or steel. Anything else it -wouldn’t attract for nuts. My sort of magnetism is a very superior -article. It will attract all sorts of things, so long as they are not -too heavy, like a sack of coals, or a lawyer’s bill. So far, I have been -chiefly experimenting with cards, and I will show you how it works. - -“I want three ladies each to choose a card from this pack.” (He forces -the ten of spades, allowing the other two cards to be chosen freely, and -takes all three back, face down, on the mat, keeping in mind which of -them is the forced card.) “I will take one of these cards.” (He picks -up the forced card, and holds it aloft.) “Please all notice what it is: -I don’t want to see it myself. I drop it into this pretty flower-pot” -(actually dropping it into the secret pocket). “And now as to these other -two.” (He picks them up and shows them, then replacing them on the mat.) -“These I will place in the other flower-pot. First, however, I will show -you that at present it is empty.” He does so, and then lets the two cards -slide off the mat into the pot, the concealed card going with them. - -“Now I take this magnet. It is a very powerful magnet, and I make it -still more vigorous by rubbing it on my left coat sleeve. Do you know why -on the left? You all give it up? Because in this case the left happens -to be right. Simple, when you know it, isn’t it? Again, you will observe -that one-half of this magnet is painted red. Can you guess why that is? -It’s so that when it is wanted it is sure to be ‘reddy.’ I hear a lady -smile! Thank you _so_ much! This is the eleven hundred and third time I -have let off that little impromptu joke, and no one has ever laughed at -it till now. - -“Well, as I was saying, or as I was going to say when the lady -interrupted me--I mean complimented me, by smiling--Upon my word, I’ve -forgotten for the moment what I _was_ going to say, but I daresay it was -of no consequence, so we’ll skip it, and proceed at once to ‘business as -usual.’ - -“Observe, I just draw the magnet slowly across from the one flower-pot -to the other, when the single card, being naturally the weaker, will be -drawn out of its own flower-pot, and join the other two.” (Looks into -flower-pot holding the pair.) - -“Yes, it has found its way, as you see.” (Lifts the pot, and shows that -the third card is on the table with the other two.) “And as it’s a -well-known fact that nobody but a bird can be in two places at the same -time, it naturally follows that it is no longer in this other pot, which -is once more empty.” (Lifts it up and shows that it is so.) - -_Variation._ If the flower-pots are not available, the single card may be -placed in a card box, or other suitable appliance adapted for causing its -disappearance, the other two, with the concealed card, being dropped from -the mat into a borrowed hat. - - -THE TELEPATHIC TAPE - -_Requirements._ Two or three yards of half-inch tape or ribbon, wound -on a reel, to which its inner end is secured, and having a loop on its -outer end. Coin mat made adhesive, and two packs of cards, which we will -call A and B respectively. From pack A take a court card (say the queen -of diamonds), and press it face down against the waxed side of the mat: -then turn this over, and place the rest of the pack upon its unprepared -side. On the top of pack B lay the corresponding card, in readiness for -forcing. This pack also to be placed on table. - -_Presentation._ Advance with pack A on the mat. Invite a gentleman to -take it in his own hands and after shuffling, to pick out a card, and -without looking at it, lay it face down on the mat. Remark: “I have asked -you not to look at the card, because I find people fancy I find out by -what is called thought-reading, and if you don’t know the card yourself, -I can’t find it out that way, can I? You are sure you don’t know what -card you have taken? I can honestly say that I don’t. Now please notice -that I don’t look at it, or even touch it--I will place it here, where -you can all keep an eye on it. You had better keep the other eye on me.” - -You accordingly place the mat on the table, in transit keeping the card -just laid upon it in place by the pressure of the thumb, and just as you -reach the table, under cover of your own body, turn over the mat, so as -to bring the adhering card uppermost. - -You then say, picking up the reel, “I must now introduce to your notice -my telepathic tape. Like myself, it isn’t anything particular to look -at, but it has an extraordinary talent for finding out things; even -secrets that people don’t know themselves. Now you will admit that the -name of that card on the table is at present an A1, copperbottomed -secret. Even the gentleman who chose the card doesn’t know what it is; -you don’t know; in fact nobody knows. Nothing could well be more secret -than that. But this tape will find it out. Will you, Sir,”--(addressing -the gentleman who chose the card) “be kind enough to pass this loop over -your left little finger. Thank you, and now I want some lady to assist -me. Perhaps you will oblige, Madam?” A sufficient length of the tape is -unrolled, and the reel placed in the lady’s hands. “And now I will ask -you to do me the further favor of taking a card from this other pack.” -(The second queen is forced on the lady.) - -“Now, Madam, what was the card the gentleman chose? You don’t know? Oh, -yes, you do. The tape has told you. Unless it has betrayed me for the -first time in my experience, it will have compelled you by an effect of -sympathy to draw the very same kind of card as the one freely chosen, as -you will remember from the other pack. What card did you draw? The queen -of diamonds?” (Goes to table, and turns up card on tray.) “The tape was -right, you see. The card the gentleman drew is also a queen of diamonds.” - -In default of the card mat, the trick can be equally well performed by -the aid of the card-box, or any other appliance for “changing” a card. - - -A CARD COMEDY - -This may be otherwise described for programme purposes as “A Royal Row,” -or “A Row in a Royal Family.” - -_Preparation._ Card mat loaded with two kings of hearts: one of them -taken from the pack to be used: the other a spare card. The king of clubs -and queen of hearts to be laid on top of pack. The two flower-pots on -table. - -_Presentation._ Advancing to the company, palm off the two top cards, -and hand the pack to be shuffled. This done, force the palmed cards -on two different persons. Then say, “I want you to take notice that I -do not handle or tamper in any way with either of the cards you have -chosen. Please lay them yourselves face down on this mat. Thank you. Now -still without touching them I will put them temporarily in this elegant -flower-pot, which you observe is quite empty. You see that it has neither -top nor bottom, and nothing between. You couldn’t have anything much -emptier than that, could you?” - -Having duly exhibited the flower-pot (this by the way must be the one -_without_ pocket) you let the two drawn cards slide off the mat into it, -the two concealed kings going with them. Then, assuming a perplexed air, -you say, “I don’t know why it is, but I have that peculiar sensation in -my left thumb that always means that something has gone wrong. What it is -in this case I can’t imagine, but I must find out before we go further. -As the two chosen cards have passed out of my hands, I may now ask the -ladies who drew them to name them. - -“The queen of hearts and the king of clubs, you say? Ah! that accounts -for it. When those two cards come together there is sure to be trouble. -The queen of hearts is a bit of a flirt, and the king of hearts is very -jealous, particularly of the king of clubs, who is rather a gay dog, -though he is old enough to know better. I fancy I hear some sort of -commotion going on in the flower-pot.” (You look into it.) “Yes, it is -just as I feared. The king of hearts has found out that his queen has -gone off with the king of clubs, and has followed the queen post-haste. -Here he is, you see.” (You plunge hand into flower-pot, and take out -and exhibit the two drawn cards, and with them one of the two kings of -hearts.) “It’s too bad, for as a matter of fact the queen of hearts -doesn’t really care two-pence about the king of clubs. In fact she has -even been known to call him a giddy old kipper. - -“But I can’t have my arrangements upset by these little family jars. To -teach the king of hearts better manners I shall put him in solitary -confinement. We will drop him into the other flower-pot, which, as you -see, is also empty.” (The card is in this case not dropped through the -pot, but into the pocket.) - -“Now we shall be able to get on. No! my left thumb tells me that there -is still something not quite right.” (Glance into second flower-pot.) -“Upon my word, this is too bad. The king of hearts has already got away -and followed the queen again.” (Lift flower-pot, and show that the king -has disappeared.) “I thought I had him safe, but his prison, as you see, -is empty, and here he is again in the first flower-pot.” (Show the three -cards accordingly.) “He is too many for me; I can’t show you what I had -intended. I must give it up and try something else.” - -_Variation._ Load mat with a single king of hearts and the queen of -clubs, the latter taken from the pack. Proceed as before up to the -putting of the king in prison, and then exhibit the queen of clubs, -as having come in pursuit of her spouse, the patter being modified -accordingly. The imprisoned king of hearts will still be found to have -escaped, but in this case to have returned to the pack. - -For lack of the two flower-pots, the drawn cards may be dropped with the -concealed pair into a borrowed hat, and the jealous king made to escape -from a card-box, or some similar appliance. - -_Apropos_ of the card-box, by the way, I have always had a sort of -affection for this in its oldest and simplest form, viz., the reversible -flat box with loose flap falling from the one into the other half at -pleasure. I should not recommend the use of it at a school treat, as -there would be much risk of some demon small boy proclaiming to all whom -it might concern that he “knows how that’s done,” but before an average -mixed audience its use is safe enough. Should one of the spectators -happen to be acquainted with the box he will probably smile in a superior -way, pluming himself on having a little inside information, though he -may be no nearer the complete solution of the trick than the rest of the -company. - -The expert will easily guard himself against even this small risk. For -example, he may use a duplicate box, innocent of guile, ostensibly merely -to contain the cards he is about to use, and after turning the pack out -of it upon the table, switch this (obviously empty) box for the faked box -to be used later, or after using the latter he may extract the fake and -the superseded card during the journey back to his table, where the box -will of course be inspection-proof. - -Better still, he may make matters absolutely safe by using an improved -box, which has been christened the “Fast and Loose” card-box. This is -a recent invention of an Italian wizard named Veroni, of Glasgow (an -old soldier of Garibaldi). It is an idealised version of the old flat -box, being of the same shape, but a trifle larger. The loose slab is -retained, but it is only loose when the performer desires it to be so. -The box may be handled beforehand with the utmost freedom, and after a -card has been placed in it it may be closed and re-opened any number of -times, nothing happening till, “Presto,” a mere touch in the right place, -and the flap is free. When the box is now closed, this falls into the -opposite portion, concealing the card, or producing another; and again -locking itself, automatically, in its new position. The box in this -condition will again stand the closest scrutiny. - -Whether this box is yet placed upon the market I cannot say (having -myself been favoured with a sight of an “advance” model), but it will -certainly commend itself to all who appreciate a good thing in the way of -ingenuity of contrivance and mechanical finish. - - -A ROYAL TUG OF WAR - -_Preparation._ Card mat to be loaded with king of hearts and king of -diamonds, _not_ taken from the pack in use. Flower-pots on table. - -Performer advances with ordinary pack, delivering patter to something -like the following effect. “It is not generally known, ladies and -gentlemen, what a lot of human nature there is about a pack of cards. -They have their likes and dislikes, and their little tempers, just as -we have. Some of them are bosom friends; others again hate each other -like rival suitors to the same best girl. The four kings are generally -pretty friendly, but there is a good deal of emulation between them, -particularly between the two red kings on the one hand, and the two black -ones on the other. Each pair claims to be the stronger, and they are -always pleased to have a chance of putting the matter to the test. - -“I will give you an illustration of this, by allowing them to hold a -little tug of war. They have already had six trials, and each side has -won three of them. This evening we will let them play a final game, -which is to settle the matter. Will you, sir, kindly pick out the four -kings for me, and lay them on this little tray. Thank you!” (This done, -performer lays mat with cards on table.) - -“I will drop the two red kings into this flower-pot.” He takes them from -the mat and after showing them drops them into the flower-pot (in reality -into the pocket), “and the black ones into this other.” (The black kings -are allowed to slide directly off the mat, into the flower-pot, the -concealed pair going with them.) “Are your Majesties ready? Silence gives -consent! Then Go!” - -He waits a moment or two, and then looks over into the flower-pot with -the pocket. “Nothing has happened yet. Yes, there goes the king of -diamonds, pulled over to the other side. There’s not much chance now for -the poor king of hearts, left single-handed. He won’t hold out long. Yes! -Now he is gone too.” - -Performer lifts flower-pot, with fingers inside pressing against pocket, -and shows it apparently empty. “And here, in the other flower-pot” (lifts -it and shows the four cards lying together on table) “are all four Kings. -One more score to black. You didn’t see the cards go? Of course you -didn’t; because they fly horizontally, like the aeroplanes, and they go -so fast that they get there almost before they have started.” - - -SYMPATHETIC CARDS - -_Preparation._ Card mat loaded with two cards of different denomination, -say the queen of clubs and the knave of diamonds, _taken from the pack_. -Flower-pots on table. - -_Presentation._ Force the corresponding cards of same colour (in this -case the queen of spades and the knave of hearts), lay the pack aside, -and take the drawn cards back face down on the mat, leaving them thus on -table till needed. The patter may run as follows: - -“As I think I have mentioned before, the cards of a pack, from long -association, become a sort of family. They have their likes and dislikes, -just as human beings have. In particular, there is a curious bond of -sympathy between each pair of the same colour, say the king of hearts -and the king of diamonds, or the ten of clubs and ten of spades. If they -are parted, and they possibly can, they will get together again. - -“I will try to give you an example with the cards that have been drawn. -We will put them for the moment in this pretty flower-pot, which, as -you see, is quite empty.” (Show by lifting it up, that it is so, and -then drop the two cards from the mat into it, the concealed pair going -with them.) “They will only require to be assisted by a gentle electric -current, which I shall create by waving my wand, so. - -“Before we go any further, will the ladies who drew the cards say what -they were,--I don’t mind asking you now, because they have passed out -of my control. The queen of spades and the knave of hearts, you say? A -fortunate choice, for the queen of spades and the knave of hearts happen -to be particular friends, so I think we may now be sure of success. Now -to establish the wireless wave, and I doubt not the queen of clubs and -the knave of diamonds will speedily find them. (Make any appropriate -gesture with wand.) - -“Did you notice a little flash, like the striking of a very inferior -lucifer match in a gale of wind? That’s when they went. Quick work, isn’t -it? The cards were timed by two gentlemen one evening, each with his -own watch. By the one gentleman’s watch they started at one minute past -nine, and by the other gentleman’s watch, they arrived at one minute -_to_ nine, so it is clear that they must have made the journey in two -minutes less than no time. But let us make sure that they have arrived.” -Lift the flower-pot, and show the four cards lying on the table together. -“And now, to convince you that there is no deception, will some lady or -gentleman kindly look through the pack, and make sure that the queen of -clubs and knave of diamonds have really left it.” Which is found to be -the case. - -The trick may of course be worked with any two pairs of cards, the mat -being loaded and the corresponding cards forced accordingly. - - -TELL-TALE FINGERS - -The discovery, in some more or less mysterious way, of an unknown card -is one of the stock feats of the conjurer, and indeed in one shape -or another is one of the most hackneyed of card tricks. But the wise -magician never discards a good trick simply because it is an old one. He -repolishes it, adds a bit here, takes away a bit there, presents it in a -new shape and with new patter, and behold! the “chestnut” of yesterday -becomes a latest novelty of today. - -To obtain the maximum effect from a trick of the above kind, it is -necessary in the first place to convince the spectator that the drawn -card cannot possibly be known beforehand to the performer; and in the -second place to persuade him that it is discovered in some actually -impossible (and therefore magical) way; taking advantage, where possible, -of some known scientific truth which may lend colour to your suggestion. -It is surprising, in conjuring matters, how much even the smallest -percentage of fact increases the power of the average spectator for -swallowing fiction. The patter for the trick which follows has been -arranged upon these lines. - -The requisites for the trick are a pack of cards from which three known -cards have been withdrawn and palmed (or so placed to be in instant -readiness for palming), a hand-mirror, and a silk handkerchief. - -The introductory oration may run somewhat as follows: - -“You all know, ladies and gentlemen, what an important part finger-prints -now play in the detection of crime. Happily there is no connection -between conjuring and crime, beyond the fact that they both begin -with a _C_. No conjurer that I know of has ever murdered anybody or -been murdered himself, and when a conjurer borrows a half-crown, he -always--well, almost always returns it. But each one of us, whether -criminal or curate, burglar or bishop, possesses a definite set of -finger-prints, quite unlike those of anybody else. And, what is more, we -cannot touch anything, ever so lightly, without leaving upon it our sign -manual in the shape of a more or less perfect impression of our fingers, -imperceptible to ourselves, but quite visible to the expert in such -matters. - -“Practice in distinguishing such points forms a highly interesting -study. Of course it must be pursued with a proper amount of tact, or it -may get you into trouble, as in the case of a gentleman I once heard of -who took up the study with more zeal than discretion. He said to his -wife, not leading up to the subject gently, as he should have done, -but in a peremptory sort of way, ‘Maria, I want your finger-prints.’ -Unfortunately, Maria was rather a quick-tempered lady, and she had -just been having a few words, of a hostile nature, with the cook. She -slapped his face, and said, ‘Well, now you’ve got ’em.’ He had! They were -very distinct, but not quite in the shape he wanted. I am going to ask -permission to read some of your finger-prints, but, I trust without fear -of such painful results. - -“In the first place, I should like this pack of cards to be thoroughly -well shuffled.” - -While this is done, performer palms the three known cards, and when the -pack is returned, proceeds to force them on different members of the -company. Each of the drawers is requested to allow his or her card to lie -for a few moments face down on the palm of the outspread hand. The cards -drawn are then returned to the pack, which is again shuffled, and spread -face upward on the table. - -“Each of the three cards which have been drawn now has a complete set of -finger-prints upon its surface, but there are no doubt others on many -other cards, the result of previous handling. To enable me to distinguish -the right ones, I must ask each person who chose a card to give me, for -the purpose of comparison, a fresh impression, on the glass of this -mirror. First, however, we must remove any prints that may already be -upon it.” - -He accordingly breathes upon the glass, and wipes it carefully with the -handkerchief. - -“Now, Sir” (to the person who first drew), “will you kindly press your -hand flat against the glass. Thank you. Not a very clear impression, but -I dare say it will be good enough. I have now only to discover the card -bearing the same imprint, and I shall know that it was the one you drew.” -(He picks it out from the exposed cards on the table.) “Here it is, I -think, the ---- of ----” (as the case may be). - -The other two cards are then discovered after the same fashion. As the -performer knows beforehand what they are, this will give him little -trouble, but he will be wise, for the sake of effect, not to discover -them too readily. For the same reason, great importance should ostensibly -be attached to the thorough cleaning of the hand mirror before each new -attempt, so as to get a clear impression. - -The trick as above described can be worked with any pack of cards, but -where those used are the performer’s own property, he can make it even -more effective by marking the three cards to be freed in such a way as -to be distinguishable (by himself only) by their backs. The drawers in -this case are requested to press their hand against the _back_ of the -card, and the cards are spread face down upon the table, the performer -apparently not knowing the nature of the card indicated to him until he -has turned it up. - - -DIVINATION DOUBLY DIFFICULT - -This trick, though it merely rests upon a combination of methods already -familiar to the expert, may as a whole fairly claim to be a complete -novelty. The _mise en scène_ is so simple, and the room for deception -apparently so small, that to the uninitiated it seems like a genuine -miracle. Unlike most card tricks, it is even better adapted to the stage -than to the drawing-room. - -The effect of the trick, baldly stated, is that the performer divines -the nature of nine cards, selected apparently quite haphazard, and then -picks out the corresponding cards from another pack, freely shuffled and -covered by a handkerchief. - -The requirements for the trick consist of two packs of cards, and an -envelope with adhesive flap, of such a size as to accommodate one of -them. One of the two packs is a “forcing” pack, consisting of three cards -only, each seventeen times repeated. The cards of each kind are however -not grouped all together, as is usually the case, but are arranged -after the manner explained in _More Magic_ (p. 13), viz.: assuming the -three cards to be the knave of clubs, the seven of spades, and the nine -of diamonds, the pack will consist of groups of those three cards, in -the same order, repeated throughout. The effect of this arrangement is -that, wherever the pack be cut, the three cards above or below the cut -will always be a set of those three cards: and the same result follows, -however many times the pack may be cut, or however many such groups may -have been taken from it. - -The second pack has no preparation, but the three cards corresponding to -those of which the forcing pack is composed are so placed as to be ready -to hand for palming. - -The performer advances with the forcing pack, meanwhile executing a -false shuffle of the kind which leaves the pack as if cut, but otherwise -undisturbed as to order. Holding the pack on the outstretched palm of -his left hand, he invites someone to cut it. This done, he takes back -with the other hand the upper portion of the cut, and says, “You have -cut where you pleased, have you not? If you think I made cut at that -particular point, you can cut again. You are satisfied? Then I will ask -you to be good enough to take three cards from the top of this lower -heap. Keep them carefully. Don’t let me see them: in fact don’t show -them just yet to anyone, but please remember exactly what they are.” He -replaces the top half of the cut, and passing to another spectator, at -some little distance from the first, has the pack cut again, and a second -three cards taken in like manner. This is repeated with a third person, -just far enough away from the second as to preclude any possibility of -the three drawers comparing their cards. - -“Now, ladies and gentlemen, you must all agree that I have not sought -to influence the choice of these gentlemen” (or ladies, as the case may -be) “in the slightest degree, and it must be equally clear to you that -I cannot possibly know even one of the cards that have been chosen. To -make sure that I do not get sight of them in any way, we will have them -placed, with the remainder of the pack, in this envelope.” He collects -the cards accordingly, allowing each person who drew to replace his cards -himself in the envelope, and requesting the last person to moisten the -flap, and make all secure. - -Returning to his table, he places the closed envelope in full view. “I -shall now want the assistance of some gentleman. Thank you, sir. Will -you kindly shuffle this other pack for me.” (He runs the cards over -fanwise, showing their faces, so as to prove that they are an ordinary -mixed pack: then hands them to be shuffled, and while this is being -done, palms the three secreted cards.) “Shuffle them thoroughly, please, -and then spread them a little, faces down, upon the table, and lay your -handkerchief over them. - -“Now I am going, in the first place, to attempt a little thought-reading. -I shall endeavour by that means to discover the three cards each person -chose, and then, by means of the sense of touch, which I have cultivated -to a rather unusual degree, to pick them out, without seeing them, from -among the cards under the handkerchief. I shall only ask one indulgence. -To leave a little margin for possible mistakes. I shall ask your -permission to pick out four cards instead of three for each person, so -as to give me one extra chance. Will the gentleman who drew first kindly -look my way, and say to himself slowly, the names of the cards he drew. -Thank you, Sir! I think I read them right.” He inserts his hand under -the handkerchief, and after a little pretended fumbling, brings out the -three palmed cards, with one indifferent card in front of them. He does -not show or look at them, but asks the second chooser to think hard of -his three cards, afterwards taking four more from under the handkerchief. -Having done the same in the case of the third drawer, he spreads the -twelve cards he has taken from under the handkerchief, and shows them -fanwise. Addressing the first drawer, he says, “Your three cards are -among these, I think, sir?” and the same question is then addressed to -the other two choosers, the answer being of course in the affirmative. - -“Now, gentlemen, in order to prove that there is no deception, I will -take away three cards at a time, one from each set of three. Pray observe -that from beginning to end, I have not looked at the face of any card.” -He accordingly removes one of the forced, and two of the indifferent -cards, making however some pretence of selection and throws them aside. -“There are now only two cards belonging to each gentleman left. That is -so, is it not?” - -The question is addressed to each of the three drawers in turn, and -answered accordingly, after which the same process is again twice -repeated. - -“And now, gentlemen, we have three cards left, belonging to neither -of you, which is just as it should be. It is a peculiarity of this -experiment that if it comes out right it always brings good luck to those -taking part in it, so you may all fairly expect to live happily ever -afterwards, and I trust you will.” - -If the performance is given before the family circle, or very -intimate friends (who sometimes consider themselves privileged to be -disagreeable), it is just possible that some ill-mannered person, in the -hope of embarrassing the conjurer, may ask at the close to be allowed to -examine the envelope containing the drawn cards. Such an examination, if -permitted, would of course largely give away the trick. If the performer -has any reason to fear such a contingency, he may guard against it by -“switching” the envelope, during his return to the table with it, for a -duplicate containing an ordinary mixed pack. In some part of this the -three cards corresponding to those drawn should be placed _together_, -as the obnoxious person, if himself one of the drawers, will naturally -expect so to find them. - -At a public performance such a precaution would be supererogatory. - - -A NEW LONG CARD PACK AND A TRICK DEPENDENT ON ITS USE - -Some few months ago I was shown by a clever amateur, Mr. Victor Farrelly, -a pack of cards prepared, after a method of his own, to replace in a more -subtle form, the familiar _biseauté_ pack. Mr. Farrelly’s plan is to -round off, in a very minute degree, three of the corners of an ordinary -pack. If a given card be turned round in a pack so treated, it is obvious -that its unfiled corner will project, to a microscopic extent, beyond -those above and below it, rendering the card instantly discoverable by -touch. - -Mr. Farrelly’s idea is decidedly ingenious, but the uses of the -_biseauté_ pack are rather limited, and the fact that the pack must be -reversed before the card is replaced in it is a drawback. It struck me, -on reflection, that the idea might be developed, in a slightly different -direction, to greater advantage. - -My own plan is as follows: Two packs, exactly alike are used. As to one -of these, I treat all four corners after the manner indicated by Mr. -Farrelly, when any card of the second pack, inserted into the one so -treated, naturally becomes in effect, a long card. There is in this case -no need to reverse the pack, and as the minute projection is duplicated -at each end of the diagonal, a less degree of rounding off is necessary. - -As a practical illustration of the possible uses of such a pack, I -offer the trick which I am about to describe. The expert will recognise -that, save for the use of the new pack, it is merely a combination -of well-known methods, but as regards the mode of presentation it is -original, and I think will be found worthy of a place in the _répertoire_ -of the card-conjurer. - -For the purpose of description we will call the pack with rounded corners -the “short,” and the other the “long” pack. Three known cards are -borrowed from the long pack, which may then be put aside, as it plays no -further part in the trick. These three cards are palmed, and after the -short pack has been shuffled by one of the company, are added to it, and -forced upon three different spectators. We will suppose that the three -selected cards are the queen of hearts, forced on a gentleman; the king -of clubs and the ten of diamonds; the two last mentioned forced on ladies. - -This done, each of the drawers is invited to replace his or her card in -the pack, which is passed from the one to the other for that purpose, and -before it is returned to you is once more shuffled. You then deliver a -“yarn” to something like the following effect: - -“Please bear in mind, ladies and gentlemen, exactly what has been done. -To begin with, you have seen that the pack was thoroughly well shuffled. -Three cards were then freely chosen from it. They have been put back, -not by me, but by the persons who drew them, and the pack has since been -shuffled again. It is therefore obviously impossible that I should know -either what cards have been chosen, or whereabouts they may now be in -the pack. But I enjoy impossibilities. The more impossible a thing is, -the more I want to do it. I will find out these cards or _die_! Don’t be -alarmed, I don’t mean to die just yet; so I must do the other thing. It’s -easy enough, if you know how to do it. - -“In the first place I cut the pack into three portions.” (You cut three -times, nipping the “long” corners between second finger and thumb, at -each of the drawn cards in succession, and placing the cards left at -bottom on one or other of the three heaps; then solemnly rub your wand, -without remark, with a silk handkerchief, and lay it across the tops of -the three packets.) - -“Now, if the electric influence is strong enough, the three chosen cards -will gradually sink down to the bottom of these three heaps. A nice easy -way of finding them out, is it not? It will take a minute or two for the -charm to operate, so in the meantime I will try to find out the names of -the cards for myself by thought-reading. You drew a card, I think, Sir? -Will you kindly think of that card, as hard as you can, and meanwhile -look straight at me? Thank you. Judging by physiognomy, I should say -that you were rather a ladies’ man. Don’t blush, Sir. It’s nothing to -be ashamed of, is it, ladies? But he did blush, didn’t he? Now, being -a ladies’ man, you will naturally have chosen one of the ladies of the -pack, that is to say one of the queens, and your blush suggests that it -was a red queen. Now there are only two red queens to choose from. The -queen of hearts represents Love, and the queen of diamonds Money. If I -read your thoughts aright I feel safe in declaring that you chose the -queen of hearts. That is right, I think? Quite simple, when you know how -it’s done. - -“And now, Madam, for your card. I can see at a glance that you have a -liking for aristocratic society, and you will therefore naturally have -chosen a king. But which king? Think hard of your card, please. A picture -of a dark-complexioned gentleman comes up before my mind’s eye, and I -feel that I can say with confidence that the card you chose was the king -of clubs. Am I right? - -“And you, Madam. I have an idea that you have a taste for pretty things, -particularly jewellery. Such being the case, you would naturally choose -diamonds. Think of your card, please. Thank you. I see I was right in my -guess. The card you chose was the ten of diamonds. - -“And now to verify my discoveries. If my wand has done its work, those -same three cards will now have percolated through the rest, and settled -down at the bottom of these three heaps. Let us see whether they have -done so.” (The three heaps are turned over.) “Yes, here we have them: -the king of clubs, the queen of hearts, and the ten of diamonds. It -is a curious thing for the cards to do, and I daresay you would like -to know how it is done. As a matter of fact, it is done by synthetic -re-adjustment of dissociated atoms. You don’t know what that means, -perhaps? Well, to say the truth, I don’t quite know myself, but that is -the scientific explanation, so no doubt it is correct.” - -The trick may very well end at this point, but if the reader possesses a -card-box, or other apparatus adapted for “vanishing” cards, he may bring -it to a still more striking conclusion. In this case he may continue as -follows: - -“Now, I should like to show you a curious effect of sympathy. I take away -these three cards and hand the rest of the pack to the gentleman who drew -the queen of hearts. Kindly hold it up above your head where all can see -it. The three drawn cards” (show them one by one) “I place in this box. -Again I electrify my wand a little, and lay it across the box. Now I want -each gentleman or lady to think of his or her card. Think of it kindly, -and feel as if you would like to see it again. Think hard, please, -because it is you, not I, that perform this experiment, and if you don’t -think hard it will be a failure. I am pleased to see by the expression of -your countenances that you are all thinking hard. Thank you very much. -You may leave off now. The deed is done. The three cards have left the -box, and gone back to the pack. Please look it through, sir, and tell the -company whether it is not so.” - -The reader, being familiar with the wiles of conjurers, will doubtless -have guessed that the three cards supposed to have returned to the -pack have in fact never left it, being those naturally belonging to -it, corresponding with the three long cards. But to the outsider their -supposed return will be, in the words of the lamented Lord Dundreary, -“one of those things that no fellow can understand.” - -As regards the disappearance of the three cards, the performer is of -course by no means restricted to the use of the card-box. If he is an -expert in sleight-of-hand, he may with even better effect, “vanish” them -one by one by means of the back palm, dropping them a moment later into -the profonde. - - -THE MASCOT COIN BOX - -This is a little device on the same principle as the well-known flat -card-box, but adapted for use with coins, and with an addition which -largely increases its utility inasmuch as it will not only enable -the performer to “change” or “vanish,” but to get instant and secret -possession of a coin placed in it. - -The box (see Fig. 14) is of ebonized wood, unpolished, and in size about -three inches square. It consists of two parts (_a_ and _b_), which are -alike in size and appearance, so that either half may be regarded as -“box” and either as “lid,” at pleasure, according as the one or the other -is made uppermost, no difference being perceptible between them. In the -centre of each half is a circular well, not quite two inches in diameter. - -Used with the box is a thin disc of wood corresponding to that of which -the box is made. This is of such diameter as to fall easily from the one -well into the other, according to the way in which the box is turned, but -on the other hand fits so closely within that its presence or absence -is not perceptible to sight. If a coin be laid in the box upon the disc -and the box is then closed and turned over, the disc settles down over -the coin in the opposite half, either leaving the box apparently empty -or exhibiting in place of the original coin a substitute with which the -opposite side of the box has been previously loaded. - -[Illustration: FIG. 14] - -Thus far, as the reader will doubtless have perceived, the effect -produced (save that a coin instead of a card is dealt with) is precisely -the same as in the case of the card-box. But the “mascot” has a -speciality of its own, in the fact that in that half of the box marked -_a_ (see Fig. 14) a horizontal slot is cut on the side opposite to -the hinge, just long enough and wide enough to allow the passage of a -half-crown. The wood being dead black, this small opening is invisible -save to close inspection, which the box is never called upon to undergo. - -When it is desired to gain secret possession of a coin lent by one of the -company, the lender is invited to place it himself in the box, held open -bookwise as in Fig. 14, the side _b_ of the box having been previously -loaded with a duplicate coin. - -The lender of the coin may place it in whichever side of the box he -pleases, but the manner of closing the box will vary accordingly. If he -places it in the side _a_, the opposite (or loaded) side is treated as -the lid and turned down over _a_. In this case, the coin being already -in the slotted half, no turn-over of the box is necessary, the performer -having merely to allow the coin to slip out into his hand. In the -opposite case, viz., that of the coin being placed in _b_, _a_ is treated -as the lid, and the coin being in this case _above_ the disc the box must -be turned over before it can be extracted. If preferred the performer can -hold the box so that the coin will naturally be placed in _b_, but in -this case the turn-over is unavoidable. - -When the box is again opened, the duplicate coin is revealed in place of -the original, which is meanwhile dealt with as may be necessary for the -purpose of the trick. After the borrowed coin has been extracted, the -further fall of the disc closes the slot, and bars any possibility of the -substitute coin escaping in the same way. - -The following will be found an easy way of working the exchange. - -“For the purpose of my next experiment,” says the performer, “I shall -have to ask the loan of a half-crown; marked in such a way that you can -be sure of knowing it again. I should like one, if possible, that has -seen some service, for a coin in the course of circulation imbibes a -certain amount of magnetic fluid from each person who handles it; and -this renders a well-worn coin more susceptible to magical influences than -a new one.” - -The reason alleged for asking the loan of an old coin is of course -“spoof,” but there _is_ a reason; and it is two-fold. In the first place -it ensures your getting a coin tolerably like your own; which you have -chosen in accordance with that description, and which you have marked -after some commonplace fashion, say with a cross scratched upon one of -its faces. Secondly, a well-worn coin, having lost the sharp edge which -is caused by the milling in a new one, passes the more easily through the -slot, which for obvious reasons is kept as narrow as possible. - -Performer, advancing toward the person offering the coin, continues: - -“I don’t want even to touch the coin myself till the very last moment, -so I will ask you meanwhile to put it in this little box. I believe it -was built for a watch-case, but as I don’t happen to need one, I use it -to hold my money, when I have any, or when I can get somebody to lend me -some.” - -The box is held open bookwise, as above mentioned, and closed according -to circumstances, in one or the other of the two ways described. - -“I will now ask some gentleman to take charge of the coin in the box. Who -will do so? You will, Sir? Thank you. But stay! I think I heard somebody -say (it was only said in a whisper but I heard it) ‘I don’t believe the -half crown is in the box.’ It is very sad to find people so suspicious, -especially when I take such pains to prove that there is ‘no deception.’ -But the gentleman was wrong, you see.” (He opens box, and shows the -substitute coin.) “Here it is. Take it out, sir, and keep it in your own -hands till I ask you for it again.” - -During the delivery of the patter the borrowed coin has been extracted, -and the coin exhibited in the box and handed for safe-keeping is, of -course, the substitute. The box, as being no longer needed, is laid -without remark upon the table, and the trick proceeds, after whatever may -have been its intended fashion. - - - - -MISCELLANEOUS TRICKS - - -MONEY-MAKING MADE EASY - -_Requirements._ Coin mat loaded with two double pennies, shell side -undermost. Lighted candle and velvet mat (with pocket) on table. - -_Presentation._ Performer comes forward with coin mat hanging down in -his right hand (mouth of loaded space upwards), and asks for the loan -of a penny, marked in some conspicuous way. Receiving it on the mat, he -shows it, so placed, to the persons, seated on each side of the owner, in -so doing making it obvious to them, without remark, that his hands are -otherwise empty. Then returning to his table, with the mat and the coin -on it still in his hand, he delivers patter to the following effect: - -“Now I am going to show you a nice easy way of making money. I was told -when I was a small boy, ‘Take care of the pence, and the pounds will take -care of themselves.’ I believe they do. The pounds take such good care of -themselves that very few of them seem to come my way. But you can make a -bit even with pennies, if you know how to set about it. All you need is a -really good penny to start with. It doesn’t matter how you get the penny. -You may beg, borrow, or steal it. Personally, I prefer to borrow it. If -you try the other two ways you get yourself disliked, but you can always -get people to lend you things, if you ask prettily; and I’ve always -been celebrated for my nice borrowing manner. You must all have noticed -that the gentleman lent me a penny without the slightest hesitation. I -daresay if I had asked him, he would have made it two-pence, or even -six-pence, if he had as much about him. In this case, however, one penny -is enough for my purpose; and here it is with the owner’s own mark upon -it. Observe that it is just a plain ordinary penny, and you can see for -yourselves that it is the only one I have--in my hands, I mean. I am -always truthful. As a matter of fact, I believe I have another in my left -trouser-pocket, but I promise you that I won’t use it.” - -Pass mat, with coin on it, from one hand to the other, showing the hands -otherwise empty, and leaving the mat finally in the right hand: then -let the marked coin slide off it into left hand, the concealed coins -passing with it. Put down the mat, and show all three coins together -(the marked coin in front) held between forefinger and thumb, broadside -toward the spectators. Thus held, they are, even at a few feet distant, -undistinguishable from a single coin. - -“Now I am going to make money. Not much, perhaps, in fact only a penny at -a time. I shall start by making this one penny into two. Cent per cent -is not bad, is it? Observe, I use no violence. It’s all done by kindness. -I just warm the coin a little over this candle-flame. That softens the -metal and I am able to squeeze another penny out of this one, _so_!” - -Show as two accordingly, by sliding off the hindermost coin in its shell, -exhibiting it on both sides, and laying it on the table. - -“You have all heard of turning an honest penny. Well, this is one way of -doing it. It is said, too, that one good turn deserves another, so we’ll -try again. I warm the first penny a little more, and again I pull another -out of it.” (Draw second double coin from behind the original penny.) -“Now we have three, two in my hands” (showing one in each hand) “and one -on the table. - -“I think I heard somebody say that I couldn’t make any more? I don’t -like to do it, because the process takes a good deal out of the original -penny, and I might spoil it. On the other hand, I don’t like to decline a -challenge, so here goes! I warm these two again, and then, with a little -extra pressure, because it naturally becomes more difficult each time, I -get yet another penny, as you see. So now, in all, we have four.” (Show -those in hand as three, by drawing solid coin out of shell, then, picking -up double coin from mat, show as four accordingly.) “Did I hear a lady -say ‘Just one more’? Well, then, one more.” (Develop the double coin just -picked up, and show as five.) “But here I must really draw the line. If -I kept on like this, there would be none of the original penny left. It -is already getting weaker and weaker. Besides, there wouldn’t be time for -anything else, and I have several still more wonderful things to show you. - -“And now to put these extra pennies back again into the original coin. -At present it is only one-fifth its proper weight and if the owner tried -to pass it in this condition there would be trouble. I should explain, -by the way, that these others are not really solid coins: though they -look like it. They are what the spiritualists call astral coins, if you -know what that means: I don’t quite know myself; so I won’t attempt to -explain, but I believe in the Police Courts they are known as ‘duffers.’” - -Lay all five coins on the velvet mat, each of the shells slightly -overlapping the solid coin to which it belongs. - -“Here we have one, two, three, four, five. I pick up two of them.” (Draw -shell over solid in act of picking up.) “I give them a gentle squeeze and -they become one only.” (Show as one, and replace on mat behind the mouth -of pocket.) “Now I treat two more in the same way.” (Repeat accordingly, -replacing these also, as one, on mat.) “We have now only three left. Let -me see, which is the original? Ah! here it is, with the owner’s mark upon -it.” (Pick it up and show in left hand.) “Now I rub one of these others -into it.” (Make the movement of picking up one of the double coins, and -of rubbing it into the coin in left hand, but in reality “vanish” it, in -the supposed act of picking up, into the pocket of mat.) “And now I pass -this other one into it in the same way, and we have only the original -penny left. It is like the ten little niggers, isn’t it, only that they -never came back. Here is your penny, Sir. Please observe that it still -has your own mark upon it, which is proof positive that there has been -‘no deception.’” - -N. B. If the performer is a novice, he may simplify the trick by loading -the coin mat with one double and one ordinary coin only, or two ordinary -coins, limiting the successive productions accordingly. - - -THE MISSING LINK - -At an early period of my magical career, I devised a trick to which I -gave the name of _Concatenation Extraordinary_, and which will be found -described in _Later Magic_, page 94. In effect it consisted of the -magical welding of a number of loose iron links into a continuous chain. -It was performed by the aid of a Black Art table, a bottomless tumbler, -and a silk thread. “Though I say it that shouldn’t,” it was an ingenious -trick, and I was very proud of it. Unfortunately, some good natured -friend (I rather think it was Mr. David Devant) pointed out to me that -about ninety-five per cent of my ingenuity was wasted, inasmuch as the -same effect, so far as the spectator was concerned, could be produced -by infinitely simpler means, viz.:--by using a glass with double mirror -partition, when all the other paraphernalia became unnecessary. You had -only to load the hinder compartment with the complete chain, and after a -due amount of “talkee-talkee,” drop the loose links into the forward one, -turn the glass round, and the deed was done. - -The trick, as a trick, was just as good in its new shape as before, -but being at that time (comparatively) young and foolish, its extreme -simplicity spoilt it for me, and I lost all interest in it. Not long -since, however, I was reminded of it by coming across the chain and links -which had figured in my performance of the trick, and it struck me that, -in a slightly modified form, it may still be worth the attention of the -drawing-room conjurer. - -The requirements for the trick in this, its latest form, are as follows: - -First, the mirror glass; and as to this I may note in passing that the -“mirror” is best made of tin-plate, not too highly polished, in place of -the looking-glass plate which was, until a quite recent period, generally -employed for the purpose. - -Secondly, a length of small iron chain, made up of twenty-six links, -connected in the centre by a twenty-seventh link of brass. - -Thirdly, two shorter lengths of similar chain, consisting of thirteen -links each, and a loose brass link, corresponding to the one in the -centre of the longer chain. The complete chain is to be placed at the -outset in the hinder compartment of the mirror glass, which should be of -such a size that the chain nearly fills it. - -Lastly will be needed a bottle containing Eau de Cologne, of which a few -drops have been poured on the chain in the glass. - -The patter may run to something like the following effect. - -“You are doubtless aware, ladies and gentlemen, that electricity is now -largely employed in the welding of metals. Of course to produce such -a result on a large scale, such as welding guns, enormous strength of -current is required; amounting in fact to millions of ampères, or volts, -or ohms, or watts. I blush to confess I don’t know which is which, but -it’s of no consequence. If I had ever so many ampères, or the rest of it, -I shouldn’t know what to do with them. I am only able to manufacture my -electricity on a very small scale, but with the aid of a little magic, I -get very good results. - -“You are also no doubt aware that when certain metals, particularly -copper and zinc, are brought into close connection, an electrical current -is set up between them. The same thing applies, in a less degree, to -iron and brass, as I hope to be able to show you. - -“I have here two short lengths of iron chain. Will somebody be kind -enough to count the links? You will find, I think, that there are exactly -thirteen in each. Please notice this, because, in some mysterious way, it -has something to do with the success of my experiment. You know thirteen -is an unlucky number, and the chains themselves don’t like to consist of -that number of links, and if they can alter it, they try to do so. I am -going to give them the opportunity, with a little electrical assistance. -Thirteen, as I have said, is an unlucky number, and twice thirteen makes -twenty-six, which is not much better, but if you add one more, you get -twenty-seven, which is a very lucky number indeed. Everybody knows that -three is a lucky number. Three times three are nine, which of course -must be luckier still, and three times nine are twenty-seven, which is -naturally best of all. - -“Now I am going to give these two chains an opportunity to convert -themselves into that lucky number, by taking in this extra link, which -as you perceive is brass, an opposition metal. Observe, I drop one of -the chains into this glass. See that I do so fairly. Then I drop in the -single link, and lastly, the other piece of chain. And now, in order to -set up an electrical reaction, I add just a few drops from this bottle of -Eau de Cologne. As a matter of fact, a little salt and water would have -the same effect, but I use Eau de Cologne because it smells nicer. And -now I must ask the loan of some lady’s handkerchief, to cover the glass, -and concentrate the electric current.” - -Holding the handkerchief in right hand, pick up the glass with left hand, -and raise it a few inches from the table. In lowering it, cover it with -the handkerchief, and at the same time give it the necessary half-turn. -Take out your watch, and make believe to time the operation, remarking, -“I find it needs a full half-minute, to allow the charm to work. Time! -Let us see how we have succeeded.” - -Take off the handkerchief, and draw the chain slowly out of the glass. -“Yes. All is well. I should say welded, and I trust you will say, ‘Well -done.’ The chain is complete, and now consists of twenty-seven links, the -lucky number. Perhaps some gentleman will verify the fact. - -“I must tell you frankly that I don’t guarantee the correctness of my -explanation. I can’t say exactly how much the electricity has to do with -it. I only know that if you go to work the right way, which means, do -as I do, you get the result, and there you are. This experiment always -provokes a lot of discussion. The other evening one gentleman said it -was done this way. A lady said it was that way, and a sharp boy (the -younger they are the more they know) was quite sure it was done another -way altogether. But they were all wrong. It is done just the way I have -shown you, and if you do as I do, and say as I say, you will no doubt -produce the same result.[7] If you don’t, well, you will be no use as a -conjurer, and you had better go into some other business.” - -Some less instructed reader may possibly enquire, “But why the Eau de -Cologne? What does that do?” Precisely nothing, and therein lies its -virtue. As indicated in the section on “patter” (_post_) it often happens -that some little bit of spoof, supererogatory in reality so far as the -spectator is concerned, is accepted as covering the real key to the -puzzle. This is a case in point. Taking it for granted that the Eau de -Cologne would not be used without _some_ reason, the spectator sets to -work to discover that reason, and so gets farther from the real solution. - -[7] This last bit of patter is a plagiarism from somebody or other, I -rather think the late Dr. Lynn. - - -CULTURE EXTRAORDINARY - -The root-idea of this item must be credited to Signor Antonio Molini, -the inventor of the very effective stage trick known as _Le Souper du -Diable_. The principle on which that trick is worked is so subtle, and -withal so simple, that it is surprising that it has not long since been -applied to the production of less bulky objects than the tablecloth, -eatables and drinkables which figure in the Satanic supper. The -following is an application of the Signor Molini’s idea on a scale better -adapted to the drawing room. - -_Requisites._ - -(1) Three zinc or zinc-lined tubes, as _a_, _b_, _c_, in Fig. 15, ranging -in height from about three inches upwards, and graduated in size so as to -fit easily one within the other. - -[Illustration: FIG. 15] - -(2) Three balls, one red and two white, of such diameter as to pass -easily through the narrowest tube. Two smaller balls, one red and one -white, about half an inch in diameter. - -(3) A box of matches. - -Each of the two smaller tubes (_c_ and _d_ in diagram) to be loaded with -one of the larger white balls, suspended from the upper edge of the tube -by a wire hook, shaped as _a_ in Fig. 16, connected with the ball by a -loop of fine silk or cotton thread. The red ball is vested, and the two -little balls may rest in a shallow tray or other appropriate receptacle -on the table, deep enough as to conceal them from the view of the -spectators. - -[Illustration: FIG. 16] - -_Introductory Patter._ “You have no idea, ladies and gentlemen, what -a lot of hints I get from different people for the improvement of my -entertainment. If I were to adopt them all, I have no doubt it would be -very fine indeed. The worst of it is that it would take a year or two to -try them, so for the present I am obliged to leave things as they are. - -“You will observe that I have here three tubes” (showing No. 1 and -passing wand through it to prove it is empty), “quite ordinary tubes, -with a hole at each end, and nothing at all between. I don’t suppose you -would notice anything to object to about them, but some people are so -very particular. A gentleman who said he had an artistic eye (I don’t -know which eye it was) said to me, ‘Look here, Professor, that trick of -yours would be ever so much better if you had all those tubes the same -size. That lot looks as if you had picked them up at a jumble sale.’[8] -I explained to him, kindly but firmly, that there was a special reason -for having the three tubes of different sizes; namely, that by so doing -it was made possible” (suiting the action to the word) “to pass this one -(No. 1) over this other (No. 2); and this again over the smallest one, -thereby saving much space in packing. He said, ‘Never mind, you take -my tip and make ’em all the same size.’ I dare say he was right, but I -haven’t had time to do it yet.” - -During this little harangue, which appears to be mere “spoof,” you have -practically worked the trick. Suiting the action to the word, you have -passed the largest tube No. 1 over No. 2 and lifted it off again. In -its downward movement the tube passes over the little hook on No. 2; but -in lifting it off again its upper edge comes within the outer arm of the -hook, and carries this off with the ball attached to it, leaving tube No. -2 empty. The latter, shown empty accordingly, is passed over No. 3 and -carries off its load in the same way. - -You have thus proved (!) in the most convincing way that all three tubes -are empty, though as a matter of fact No. 3 is the only one in that -condition, Nos. 1 and 2 each containing a suspended ball. - -The patter from this point may vary according to the fancy of the -performer. If he has the knack of producing the appropriate combination -of fact and fiction, it is preferable that he should do so for himself. -As I have elsewhere remarked, borrowed patter rarely comes so “trippingly -on the tongue” as that of which the performer can say with, let us hope, -undue depreciation of his merits, “a poor thing, but mine own.” - -The fable with which I should myself introduce the trick would run -somewhat as follows: - -“You have all heard, ladies and gentlemen, of intensive culture, -gooseberries grown while you wait, and that sort of thing. It is done by -enclosing the seed, or the young plant, in a confined space and keeping -it warm and comfy. It has always seemed to me that there is a good deal -of magic about the process, and I thought I would like to try it myself, -but it would be no good my trying to grow vegetables. I shouldn’t have -room to grow more than one radish, or one spring onion at a time, which -would hardly be worth while. I finally decided to grow a few billiard -balls, for use in my entertainment, and I’ll show you how it’s done. - -“You must please imagine that these three tubes are three hothouses on -the new system.” (Picks up and exhibits one of the little white balls.) -“Of course everything has to be raised from seed in the first instance, -but it would take too long to show you the whole process from the -beginning, so we will start with this little ball, grown from seed last -night. In its present condition it is too small to be of any use, but by -means of my intensive culture we can soon make it grow larger. I will -drop it into No. 1 forcing house.” - -Performer shows little ball in right hand and makes believe to transfer -it to the left, in reality rolling it, as in the well-known “Cups and -Balls” trick, between the roots of the second and third fingers. The left -hand, held above tube No. 1, makes the movement of crumbling an imaginary -ball into it. “Now we will plant another in the same way.” - -You pick up apparently another little white ball, but in reality the -same; which has remained in the right hand. Now, however, it will be well -to vary the sleight used, so you show the ball between the second finger -and thumb of the left hand, and apparently take it back by means of the -pincette or tourniquet; then professedly dropping it into the second tube. - -“And now, to complete the set, we shall have to grow a red ball. Here is -a seedling of that colour.” You pick up the little red ball, and make -believe to pass it after the same fashion into the third tube. - -“And now to supply the heat. We do not need much, the space being so -confined. I find that even the flame of a match is sufficient.” - -You strike a match and move the flame round and round within the top -of the larger tube till the thread catches fire and releases the ball. -Should this be heard to drop, you account for it by remarking “I dare -say you noticed a little explosion. That is caused by the sudden -radio-activity of the component atoms re-arranging themselves in the -expanded form.” You raise the tube and show the ball: then go through -the same process with the second tube. Under cover of raising this tube -to show the ball, you get the large red ball from the vest into the left -hand and palm it. - -“Perhaps you would like to watch the progress a little more closely.” You -pick up the third tube and place it upright on the palm of the left hand, -in so doing introducing the palmed ball from below, and advance with it -to the company. - -“The red balls are especially sensitive to heat. Even the warmth of the -breath is generally enough for these. Anyhow, we will try.” You breathe -into the tube, and lifting it show the ball, then offering both tube and -ball for inspection. - -It will hardly be necessary to point out to the acute reader that -the alteration of procedure in the case of the last tube is rendered -necessary; first, by the fact that the tube up to that point contains no -ball, and secondly in order to avoid the difficulty of striking a match -with the right hand only, the left being otherwise occupied. - -The trick may appropriately be followed by the exhibition of a few of the -usual ball sleights. If it is worked on a “black art” table it may be -brought to an effective close by the “dematerialisation,” in succession, -of the three balls. - -[8] Rummage. - - -THE BOUNDING BEANS - -This is another application of the principle introduced by Signor Molini -and utilised in the trick last described. - -The requisites for the trick are as follows: - -(1) Mirror glass; at the outset, empty. - -(2) Two tubes of cardboard, sheet brass, or zinc, as A and B in Fig. 17. -The height and width of A are about 3½ and 2½ inches respectively. B is a -little taller, but a trifle less in diameter. - -(3) A third tube, C, with its lower edge turned inward an eighth of an -inch all around. This tube is a little shorter than A, and in diameter a -trifle smaller than B, which must pass easily over it. Attached to either -side of its upper edge, outside, are soldered two little wire hooks, the -points on the outside directed downwards. - -(4) A coil of paper ribbon, of such size as to fit closely into the lower -end of C, and forming, when so placed, a temporary bottom to it. The -inner end of the coil must be drawn up an inch or so, so as to form a -little cone in the centre. - -[Illustration: FIG. 17] - -(5) A similar coil unwound into a loose mass of paper ribbon. - -(6) About three-quarters of a pint of haricot beans. Of these a -sufficient number must be poured into C (around the little cone), to fill -it. The remainder are to be brought forward on some sort of tray.[9] - -C loaded as last described, is to be placed within B. - -The trick may be introduced as follows: - -“Most of you, I dare say, have seen the little natural curiosity known -as the Jumping Bean. To all appearance these are just like other beans; -but if you spread a dozen or so of them on the table and watch them -carefully, you presently see one or more of them turn over, or even make -a little jump. A young and lively bean will sometimes hop as far as half -an inch. - -“Scientific gentlemen tell us that their agility is caused by a little -insect inside the bean. When he wags his tail, or scratches himself with -his hind leg, it causes the bean to turn over, or to make a hop. That -seems to me rather a lame explanation because there is no hole in the -bean that the insect could possibly have got in at. I believe myself, -that they are in truth magic beans, and I have been trying to train some -beans of my own to do the same thing on a larger scale, and in such a way -that you can all see them do it. - -“Here are my beans.” (Show those on tray.) “Examine them as much as -you like. The more you examine them, the more you won’t find anything -particular about them. You won’t notice any difference between them -and any other beans, but as a matter of fact they are a good deal more -energetic than beans of the ordinary kind, and when they get to know and -love you, they will do all sorts of remarkable things. - -“I will pour a few of them into this glass.” (The front compartment -of the mirror glass is filled to about two-thirds of its height.) “To -prevent their getting out again without your knowing it I will press them -down with a handful of these pretty paper shavings.” - -This is also done, the quantity of paper being so regulated, in -accordance with previous experiment, that when pressed down it shall come -half an inch or so below the brim of the glass. - -“To make matters still more secure I will ask the loan of a lady’s -handkerchief to cover the glass with.” - -The handkerchief is taken in the right hand, the left meanwhile raising -the glass a little way to meet it. In covering and lowering it again to -the table the needful half-turn is made. - -“I will not touch the glass again until the experiment is finished. -Meanwhile I want to call your attention to these two tubes. You will -observe that one of them is slightly larger than the other. A gentleman -told me the other evening that I was wrong in saying so. He maintained -that the one was smaller than the other. I didn’t argue with him. I -never do with that sort of man. It is just a question of the point of -view. Anyhow, I had the one made larger, or the other one smaller, -whichever way it is, so that the one can go comfortably over the other, -like this.” - -A, first carelessly moved about so as to show clearly that it is empty, -is brought down over B and lifted off again, carrying off within it C and -its load; after which B is in turn shown to be empty. - -“Now I am going to order the beans to jump out of the glass and into one -or other of these empty tubes, at your own choice. Right? or left? Which -shall it be?” - -Performer asks the question standing behind his table, and by means of -the familiar equivoque (“my” or “your” left or right) interprets the -answer to mean A. - -“And now I have only to pronounce the proper magic spell. The trouble -is to remember the right one. They are rather confusing, and if you -happen to pronounce the wrong one, or even pronounce the right one the -wrong way, the consequences may be serious. But I think I know this one -pretty well. ‘Peripatetico-paticocorum.’ I fancy I have got it right. -I don’t know quite what it means myself, and nobody seems to be able -to tell me. A Japanese gentleman told me he thought it was Spanish, -but a Spaniard said he felt sure it was Welsh. Somebody else suggested -that I should ‘ask a pleeceman.’ I did ask a policeman, and he said, -‘Go to--’ somewhere I won’t mention, but I don’t think he meant it as -a translation. My own idea is that it is a bit of Esperanto. Anyhow, -it has the desired effect; for you see the beans have left the glass” -(uncovering it and showing it empty), “and they have jumped into this -tube, which is what I wanted them to do.” - -The beans are poured from the tube into the vacant portion, now to the -front, of the mirror glass, with due care that the coil at bottom shall -not be seen. - -“But there’s something wrong here. I must have made some little mistake -in the pronunciation of the magic spell, for the paper seems to have -disappeared as well as the beans. There is certainly no room for it in -the tube. Here it is, though, or some of it.” - -The paper is unwound, and when it comes to an end the wand is passed -through A and C (now bottomless) together, again proving (?) that the -former which is always shown to the spectators could not possibly have -contained the beans in any natural way. A moment or two later the inner -tube can easily be got rid of behind the mass of paper ribbon. - -[9] The little dishes of paper pulp sold for picnic purposes will be -found to answer this and similar purposes excellently and have the -further advantage of being exceptionally portable. - - -LOST AND FOUND - -This trick may be worked either upon a black art table or black art mat. -We will assume that the latter is used. - -The requisites for this trick will in such case be as follows: - -1. The mat. This may be a small circular one, a few inches in -circumference without pocket. - -2. A handkerchief, fourteen or fifteen inches square, of some gaudy -pattern, carefully folded and placed in a square Japanese handkerchief -box.[10] - -3. A circular velvet patch as described _ante_, in the chapter dealing -with novel applications of the Black Art principle. - -4. A half-crown placed in a pochette, or otherwise so as to be readily -get-at-able. - -_Presentation._ Performer opens the box and takes out the handkerchief, -which he carefully unfolds, handling it as if it were something of -extraordinary value. - -“I have here, ladies, a curio of an exceptionally curious kind. This is -said to be the identical handkerchief which Othello gave to Desdemona, -and which afterwards caused so much unpleasantness. No doubt you all -know your Shakespeare, and will remember that Othello tells his wife, -‘There’s magic in the web of it.’ And there is magic in it still. Not -so much as there was, I dare say, but still it retains a good many -magical qualities. Among them is a curious talent for recovering lost -property. For instance, I once had a dog. His name was Socrates, but he -was generally called ‘Socks.’ In fact, he preferred it. He was a valuable -dog, because he combined so many different breeds. He was partly pug, -and partly greyhound, and partly dachshund, and partly chow, and partly -bull-dog and partly terrier, and partly of two or three other breeds that -I can’t for the moment remember. One day Socks went out to see a friend, -and didn’t come back again. I sat up all night for him with a stick, but -he didn’t come home till morning. In fact, he didn’t come home even then. -I thought I had lost him for good, and I was quite distressed about it. - -“Just when I was beginning to get over the loss I had a further shock. -My precious Desdemona handkerchief was missing. But the very next day -I heard a barking outside, and there was my dog with the handkerchief -tied round his neck and three other dogs with him. The handkerchief had -recovered them all. - -“You don’t believe that little story. I thought you wouldn’t. People -never will believe anything a little bit out of the way. It is just the -same with fish stories. I know a man who, when he was a boy, fishing -in a pond with a maggot on a bent pin, caught a four-pound salmon. He -didn’t claim any credit for doing it. He says himself it was just an -accident, and might have happened to anybody. But he never can get anyone -to believe him, and it has spoilt his character. He was naturally a -truthful man, but being always disbelieved has made him reckless, and -now, whenever he tells the story he sticks another half-pound on to the -salmon. I believe it is a fifteen pounder now.[11] - -“With regard to the handkerchief, however, I can easily prove to you that -what I have stated is correct. I can’t prove it quite in the same way, -because even if any lady or gentleman present had lost a dog, it would -take the handkerchief a day or two to find it, and you would get tired of -waiting. So I must show you the virtues of the handkerchief in a simpler -way. - -“Will some gentleman oblige me with the loan of a half-crown, marked so -that he can be sure of knowing it again?” - -On receiving the coin the performer returns to his table, holding it on -high so that it can be seen that there is no substitution, and lays it on -the black art mat. - -“Presently I propose to lose this coin, and get the handkerchief to -find it, but first you would like, no doubt, to have a look at the -handkerchief itself. Notice the richness of the pattern. It is said to be -after a design in the Alhambra. I don’t mean the Alhambra you gentlemen -go to, but the real Moorish one in Spain.” - -Leaving the handkerchief for the time being in the possession of a -spectator he returns to the table, meanwhile palming the velvet patch, -and the substituted half-crown, and ostensibly picks up the original, in -reality rendering it invisible by laying the patch over it, and showing -the substitute in its place, after the manner described at p. 19. He then -advances to the company with the substitute coin and offers it to one or -other of the spectators, remarking, “Take it, please, and pass it to one -or other of your neighbours so that I shan’t know where it is.” - -Under pretence of offering the coin, he passes it from the one hand to -the other, and vanishes it by, say, the tourniquet, so that the person -holding out a hand to receive it gets nothing, and says so. - -“What do you say, Sir? You have not got it? But surely, I have just -handed it to you. You are not joking? Then it must have fallen on the -floor. Please look around you a bit.” (Pretends to do so himself.) “Not -there? Well, this is extraordinary.” (To the lender of the coin.) “I -am very sorry, Sir. Your money is lost in a way I did not anticipate. -But after all, when I come to think of it, it’s of no consequence. The -handkerchief will find it wherever it is, even if it has to follow it -into somebody’s pocket. By the way, where is the handkerchief?” He takes -it from the person with whom it was left, and holding it by two of its -corners, and showing both hands otherwise empty, lowers it down carefully -over the black patch on table. - -“And now to work the spell. ‘Bismillah! Bechesm! Salaam Aleikoum!’ -You must excuse my speaking Arabic, but that is the only language -the handkerchief understands. I see that the gentleman who lent me -the half-crown is looking a little bit anxious. Cheer up, Sir, the -handkerchief has never failed me yet. But we must give it time. Say, -half a minute.” (Looks at watch.) “This is curious. Half a minute gone. -One minute, and nothing has happened. The handkerchief has made no move. -Something must have gone wrong. But stay! If the handkerchief has not -gone to the coin, perhaps the coin has gone to the handkerchief. Let us -see!” - -He lifts the handkerchief by the centre, picking up the black patch with -it, and thereby disclosing the coin, which is handed back on the mat to -the owner. Then carefully folding up the handkerchief, performer replaces -it in its box, and in so doing regains possession of the velvet patch, to -be got rid of at a convenient opportunity. - -[10] The handkerchief should be readily recognizable as a cheap and -commonplace one. - -[11] This story, as also a few other “yarns” with which I have -endeavoured to brighten my otherwise serious pages, may be suppressed -if it is thought desirable to shorten the patter. I ought perhaps to -apologise for introducing such irrelevant fiction, but I am encouraged in -misdoing by the example of the lamented Artemus Ward, who said that the -best things in his lecture were generally the things that had nothing to -do with it. - - -THE RIDDLE OF THE PYRAMIDS - -This, in good hands, will be found a very effective trick. I have the -less hesitation in saying so, because the assertion is only to a very -limited extent self-praise. The idea of the effect to be produced was my -own, as also to a certain extent the method of producing it. I had even -got so far as to devise, in anticipation, suitable patter. When, however, -I proceeded to put my ideas into practice I found myself pulled up by -unexpected obstacles. - -The object to be attained, as will be seen by the sequel, was the -instantaneous re-adjustment of the sundered parts of a small pyramid, -and this I proposed to do by means of the pull of a thread, fine enough -to be practically invisible. Now, to make segments of a pyramid not only -draw together, but sit squarely one upon another, it is necessary to have -forces operating simultaneously in two different directions, and the -need for this caused difficulties which I found myself unable to cope -with. Indeed, I had practically decided to content myself by producing -a somewhat similar effect in a simpler way, as exemplified in the trick -which I have called the _Miracle of Mumbo Jumbo_, which next follows. - -As luck would have it, however, I mentioned my difficulties to my good -friend, Mr. Holt Schooling, a gentleman whom I have more than once -had occasion to refer to in my writings in connection with some neat -device. Mr. Schooling declared that the original idea was too good to be -abandoned, and offered to try his hand at bringing it to a successful -issue. I must frankly confess that I had no great hope of his success; -but Mr. Schooling is a man of many talents. Apart from eminence in his -own profession (that of actuary and statistician) he is not only an -expert amateur conjurer, but an exceptionally skilful mechanic, and he -possesses withal an unlimited capacity for taking pains. He used these -qualities to such good purpose that I am enabled to include this striking -effect among the contents of the present volume. - -[Illustration: FIG. 18] - -The principal item of apparatus is naturally the pyramid itself, which is -of blackened wood as illustrated in Fig. 18. For the sake of lightness -it is of necessity a small affair, being four inches in height, about -six across the base, and two across the top. It is divided into five -horizontal slabs or segments, as indicated by the dotted lines. Midway -on each side of each slab, at about half an inch distance from the upper -edge, a minute hole is bored, parallel to the outer slope of the segment; -exactness in this particular being an essential condition of success. Of -the four holes in each slab, two only are actually used in the trick, the -other two being added partly for the sake of uniformity, and partly to -disguise the significance of the other pair. Each slab, save those at the -top and bottom, is also perforated perpendicularly by three or four holes -of considerable diameter, the object of these being merely to lessen the -weight of the slab. - -In preparing the pyramid for use in the trick, a piece of plaited silk -fishing-line, stained black, and in length five to six feet, is passed -by the aid of a needle upwards through the small hole in one side of the -largest slab; then in the same way through the corresponding hole in the -next, and so on till it comes out through the uppermost. Thence it is -again passed downward through the next adjoining hole in each slab till -it comes out at the bottom, when the ends are drawn level and tied in a -knot. - -The use of plaited silk fishing line for such purposes is one of Mr. -Schooling’s specialties, and is a “tip” to make a note of. Line of this -kind is in proportion to its thickness much stronger than ordinary silk -thread, and, not being liable to untwist, its surface remains permanently -hard and smooth, a great desideratum where it is important to minimise -friction. Further, it does not “kink” as a twisted thread is liable to do. - -Two other items of apparatus are used, viz.: - -(1) An electric torch in the shape of a wand, the light appearing at the -end. - -[Illustration: FIG. 19] - -(2) A little knife or cutter specially designed by Mr. Schooling for use -in this trick. This consists of a half-inch length of a safety-razor -blade, set in a handle consisting of a piece of tin one inch square, -folded in half, and then bent back to a right angle on each side, the -blade projecting along the line of juncture as shown in Fig. 19. In use -the cutter is held by what may be called its backbone between the first -joints of the first and second fingers of the extended hand, as shown in -Fig. 20. This cutter must be placed ready to hand upon the table. It is -so minute that there is no fear of its attracting attention.[12] - -[Illustration: FIG. 20] - -In presenting the trick the pyramid, with its sections duly threaded and -placed one upon another, is brought in on a wooden board similar to an -ordinary drawing-board, measuring twenty-four inches by sixteen, and like -the pyramid itself, stained black. It is essential to the satisfactory -working of the trick that the “base” section of the pyramid shall not -shift when the thread is pulled. This is ensured by having two L shaped -“stops” of thin wood glued or screwed to the board near the left hand -corner nearest to the performer when in use. - -The trick may be introduced as follows: - -“I don’t know whether any of you ladies and gentlemen are well up in -Egyptology. I can’t say I am, myself. I know a camel when I see one, but -that is about as far as I have got. There is, however, one point about it -which has always interested me very much. It is a point which has puzzled -not only the Egyptologists, but all the other ologists; namely, how the -pyramids were built. They consist, as no doubt you know, of enormous -masses of stone; so large that the cleverest engineers of our day cannot -tell us how they were placed one upon another. If you can imagine the -lifting of the Royal Exchange in one lump and dumping it down on the top -of the Bank of England, you will have some idea of the sort of job the -Egyptian builders had to tackle.[13] Anyhow, the work was done, and as it -is clear that it could not have been done by any known mechanical means, -we are compelled to seek some other solution of the problem. - -“I don’t know whether any of you read novels. If you do, you must often -have noticed the curious way in which fiction constantly anticipates -fact. The novelist describes some utterly impossible thing, and a few -years later some other fellow goes and does it. Jules Verne described -a voyage under the sea long before the submarine was invented, and Mr. -Wells wrote ‘The War in the Air’ while the aeroplane and the Zeppelin -were still in their infancy. But there is one conception of the novelist -which has not till now been made an accomplished fact. That is the force -called ‘Vril,’ described by Lord Lytton in his novel, ‘The Coming Race.’ -He describes Vril as a sort of hyper-electricity capable in the hands -of those who know how to gather and use it, of producing all sorts of -wonders, even to removing mountains. Imprisoned in a wand and directed by -a strong will, it will shrivel up an enemy or a wild beast as by a flash -of lighting. - -“I have always had an idea that this must have been the force used by -the Egyptians to build the pyramids. I have managed to collect a small -quantity of an unknown force which answers very closely to Lord Lytton’s -description of Vril, and I have charged this wand with it. As regards -killing things, I have only tested it so far on a black beetle. The -experiment was a success. He was blown to atoms, all but one hind leg. -I should like to try it on a tiger; if I could get one cheap. Does any -gentleman present know of a secondhand tiger in a good strong cage going -cheap? No? I was afraid you wouldn’t. I am hoping however for a chance -of trying it some night on a burglar. If a gentleman of the Bill Sykes -persuasion should steal into my chamber at dead of night with felonious -designs upon my Waterbury and my collarstud, he will be as a dead man. I -shall just point this wand at him and say ‘Die,’ and he will be merely a -little heap of ashes to be swept up by the housemaid in the morning. - -“I can however give you an example of the power of my Vril as a motive -force. I shall do so by using it to build or rather rebuild this little -pyramid in your presence. - -“This is a correct copy of the real thing. It takes to pieces, as you -see. One, two, three, four, five!” - -As he pronounces the last few words, the performer, standing behind his -table, picks up the pyramid, and holding it aloft in his right hand draws -away the base from the other sections, sliding it along the thread, and -“bedding” it between the “stops” at the left hand bottom corner of the -board. He then slides the other portions, one by one, along the thread in -the same way, laying them in a row diagonally across the board. This will -have taken up a considerable portion of the thread, but there will still -be a loop some inches in length hanging down near the left hand corner of -the table. - -“Now please watch carefully. This wand, you will remember, has been -carefully charged with my imitation Vril.” - -While speaking these last words the performer gets one finger of his left -hand within the loop. He now turns on the light at the end of the wand, -and with it makes a quick sweep from right to left over the severed parts -of the pyramid, making at the same time a half-turn away from the table, -and quickly drawing away the thread. If this is done neatly the severed -parts of the pyramid run together one upon the other in a single instant. - -It is probable that the parts may not sit exactly one upon another. -Whether this is so or not, the performer makes believe to notice that it -is so, as it gives him a needful opportunity. He remarks: - -“The power was hardly strong enough, I see. There is a block here that -needs a little straightening up.” Having meanwhile picked up the little -cutter between the fingers he bends over the table and squares up the -pyramid as may (or may not) be necessary, and under cover of so doing -draws the blade across the thread where it crosses the top, thereby -severing it, and then moving back a little to note the effect of his -correction draws it away altogether. Shifting the restored pyramid to -the centre of the board he brings all forward for examination. The -severed thread is allowed to drop on the floor, to be picked up after the -performance is over. - -[12] As a further precaution it should be painted flesh-color. - -[13] Before an American audience the names of any two well-known -buildings in New York may be substituted. - - -THE MIRACLE OF MUMBO JUMBO - -The items needed for the presentation of this trick are as follows: - -(1) A miniature pagoda of quaint design. It consists of five circular -sections, resting one upon another as illustrated in Fig. 21. The trick -in effect consists of the automatic re-adjustment of these sections after -being taken apart and shown lying apparently haphazard on a Japanese -tray. For drawing-room use the pagoda is about six inches high and the -same diameter across the base. For stage purposes it may be made a trifle -larger. - -[Illustration: FIG. 21] - -(2) The tray. This, for use with a pagoda of the size above mentioned, -should be not less than twenty inches long by ten or twelve wide, -and fairly heavy, as being less liable to shift in use. It must have -an upright rim; through one corner of which a minute hole is bored, -countersunk and polished on each side of the opening in order to -diminish friction on a thread passing through it. - -(3) An electric torch in the shape of a bottle; the light showing itself -at the mouth. - -(4) A black dress-hook, sewn point upwards to the lower edge of the -performer’s vest on the right or left side, as may best suit his own -position in working the trick, just where back and front meet. - -[Illustration: FIG. 22] - -It will be found on examination of the pagoda that each of the parts of -which it consists has a hole bored vertically through its centre. The -topmost portion has in addition a pinhole passing horizontally across -it, about halfway down. Through this a black pin, bent at the head, -passes as shown in Fig. 22. In preparation for the trick a piece about -three feet long of black _plaited_ silk line, with a small wire ring at -one end, is passed by the aid of a needle through the hole in the tray -from the outer side; thence upward through the various sections of the -pagoda, beginning with the undermost, till it finally comes up through -the head. After the needle has been drawn off, the end of the thread is -formed into a loop, which is passed over the cross-pin before mentioned. -The thread is then drawn taut from below, the several segments of the -pagoda resting fairly one upon another in the centre of the tray. The -intermediate portion of the thread is drawn up till the little ring at -the outer end comes close to the tray, and is laid upon it in zigzag -fashion so as prevent the possibility of its fouling at a critical moment. - -The introductory patter may run as follows: - -“In the course of my travels in Central Africa--you didn’t know that I -had been in Central Africa? Strange, how little the world knows of its -greatest men! But no matter! When I was in Africa I chanced to come upon -the place where the Golliwoggs live. - -“It’s a nice place--for those who like that sort of place, but most -people would find it a little too warm. It is so warm there that the -hens lay their eggs hard-boiled, and you dig up potatoes ready baked. -It is too warm for anything but simple life,--the very simple life, -particularly as regards clothing. The ordinary walking dress for a -gentleman Golliwogg is a pair of braces. The king wears two pairs; except -on state occasions, when he wears one of those short shirts instead. You -know the kind I mean--all front. I think they call them ‘dickeys.’ - -“The ladies are more dressy. They get the fashions from back numbers of -the _Daily Mail_; kimonos and camisoles and corsets all in the latest -style. They are made with green paint and put on with a shaving brush. -There is only one thing that bothers the court dressmakers. They can’t -make a crinoline.” - -[If desired to shorten the patter the fashion details may be omitted.] - -“I mention these little matters in order to give you an idea of the -place, in case any of you might like to take a week-end trip there. If -you are old and tough, you might risk it. If you are young and tender, -you had better not. - -“The special point of interest is a curious pagoda in the centre of -the village. It is seventy-five feet high and is supposed to be the -habitation of Mumbo Jumbo; a sort of deputy devil, much respected in -those parts. This little model is an exact copy of it. You can’t call it -pretty, but there is a very remarkable thing about it. When the king dies -(which happens by accident about once a fortnight), the pagoda is pulled -down, and if the new king is acceptable to Mumbo Jumbo (which depends -upon the amount of his tip to the chief witch doctor) old Mum rebuilds -it himself by magic. You don’t see him do it. The pagoda just sits up -and paws the air, so to speak. If Mumbo does not approve, the proposed -king gets a knock on the head with a cocoa-nut, and some more liberal -Golliwogg is crowned instead. - -“I naturally wanted to know how the miracle was worked; and I managed to -buy the secret from one of the witch doctors. He sold it to me for a pair -of sixpenny-half penny sock suspenders. He didn’t wear socks, but that -didn’t matter. He put the suspenders on at once and strutted about, as -proud as a dog with three tails. - -“Now, I am going to tell you the secret. Scientists tell us that the sun -throws out three sorts of rays; light-rays, heat-rays, and force-rays. -The artful witch doctors have found out a way of bottling off the force -rays. They are mild at first, but when they get old in the bottle, so to -speak, they become so strong that if you know how to do it you can lift -the heaviest weights with them. - -“I managed to get hold of a small bottle of the rays” (show bottle) “and -I will show you, on a very small scale, how the thing is done. - -“First, we will take the pagoda to pieces.” - -Standing behind the table, the performer moves the pagoda to the corner -of the tray nearest his own left hand; so as to leave space for the -different portions when separated. He then picks up all the parts save -the base, holding them carefully together, and drawing away with them a -length of the thread about equal to the diagonal of the tray. Passing the -undermost section downwards along the thread, he lays it down beside the -base, afterwards treating the other portions in the same way, the several -portions finally resting on the tray somewhat as shown in Fig. 23. - -[Illustration: FIG. 23] - -If the length of the thread has been properly gauged (this is a matter to -be determined by experiment beforehand), there should be some twelve or -fourteen inches of “slack.” Slipping the ring at the end over the little -hook before mentioned, the performer moves a little away from the table, -so as to draw this portion of the thread all but taut, between his own -body and the tray. - -“And now to utilise our force rays.” Holding up the bottle-shaped torch -in his right hand, he turns its light onto the tray, at the same time -edging away farther from the table and moving about behind it so as to -cause a gradual pull upon the thread; the effect being that the severed -parts of the pagoda mount gradually one upon another in due order. It is -probable that they will not rest exactly one upon the other. In any case -the performer affects to notice that they do not. Making a remark to that -effect he steps close to the table to straighten them up, and under cover -of so doing draws with the finger nail the pin in the uppermost portion, -thereby releasing the thread. Stepping back again, as though the better -to judge whether the pagoda is now “plumb,” he thereby draws away the -line, and detaching the ring from the hook, lets it fall to the ground. -This done, he returns to the table, and shifting the restored pagoda to -the centre of the tray, brings all forward, inviting anyone who cares to -do so, to satisfy himself that there has been “no deception.” - - -THE STORY OF THE ALKAHEST - -The requirements for this trick are as follows: - -(1) Two wands, exactly alike in appearance. One of them to be that just -used in some previous trick or tricks (which we will call No. 2), and the -other, prepared as to be presently explained, to be secretly substituted -for it immediately before the presentation of the present trick. This can -be easily done by the aid of a couple of pairs of cup-hooks fixed behind -the table or a chair after the manner described in “Later Magic,” p. 126; -or the wands may be exchanged during journey to the table at an early -stage of the trick; by means of a pocket of suitable shape within the -left breast of the coat. This is a matter as to which the performer will -please himself, but the exhibition in the first instance of an obviously -unprepared wand is essential to the artistic finish of the trick.[14] - -(2) Two pieces of ribbon, three-quarters to one inch wide, alike in -colour. Of these, one piece is to be wound round the end of wand No. 2 -at about three inches from the end, and secured by a rubber ring, of the -solid kind used for holding together the ribs of an umbrella. This wand, -after being “switched” for the unprepared one, must be so placed upon the -table that the end on which the ribbon is wound shall be masked from view -by the second piece of ribbon, lying in a loose heap in front of it. - -(3) A stoppered bottle of clear glass, preferably of some ornamental -or quaint design. This bears a label, of discoloured and time-worn -appearance, with the letter _H R_ written on it in crabbed but distinct -characters, and is about half-filled with _Eau de Cologne_ or lavender -water, to which a few grains of cochineal have been added, giving it a -rich ruby colour. So far as the working of the trick is concerned plain -water might be used, but a coloured and scented liquid is preferable for -the sake of effect. - -(4) A spare rubber ring, of the kind above described, placed in left-hand -vest-pocket. - -The trick may be introduced as follows: - -“For the next surprise I have to show you we are indebted to the ancient -alchemists. People regard them as back numbers nowadays, because they -didn’t know anything about aeroplanes, or appendicitis, or income tax and -such-like up-to-date luxuries; but they had a good many useful little -secrets of their own. One of them was the recipe for what was called the -Alkahest, a liquid which immediately dissolved anything it touched; from -a gold watch to a set of fire-irons. The secret of making it has long -been lost, and all that still exists of the liquid itself I have here in -this bottle.” - -The bottle is here brought forward and offered for inspection. - -“Pretty colour, isn’t it? And it has a very delightful perfume.” (Takes -out stopper.) “You are welcome to smell it but I don’t advise you to -taste it. If you did you would probably never taste anything again. I -want you to notice, by the way, those two letters _H R_ on the label. -There is a dead secret attached to those letters. They mean something, of -course; but nobody knows what it is.” - -The bottle is replaced on the table. - -“This bottle came into my hands by inheritance. An ancestor of mine, in -the reign of James the First, was an alchemist in a small way. He is -reputed to have made a handsome income by selling ladies something to -put in their husbands’ tea. History doesn’t say what. Let us hope it was -only sugar. Well, this old gentleman managed to get hold of the recipe -for making the Alkahest. Whether he found it out himself, or whether he -cribbed it from the cookery-book of some other alchemist, I can’t say. -Anyhow, he got it; and he made up some of the stuff and put it in that -bottle. - -“When he was just going to be burnt as a wizard, which was the regular -thing with scientific men in those days, he handed the bottle to his -eldest son, my great-great-grandfather seventeen times removed, saying, -‘Take it, my son, and may it do you more good than it has done me.’ - -“My great-great-grandfather took the bottle; but he had no idea what it -contained. He was just going to ask his father what the letters on it -meant, but just at that moment the old gentleman flared up, and it was -too late. For the rest of his life my great-great-grandfather puzzled his -head as to what those two letters _H R_ stood for, but all he could think -of was ‘horse-radish,’ and he knew it couldn’t be that. - -“Since that the bottle has been handed down in our family for sixteen -generations, till at last it came to the hands of my Uncle James, and -he puzzled over those letters like the rest. Uncle James was a bit of a -‘nut,’ and prided himself on his fine head of hair, but in course of time -he found he was getting a bit thin on the top, and it worried him. One -day, thinking over the mysterious letters, an idea struck him. ‘H R!’ he -exclaimed, ‘H R! why “Hair Restorer” of course, not a doubt of it! I’ll -try it this very night.’ He did. He rubbed it in, and went to sleep quite -happy, but when he tried to brush his hair in the morning there wasn’t -any left to brush. The Alkahest had taken it all off, and left him as -bald as a baby. - -“He went to bed again, and ordered a wig, but before it could -be sent home he caught such a cold in his head that he died. -Just-sneezed-himself-away.” - -(The last words to be spoken slowly and sadly.) - -“I notice that some of you ladies are weeping. It _is_ an affecting -story, no doubt, and I used to shed a tear over it myself. But after all, -you didn’t know my Uncle James. Neither did I, for the matter of that, -and if we had known him we might not have liked him. So we won’t stop to -grieve about him.[15] - -“One of the most striking experiments with the Alkahest is the dissolving -of a paving stone, particularly if you lay a bunch of violets on it and -dissolve them both together, when you get a scuttleful of best Violet -Powder. Unfortunately I haven’t a paving stone handy, and I don’t suppose -any gentleman present is likely to have one about him. No? I feared not! -Another pretty experiment is the dissolving of a diamond ring, but I have -no diamond rings myself, and I find that if I borrow other people’s and -don’t return them I get myself disliked. So I must try to show the power -of the Alkahest in a less expensive way.” - -Returning to his table, the performer with his right hand picks up the -prepared wand (holding it so as to conceal the ribbon coiled upon it), -and with the left hand the mass of loose ribbon. - -“I have here a piece of ribbon: just ordinary ribbon. Will some lady -oblige me by tying a knot in it, about three inches from the end. Thank -you! Now will some other lady tie another knot about three inches from -the first one.” - -This is repeated till five or six knots have been tied, taking up about -half the ribbon. - -“I am not sure how many knots have been tied. Please count them for me as -I roll the ribbon round my wand.” - -So saying, he winds the ribbon, beginning with the knotted end, on to -the free portion of the wand, counting the knots as he does so, and -continuing the winding till the whole has been taken up. In so doing -he takes care to cover up the knots, and to make the appearance of the -rolled ribbon correspond as nearly as possible with the hidden coil upon -the other end, finally securing it with the rubber ring from his pocket. - -We will suppose that five knots are found to have been tied. The -performer returns to the table to fetch the bottle; and during the -transit passes the wand to the opposite hand, in so doing drawing off -the knotted ribbon (to be dropped a moment later into the profonde), and -exposes the opposite end. He removes stopper from bottle, leaving it on -the table. - -“Now comes the most critical part of the operation. I am going by means -of the Alkahest to dissolve these knots. How many did we say there were? -Five? Then I must use five drops and no more. If I were to overdo it in -the smallest degree the consequences would be serious. I should destroy -the ribbon altogether, and in these hard times ribbon is ribbon, even if -it is only six-three a yard.” - -He brings forward the bottle, and with great pretence of accuracy lets -fall on the ribbon the suggested number of drops. Then slipping off the -rubber ring he offers the end of the ribbon to some member of the company -to unwind, when the knots are naturally found to have disappeared. - -“The Alkahest retains its virtue, you see, even after so many years. -Every knot is completely dissolved. I will conclude by asking you an -impromptu riddle. Just one of those bright thoughts that strike me -sometimes when I least expect it-- - -“When is a knot not a knot?” - -“When it’s _not_ there.” - -[14] I am indebted to a clever amateur, Mr. Gordon Powell, for the -knowledge of a very simple but effective method of “changing” a wand. The -prepared article lies just within the forward rim of an oblong Japanese -tray, and at a convenient moment the unprepared wand just used is laid -behind and parallel with it. A little later this is professedly picked -up again, but as a matter of fact is pushed forward by the tips of the -fingers, and takes the place of the prepared wand, which is picked up in -its stead. - -A pack of cards may be “changed” for another after a similar fashion, the -first finger and thumb picking up the faked pack, while the unprepared -pack is pushed forward by the second and third fingers into the place it -occupied. - -[15] If it is desired to shorten the patter the “Uncle James” episode may -be omitted without serious detriment to the trick. - - -THE ORACLE OF MEMPHIS - -This is of the nature of a magical toy rather than a conjuring trick -proper, but its exhibition may form a pleasant interlude in the course -of a social entertainment. I invented it at an early stage of my magical -career, and exhibited it on various occasions for the amusement of -friends, but made no further use of it. The apparatus has been put aside, -and has been out of sight, out of mind, for many years past. Coming -across it accidentally some short time ago, I was agreeably surprised to -find that it would still answer questions as promptly, and doubtless as -truthfully, as of yore. - -[Illustration: FIG. 24] - -The general appearance of the apparatus, which is eight inches high by -seven in outside diameter, is as depicted in Fig. 24. It consists of -a circular mahogany stand or base, resting on three small feet, and -surmounted by a glass dome _b_. This last is in fact a bell-glass, as -used by gardeners, and has at top the usual knob, whereby to lift it. To -this is attached a short loop of narrow ribbon. The glass dome does not -rest directly on the stand, its lower edge being encased in a mahogany -mount. From the centre of the stand rises a vertical pin, a quarter of an -inch in height, serving as pivot for a metal pointer (Fig. 25), which, -by means of a little cup, or socket, at its centre, can be lifted on -and off, and revolves freely upon it, after the manner of a compass. A -further item of the apparatus is a reversible cardboard dial, whose two -sides, front and back, are depicted in Figs. 26 and 27. It will be seen -that the circumference of this dial is divided on the one side (Fig. 26) -into four equal sections, each bearing a pip of one of the four suits. -The other side (Fig. 27) is divided into eight sections, marked with the -numerals, from seven to ten inclusive, and the letters A, K, Q, and J, -answering to Ace, King, Queen and Jack. - -[Illustration: FIG. 26 FIG. 25 FIG. 27] - -With the Oracle is used a set of eight questions, and a piquet pack of -cards, on the backs of which are written or printed thirty-two answers -appropriate to such questions, one of each suit to each question. The -person consulting the Oracle having selected the question he or she -desires to have answered, the dial is laid on the stand with the “suit” -or Fig. 26 side uppermost, and the pointer is placed in position on its -pivot. The querist is invited to breathe into the glass, which is then -lowered on to the stand. The pointer begins to move, and after a moment -or two of indecision, comes to rest opposite one or other of the four -suit-pips; we will suppose, for the sake of illustration, the diamond. -The glass is then lifted off, the dial reversed, the pointer replaced, -and the glass once more lowered on to the stand. Again the pointer moves, -and stops this time, we will say, at the number “seven.” The seven of -diamonds is sought for in the pack, and is found to bear a more or less -appropriate answer to the question asked. - -The movements of the pointer are governed by the fact that, imbedded in -the mahogany mount surrounding the base of the bell glass, is a piece -of thick steel wire, strongly magnetised, and extending half way round -the circle. The pointer, though so coloured as to have the appearance of -brass, is in reality a magnetic steel needle, and therefore when resting -on the pivot and covered by the glass, will automatically move round till -it comes to rest between the two magnetic poles formed to the opposite -ends of the hidden wire. The operator can therefore, by placing the glass -cover accordingly, cause the indicator to stop at any part of the dial -that he pleases. - -It remains to be explained what guides him in the manipulation of the -glass, so as to cause the needle to stop at the point he desires. It will -be remembered that, attached to the knob at the top of the glass, is a -loop of ribbon, serving to suspend the glass in use from the forefinger, -as shown in Fig. 28. But the loop has in truth a much more important -function than this. Before the loop is formed, the ribbon is tied tightly -round the neck of the knob, previously waxed to prevent its slipping -round, and the knot is so placed that it shall exactly correspond with -that pole of the magnet to which the point of the needle is intended to -be in use attracted. This done, a loop is formed with the two ends of -the ribbon, and so arranged in point of length that when the glass is -suspended from the forefinger, as in the diagram, the thumb and second -finger of the operator shall be just right for moving it round in either -direction, the little knot guiding him by feel to bring it to the desired -point. - -[Illustration: FIG. 28] - -The exhibitor is not limited to any particular set of questions and -answers. At the cost of a fresh pack of cards and a little ingenuity, -he can please himself in this particular. The selection of suitable -questions and answers is however a somewhat delicate matter. The answers -must on the one hand be smart enough to afford amusement to the company -generally; and on the other hand must not be so pungent as to be likely -to cause offence to a person putting the question. - -The questions and answers I devised for my own use ran somewhat as -follows: - - 1. What does my husband (or wife, as the case may be) most think - about? - - ANSWERS - _Seven_ of _Diamonds_. Yourself. - ” _Hearts_. Money. - ” _Spades_. Dinnertime. - ” _Clubs_. Golf. - - 2. Shall I live to grow old? - - _Eight_ of _Diamonds_. Yes, if you don’t worry about it. - ” _Hearts_. A well-spent youth will be followed by - a happy old age. - ” _Spades_. As old as you care to be. - ” _Clubs_. Yes, old, and fat. - - 3. What is my chief fault? - - _Nine_ of _Diamonds_. You haven’t any. - ” _Hearts_. Excessive modesty. - ” _Spades_. Flirting. - ” _Clubs_. Swank. - - 4. Shall I have what I am wishing for? - - _Ten_ of _Diamonds_. Yes, if you deserve it. - ” _Hearts_. If you go the right way to get it. - ” _Spades_. Not likely. - ” _Clubs_. It is like your cheek to wish for it. - - 5. What am I thinking about at this moment? - - _Jack_ of _Diamonds_. A new hat. - ” _Hearts_. Servants. - ” _Spades_. You wouldn’t like me to tell. - ” _Clubs_. That it is a long time between drinks. - - 6. What shall I do to get health? - - _Queen_ of _Diamonds_. Don’t think about it. - ” _Hearts_. Keep smiling. - ” _Spades_. Take Podger’s Purple Pills. - ” _Clubs_. Eat less. - - 7. How old am I? - - _King_ of _Diamonds_. Just right, don’t get any older. - ” _Hearts_. Whatever you are, you don’t look it. - ” _Spades_. You never tell, so I won’t. - ” _Clubs_. Old enough to know better. - - 8. What shall I be this time next year? - - _Ace_ of _Diamonds_. A year older. - ” _Hearts_. A trifle stouter. - ” _Spades_. A year wiser. - ” _Clubs_. Bald as a baby. - -It will be found on comparing them that the answers are arranged on -a regular system, those on the red cards being of a more or less -complimentary nature, or otherwise favourable; the black suits less so, -particularly the clubs, which are rather the reverse, and are intended -to be used as replies to gentlemen only. Bearing this arrangement in -mind, it is a comparatively easy matter to suit the answer to the querist. - -The questions must be memorised in proper order, and it is desirable to -do the same with the answers also, though there should be no difficulty, -remembering the principle of arrangement, in giving a fairly appropriate -answer, even though the memory be for the moment at fault as to its exact -terms. To avoid the necessity of giving the same answer more than once, -it is well to make a rule that the same question shall not be asked more -than three times. - -The Oracle may be introduced as follows: - -“Allow me to introduce to your notice a curio of an exceptionally -interesting kind. This elegant little affair is said to have been the -private Oracle of Rameses the Second, a gentleman who flourished in -Egypt about four thousand years ago. I can’t be sure to a year or two, -because it was before my time, but I believe that is about right. People -sometimes express surprise that, being so ancient, the Oracle should be -in such good condition, but that is accounted for by its having been -preserved in the same case as Rammy’s mummy. I don’t mean his mamma, -but the gentleman himself, in the cold storage of the period. The story -may or may not be true. I can’t take any responsibility for it. Others -declare that the Oracle was the favourite plaything of Helen of Troy. -Historians do tell such tarradiddles that one doesn’t know what to -believe. - -“The powers of the Oracle are limited, for it will only answer -eight questions, and in its own way, but its answers are quite -trustworthy--well, perhaps not _quite_. Let us say as trustworthy as -those of Bond Street fortune-tellers at a guinea a guess. Who will be the -first to test its veracity? - -“I should mention, by the way, that, as each answer exhausts a certain -amount of power, the same question must not be asked more than three -times. You would like to consult the Oracle, Madam? Then please select -one of the questions on this card, and read it out for the information of -the Company. - -“You wish to know” (repeating question). “Good. The answer to your -question will be found on one or other of the cards in this pack, and the -Oracle will tell us which one to look for. First, however, I must ask you -to breathe into this glass. That supplies the missing link, so to speak, -and makes it a sort of personal affair between you and the Oracle.” (This -is done.) - -“Thank you. Now I shall place the glass on its stand, and this little -pointer” (holding it up and placing it on its pivot) “will reveal the -correct answer, first indicating the suit among which the answer is to be -found. You may notice that it wobbles a bit at first. That is because it -is thinking over the question. Now it has come to rest, and it says the -answer will be found in the”--(name suit.) “And now to find out which is -the right card of that suit. I take off the glass and turn the dial over. -Please concentrate your mind on your question. I put the glass and the -pointer on again. Again the pointer thinks it over, and finally decides -as you see, for the--” (naming number of card.) “Now all we have to do -is to look out that card” (does so) “and here we have the answer to your -question.” - -Before inviting a fresh querist to breathe into the glass, it is well to -wipe it out carefully with a silk pocket handkerchief, professedly to -dispel the personal magnetism of the last enquirer, any remains of which, -left within the glass, might imperil the correctness of the anticipated -answer. - - -THE MYSTERY OF MAHOMET[16] - -The reader is probably familiar with the trick known as “The Silver -Tube and Ball.” If not, it may be stated that the “tube” is of metal, -nickelled, and about eight inches long by one and a half in diameter. -With it is used an ebony ball, which is made to pass into and out of the -tube in a very surprising way. - -The secret lies partly in the fact that half way down, the internal -diameter of the tube is very slightly narrowed, forming a sort of -“choke,” so that a ball dropped into it at the upper end does not fall -right through, as one would naturally expect, but stops at that point, -wedging itself lightly, so that the tube can be reversed without any -fear of the ball falling out, though it can be instantly driven out by -bringing down the tube smartly on the table, or by very slight pressure -behind it. - -The other part of the secret lies in the fact that _two_ balls are in -reality used, the existence of the second being of course unknown to the -spectator. The tube being loaded as above mentioned, _i.e._ having the -one ball wedged in it just below the choke, if the duplicate is dropped -in from above it will apparently fall through, though as a matter of fact -this ball comes to a standstill in the tube above the choke, while the -other is driven out at the bottom. The secret use of this second ball -enables the performer to produce sundry surprising results in the way of -appearances and disappearances. - -The possibilities of the trick in this form are however speedily -exhausted, and it has a serious drawback in the fact that it is necessary -to invert the tube afresh before each production, as it is obvious that -a ball contained in it must be brought below the choke before it can be -produced. I had at one time rather a fancy for the trick, but it seemed -to me that it was capable of a good deal of improvement, and after some -cogitation I succeeded in producing a new trick on somewhat similar -lines; but free from the defect mentioned above and capable withal of -producing a far wider variety of effects. - -[Illustration: FIG. 29] - -I use two tubes of stiff cardboard, each about four inches long by -one and a half in diameter. One of these is just a plain tube with no -speciality about it. The other has a piece of fine wire crossing it -midway from side to side, and taking the form of a half hoop, as shown -in Fig. 29, the ends serving as pivots on which it moves freely. On the -outside, one of its ends is turned down vertically, forming a tiny switch -or handle. The normal tendency of the halfhoop is to hang downward across -the tube (thereby closing it to the passage of a ball) but a touch of the -finger, moving the little switch to right or left, raises the loop to a -horizontal position against one or other of the sides of the tube, when -it no longer offers any obstacle to the passing of the ball. The wire -used is so thin that with the halfhoop lying against its side a spectator -may safely be allowed to look through the tube even at a very short -distance, without fear of his perceiving the presence of the wire. - -The requirements for the trick, all told, are as follows: - - (1) The wand. - (2) The plain tube. - (3) The trick tube. - (4) Two white balls. - (5) A red ball. - (6) A lighted candle. - (7) A small red silk handkerchief. - -One of the white balls must be vested or otherwise so placed as to be -ready for production from the wand. The second white ball and the red -ball are stowed in the pochettes, one on each side. The faked tube may -be vested and exchanged for the plain one during the journey back to -the table after the dummy has been tendered for inspection; the latter -being dropped into the profonde. These however are matters which the -expert will arrange after his own fashion. If the performer, not being -an expert, doubts his ability to “change” the tubes neatly during the -transit, he may suppress the plain tube altogether and commence at once -with the exhibition of the faked tube from the platform, but the omission -makes the trick less convincing. - -We will suppose that the performer goes for the maximum effect and -advances offering the dummy tube for inspection. The patter I suggest for -the trick in this form runs as follows: - -“I have here, ladies and gentlemen, a hollow tube. It is not uncommon -for tubes to be hollow, but this one is, if anything, even hollower than -usual. I should like some lady or gentleman to examine it carefully -and testify that it is just a plain ordinary tube with absolutely no -deception of any sort about it. If it was not so, you may be sure I -should hardly venture to let you examine it. You can see through it, hear -through it, or blow through it. You are satisfied? Then I will show you a -curious little experiment with it.” - -During the return to the table the dummy is exchanged for the trick tube. - -“I call the experiment I am about to show you ‘The Mystery of Mahomet.’ -I gave it that name because it was Mahomet who suggested the idea to me. -I don’t mean personally. I didn’t know him. In point of fact he did not -give me the idea till after he had been dead for some years. This sounds -peculiar, but I will explain. - -“When Mahomet died he wasn’t buried like other people. His coffin was -placed in a mosque, where it hangs in the air like a captive balloon, -about twenty feet up, resting on nothing at all. I am not certain as to -the exact height from the ground, but that is what the Moslems say, and -they would hardly tell a story about a little thing like that. It has -always been a mystery what keeps the prophet up aloft. Some say it is -done by mesmerism, some say by magnetism, and one old gentleman declared -it was done by mormonism. No doubt, when you come to think of it Mahomet -was a bit of a Mormon. But they are all wide of the mark. As a matter of -fact the coffin rests on a slab of compressed air. It’s quite simple, -when you know it. I haven’t a coffin handy, but by means of this little -tube I can show you the effect of the same principle on a smaller scale. - -[Illustration: FIG. 30] - -“As some of you have not had the opportunity of personally examining the -tube I should like to prove to you in the first place that it is really -what it appears to be, a simple cardboard cylinder, open from end to end, -and as free from deception as I am myself. - -“Proof 1.” (Wand dropped through tube on to table.) - -“Proof 2.” (Tube held in front of candle showing flame through it.“) - -“Proof 3.” (Tube dropped over candle as in Fig. 30, or spun on wand, held -horizontally as in Fig. 31; the halfhoop in each case being made to lie -against the side of the tube.) - -[Illustration: FIG. 31] - -“I have here a little ball, of such a size that it passes easily through -the tube.”[17] The ball is allowed to fall through, from the one hand to -the other. - -“Now I will place the tube upright on the table and drop the ball in -once more. Where is it now? On the table, you say. Quite right: here it -is.” (Lift tube, closing it, and placing it on end beside ball.) “But -now I take a few handfuls of air and press them well down into the tube” -(makes believe to do so), “and I drop the ball in again. This time you -see it does not fall through. As a matter of fact it has stopped halfway, -resting on the compressed air in the tube.” (Lift tube, showing that the -ball has not passed through. After replacing the tube switch the wire -loop to the horizontal position, allowing the ball to drop inside the -tube.) “I think there can be no doubt that this is the way Mr. Home, the -medium, managed to float about with his head in the air and his feet on -the mantelpiece. All that was needed was a few pints of compressed air in -his tail-pockets. It’s quite simple, when you know how it’s done. - -“Of course, as the tube is open at the top, the effect doesn’t last very -long. The compressed air gradually expands again and becomes too thin to -support the ball any longer. I dare say by this time it has done so.” -(Lift tube, exposing ball, and re-closing tube). “Yes, here it is.” - -“I can keep the air from escaping to a certain extent, because I happen -to have a very strong won’t. A strong will is a good thing to have, but -sometimes a strong won’t is even more useful. Once again I will fill -the tube with compressed air.” (Make believe to do so, then pick up the -closed tube.) “I drop the ball in again, and this time it will remain -suspended till I permit the compressed air to escape.” (Pick up tube, -holding it vertically a few inches above the table.) “Say when you would -like the ball to fall. Now? Good! I withdraw my strong won’t and the -ball falls at once.” (Switch loop, allowing it to do so, then pass tube, -closing it, to opposite hand and load into it duplicate ball at top; then -replacing tube on table.) - -“Now, by way of variety, we will try compressing the ball instead of the -air.” (Pick up ball left on table and make believe to transfer it to the -opposite hand. Then, with the left hand empty, make pretence of crushing -it into the hand.) “The ball is now resolved into its component atoms. -You didn’t see them go? No, of course you didn’t. For the time being they -are dematerialised: but the compressed air in the tube will soon solidify -them again.” (Lift tube, keeping ball suspended.) “It has not got solid -yet, but we shall not have long to wait.” (After a few moments again lift -tube, opening it and allowing ball to pass through.) “Here is the ball, -now as solid as before.” - -Transfer tube closed to opposite hand and in so doing load in red ball at -top. In replacing tube on table open and close it again, so that the ball -shall fall, but shall rest within the tube on the table. - -“Now I will show you another curious effect. A ball which has been -dematerialised in that way becomes very sensitive to colour. I will just -give the ball a rub with this red silk handkerchief and drop it into the -tube again.” Drop in white ball after rubbing, keeping tube closed; then -raise it and show red ball at bottom. - -“Here it is again, you see, but it has taken the colour of the -handkerchief and is now a rosy red, a sort of maiden’s blush; the blush -of a very shy maiden. Unfortunately maiden’s blush is not a fast colour, -unless it’s the wrong kind; the kind that’s rubbed in with a powder puff. -This kind soon gets pale again. I rub the ball again, this time with a -white handkerchief, and again drop it into the tube.” - -Drop in red ball, tube closed, lift and show white ball, under cover of -its appearance transferring tube to opposite hand and allowing red ball -to run back into palm to be got rid of a moment later. - -“I think I heard a lady say, ‘Where is the red ball?’ This is the red -ball, at least it was the red ball a moment ago. There is no other, for, -as you see, the tube is empty.” - -Again drop tube over candle as in Fig. 30. Pass ball from hand to hand -and finally make believe to swallow it, meanwhile dropping it into the -profonde. - -“After being treated like this the ball becomes so volatile that I used -to be always losing it. But I never lose it now. I just swallow it and -then I know just where it is when I want it. It saves a lot of trouble.” - -[16] A description of this trick will be found in _The Magician_ for -March, 1914. - -[17] If preferred the ball instead of being taken openly from the table, -may be produced from the wand after the fashion familiar in the Cup and -Ball trick, but on the whole I think this is best omitted. - - -THE BEWILDERING BLOCKS - -The blocks which give its title to this trick are inch-square wooden -cubes, three in number, as illustrated in Fig. 32. Each is coloured black -on two of its opposite sides; these in use being made top and bottom. -The four remaining sides are in the case of one block red, of another -white, and of a third blue. The only other item of apparatus known to the -spectators is a square cardboard tube, as depicted in Fig. 33. This is -about five inches long, and of such dimensions laterally as to let either -block slide by its own weight easily through it, but no more. All four -items may be freely submitted to inspection, for in this case appearances -are not deceitful. Both the blocks and the tube are no more and no less -than they seem to be. - -In exhibiting the trick, the tube is placed upright on the table, and the -three blocks are dropped into it one after another, the company being -requested to note particularly the order in which they are inserted, -which we will suppose to be in the first instance blue, then white, and -lastly red, as shown without the tube in Fig. 32. It is clear that, -once inserted, they cannot by any natural means alter their relative -positions, but, strange to say, when they are again uncovered, the red -block just inserted at the top is found to have passed to the bottom, -the other two moving up accordingly. - -This surprising effect is produced by the secret introduction into the -tube of a fourth block of which the spectators know nothing. This, which -we will call the “trick” block, is, like the rest, coloured black at the -top and bottom; but of the remaining four sides two, contiguous to each -other, are red, and the other two blue. - -[Illustration: FIG. 32 FIG. 33 FIG. 34] - -When the tube is handed back to the performer after inspection, before -placing it on the table he secretly introduces the trick block into its -lower end, privately noting against which sides of the tube the two _red_ -faces will lie, and taking care in placing the tube upon the table that -the angle formed by these two sides shall be to the front. The other -three blocks are then, in accordance with the patter, dropped in from -above, in the order shown in Fig. 32, resting, unknown to the spectators, -on top of the trick block. When the performer lifts off the tube, which -he does grasping it diagonally between thumb and finger at about an inch -from the top, he does so with gentle pressure, thereby holding back the -uppermost block within the tube, and exposing the two others with the -trick block at the bottom, as indicated by Fig. 34. - -I gave a description of this trick in the _Magician_ of February, 1914. -The patter for its exhibition was based on a popular nursery legend, and -as this mode of presentation won general approval from the juveniles I -cannot do better than repeat it practically as there given. The needful -working instructions will be found interspersed with the patter. - -“What I am going to show you now is not a trick, or, if you can call it a -trick, it is one that works itself, for you will see for yourselves that -I have really nothing to do with it. It is just an illustration of the -force of bad example. - -“No doubt you have all heard of a young gentleman called Fidgety Phil. -There is a little poem about him. It says: - - ‘Fidgety Phil - Couldn’t keep still, - Made his mother and father ill.’ - -“There are a lot more verses but I am sorry to say I don’t know them. -However, these few lines are enough to show you what sort of a boy -Fidgety Phil was. He was the kind of boy that wherever he is, he wants -to be somewhere else. When he was standing up he wanted to sit down, -and when he was sitting down he wriggled about on his chair till he was -allowed to stand up again. - -“These little blocks are all that are left of a box of bricks which are -said to have belonged to Fidgety Phil and they show what even a box of -bricks may come to if a bad example is constantly set before them. These -three little bricks have got to be just as fidgety as Phil was himself. -Anyhow, that is the only way in which I can account for their queer -behaviour. - -“Please have a good look at them, and see if you can discover anything -peculiar about them. I can’t, myself.” (The blocks are handed for -examination.) “They seem to me to be just ordinary bits of coloured wood, -and this square tube is believed to have been a chimney pot belonging to -the same set. I want you to notice particularly that the bricks are just -the right size to fit closely in the chimney. They go in quite easily; -but when they are once inside they can’t turn round, or turn over, or -change places. But the curious thing is that though they can’t they _do_, -as you will see presently. - -“I place the chimney-pot here on the table, where you can see all round -it, and I drop the three bricks into it one by one. Notice particularly -the order in which I put them in. First, the blue. You heard it go down. -Next, the white, and now, the red. Don’t forget. Blue at the bottom, -white in the middle, and red at the top. - -“Now, without my saying or doing anything, they will at once begin -to shift about. They can’t keep still for more than a few seconds. -When I lift off the chimney pot, you will find that they have changed -places.” (It is lifted accordingly, performer holding back the uppermost -block within it by gentle pressure on opposite angles of the tube, and -exhibiting only the three lower blocks now as in Fig. 34.) - -“There, as I told you, like Fidgety Phil, they couldn’t keep still. The -white brick has climbed to the top, the red one has gone down to the -bottom, and the blue one is now in the middle. - -“We will try again. I will put the bricks in in just the same order, to -make it easier for you to remember them.” - -Performer has meanwhile allowed the red block, left in the upper part -of the tube, to sink to the bottom, checked by the third finger, and -replaces tube upright on table. - -“As before, I drop in first the blue, then the white, then the red.” -(This last being the trick block, care must be taken to keep its _red_ -sides well to the front.) - -“Again I lift off the chimney pot, and again you see, the bricks have -changed places. White has come to the top, and red has gone to the bottom -again.” - -The trick block, which this time remained at the top, is now allowed to -slide down to the bottom. The tube is again placed on the table, but so -turned that the _blue_ sides of the block within it are brought to the -front. - -“I can’t tell you why the bricks behave in this way, but you can see for -yourselves that _I_ have nothing to do with it. We will try it once more, -and for a change I will put the red block in first, then the white and -then the blue. That order will be easy to remember. Red, white and blue -reckoning from the bottom upwards. Again I remove the cover. The same -thing has happened again, but with a little difference. White has come to -the top again, but blue has this time gone to the bottom.” - -While attention is drawn to the new order of the blocks, the performer -allows the ordinary blue one, now left in the tube, to slide out into his -hand, and in picking up the others secretly substitutes this for the -trick block, which is now at the bottom of the tube. - -“Once more, ladies and gentlemen, here is the chimney pot, and here -are the three bricks, for inspection by any one who cares to look at -them. Perhaps some of you may be able to account for their remarkable -behaviour. It’s a puzzle to me; but I never was good at guessing. My own -idea is that they are haunted by the ghost of Fidgety Phil. If not, I -give it up.” - - -AN “OD” FORCE - -To avoid misconception, it may be well to state at once that the -peculiar spelling of the word “od” in the above title is not a printer’s -error. The explanation will be found in the patter, which is founded -on a discovery claimed to have been made by a scientist at one time of -world-wide renown, and the responsibility for so spelling the word rests -with him. For programme purposes the reader is at liberty to re-name -the trick according to his own fancy. “Mysterious Motion,” or “Moved -by Magic” would fairly represent the effect produced, which consists -in causing a borrowed coin to move automatically at the will of the -operator, in various directions. - -The requirements for the trick are as follows: - -(1) The “tramway” whereon the coin is to be made to travel. This consists -of a slab of wood thirteen inches long by four wide, and three-eighths -of an inch thick and covered as to its upper side with fine black cloth. -To the cloth-covered side of this is attached, by means of a screw at -each corner, a parallelogram of brass or copper wire enclosing a space -two inches wide. The four screws, which are likewise of brass, and which -are of the round-headed kind, are within the parallelogram and serve to -keep the wire extended. Midway at each end is another screw, driven in -_outside_ the wire, in such manner as to make all taut. These last two -screws, for a reason connected with the working of the trick, stand up a -shade higher than the other four, but the difference is not great enough -to be noticeable. See Fig. 35. - -[Illustration: FIG. 35] - -(2) A special “pull” carried on the person of the performer. This -consists of a fine black thread, to one end of which is attached a weight -travelling up and down the trouser leg, after the manner described (in -connection with a self-suspending wand) at page 111 of “Later Magic.” -In the present case, however, the weight is much smaller, being in fact -just large enough to rather more than counterbalance the coin used in the -trick, _plus_ the friction to be overcome by the thread in the working -of the trick. The degree of such friction is an uncertain quantity, as -it will largely depend on the nature of the operator’s underwear and its -closeness to his own body. The precise weight most effective must be -ascertained by previous experiment, and regulated accordingly. - -It will be found convenient to use by way of weight a glass tube, closed -at the bottom like a test-tube and loaded with buckshot, more or less -in quantity according to the weight required. The mouth of the tube -is closed by a cork, through which one end of the thread is passed, -and secured on the under side by a knot and a spot of gum. When the -minimum weight that will effectually serve the desired purpose has been -ascertained, any vacant space above the leaden pellets should be filled -with cotton wool (to prevent rattling) and the cork should then be -cemented into the tube. If preferred, the wool may be interspersed among -the buckshot. - -The opposite end of the thread, which will be somewhere about thirty -inches in length (this again being a point to be determined by -experiment), is passed through the curled end of a good-sized safety pin. -This, for use in the trick, is attached to the inside of the performer’s -vest, just within the lowest part of the opening. To the free-end of the -thread, after passing through the loop of the pin, is attached a disc of -copper or zinc, three-quarters of an inch in diameter, against which, -on one side, is pressed and flattened out a pellet of conjurer’s wax, -in good adhesive condition. If the length of the thread has been duly -regulated, the little disc will rest normally just within the vest, but -can be drawn out the extent of a couple of feet or so, returning swiftly -to its hiding place the moment it is released. - -(3) A glass ball--professedly crystal. - -(4) An ordinary match-box, empty. - -Instructions for the working of the trick will be most conveniently given -step by step with the patter, which may run as follows: - -“In the early days of Queen Victoria’s reign, when the oldest of us here -present were good little boys or girls, and the rest were not born or -thought of, there lived a celebrated scientific gentleman, called the -Baron von Reichenbach. I am sorry to say he was a German, but he couldn’t -help it. As his father and mother were Germans, he had to be one too. It -shows how careful children ought to be in the choice of their parents. -He invented a lot of useful things, among them creosote and paraffin. -Neither of them smells very nice, but they don’t trouble about that in -Germany. - -“Besides being a great chemist, Von Thingany dabbled in what are called -the occult sciences, and he claimed to have discovered a new force (a -sort of magnetism, only different) and which, he declared, pervaded every -thing in nature, especially crystal. Directed by a strong will, like his -own, or mine, it would do all sorts of wonderful things. It seemed to -me that such a force would come in very handy for magical purposes, and -I set to work to invent it over again, and I have at any rate produced -something very like it. The Baron called his force ‘odd,’ but he spelt it -‘od,’ which is odd too. You must judge for yourselves whether my force is -the same as his, and you can spell it which way you like. - -“I have only been able so far to work up a very small amount of the -force, say about six mouse-power, so it won’t turn tables, or lift -pianos. I can only get it, so far, to move a small weight like a florin -or a half-dollar, and that only for a very short distance. For greater -conveniences I have made this little tramway for the coin to perform -upon. These wires which you see are not for it to travel on, but merely -to get more equal distribution of the force. There is nothing out of the -way about it, nor with this ball, except that it is crystal. Examine -both as much as you please.” - -The two articles are accordingly offered for inspection. The performer -takes back the tramway in the left hand, holding it by one end in such -manner that it is gripped in the fork of the thumb, leaving the thumb -itself comparatively free. Taking back the ball with the right hand and -remarking “Now to develop the force,” he rubs it on his left coat-sleeve, -and strokes the surface of the tramway two or three times with it. - -“Having now established a proper degree of ‘oddity’ between the tram and -the crystal, I will ask for the loan of a half-dollar (or florin as the -case may be) marked in any way the owner pleases.” - -He replaces the ball on the table, and in the act of again turning to the -audience gets hold of the waxed disc and draws it away from the body, -holding it clipped between the ends of the first and second fingers, the -left thumb pressing the thread against the cloth top of the tramway, and -acting for the time being (and indeed throughout the trick) as a brake -neutralising at pleasure the pull of the weight. - -He receives the coin on the tramway; then picking it up with the right -hand, makes some observation as to the mark, meanwhile pressing the waxed -side of the disc against it, then replacing it, disc down, in the middle -of the tramway. - -“I shall now, by means of the ‘od’ force, compel the coin to move towards -me.” This he does accordingly, by relaxing the pressure of the thumb upon -the thread and merely bringing the pull of the weight into operation. -When the coin has all but reached the nearer end of the tramway, he says, -“We will now see if we can make it travel a little longer distance.” So -saying he draws the thread out again and lays the coin on the farther end -of the tram, and again makes it travel slowly back. A good effect may be -here produced by making it stop halfway, and (after remarking in a casual -way that the power is hardly strong enough) picking up the ball, again -rubbing it upon the sleeve and moving it, a few inches distance, in the -direction in which the coin is to travel, when it resumes its journey -accordingly. - -Once more picking up the coin, he replaces it at the farther end of the -tramway, but in so doing passes the thread outside and around the screw -at that end. He then remarks, as if bethinking himself: “By the way, a -lady suggested the other night that the coin was attracted towards me by -my personal magnetism. I know I am an attractive man: I have been told so -frequently but that is not the explanation in this case, as I will prove -to you by making the coin travel _away_ from me.” So saying, he draws the -coin towards him, easing off the pressure on the thread to enable him to -do so, and leaves it at the inner end. The ball is now moved away from -himself, and the pressure of the brake being relaxed, the coin is now -drawn in the same direction. - -“‘_Quod erat demonstrandum_,’ as our old friend Shakespeare (or was it -Euclid) used to say.” (To the lender of the coin.) “You must take care -of this coin, Sir; it is now charged with a minute quantity of the ‘od’ -force, and so long as you keep it you can never be ‘stony-broke.’ I will -show you just one more effect with it before I return it to you.” - -While speaking, he has carelessly picked up the coin, and replaced it on -the _inner_ side of the screw so that this shall be no longer encircled -by the thread. Picking up the match box from the table, he pushes out the -“tray” portion with the forefinger; then throwing aside the outer case, -he picks up the tray, and inverts it over the coin. - -“I will now show you that the ‘od’ force still operates even though -it is cut off from any direct connection with the subject of the -experiment: but in this case a little more power is required.” So -saying he rubs the glass ball again on his coat-sleeve, and, moving the -ball accordingly, causes the coin to travel towards him, the match-box -naturally moving with it. In again picking up the coin, to return it to -the owner, he detaches it from the disc, which flies back to its original -resting-place. - - -THE MYSTERY OF THE THREE SEALS - -This is a trick involving some little trouble in the way of preparation, -and perhaps a little more than average address on the part of the -performer, but on the other hand it costs little; for all the needful -appliances may be homemade, and in the hands of an expert the trick will -amply repay the time and trouble expended upon it. Baldly stated, its -effect consists in the magical introduction of a marked coin into the -innermost of a nest of three envelopes, each securely sealed. - -[Illustration: FIG. 36] - -The requirements for the trick are as under: - -1. Two nests of envelopes. The innermost of each is one of the little -square kind used in shops to contain copper “change,” or to hold the -weekly wage of an employee. It should be of cartridge or stout manila -paper, and about two inches square. The next larger is of the ordinary -square or so-called square-note size, and the third a little larger -still. Envelopes of the two last mentioned sizes are not always to be -obtained made of cartridge or manila, but this condition is not in their -case absolutely essential. The flap of each envelope must be stuck down -and sealed with red wax.[18] - -2. A special envelope, which we will call the “trick” envelope. This -is of the same size and kind as the innermost of the nested envelopes -but has undergone special preparation as follows: Taking two ordinary -envelopes, cut round the edges of one of them with a penknife, completely -dividing back from front. Take the plain or non-flap side of the one -so treated, lay it squarely under the flap of the other, and stick the -flap down upon it in the ordinary way: then add a seal of red wax, as -closely as possible corresponding in appearance with the two seals of the -innermost of the nested envelopes. Lastly, cut away the superfluous paper -round the seal and the edges of the flap. The envelope will now be shown -as in Fig. 36, and when closed will have the appearance of an envelope -sealed in the ordinary way, though it as yet lacks the connecting medium -for actually securing it. - -3. The “coin mat” (page 4) freshly treated with the usual adhesive. The -side so treated is to be turned downwards on the table with a shilling -pressed against the adhesive portion. - -4. A penknife, to be used as envelope opener. - -As shortly as possible before the presentation of the trick, the trick -envelope must be further prepared by spreading a thin layer of seccotine -on that portion of the underside of the flap immediately under the seal. - -N. B. This must not be done too long beforehand, as it is essential to -the success of the trick that the envelope be used while the seccotine is -still in a “tacky” condition. - -The envelope prepared as above, to be laid on the table, behind some -small object, or preferably just inside the foremost rim of a Japanese -tray; at one corner, mouth uppermost, and flap to the rear. Under these -conditions, the butting of the opposite edge of the envelope against -the forward wall of the tray will be found greatly to facilitate the -subsequent introduction of the borrowed coin. Before so placing the -envelope, its edges on each side should be pressed slightly inwards, so -as to make it expand a little at the opening. - -These arrangements duly made, the performer may introduce the trick as -follows: - -“I don’t know whether anybody here remembers George the Third, I can’t -say I do myself. He was before my time, but there is a funny little story -told about him. One day when out for a walk, he went into a farmhouse -where he found the family having their dinner. One dish consisted of -apple-dumplings, and the question crossed the King’s mind, ‘How on earth -did the apples get into the dumplings?’ He didn’t like to ask, but he -couldn’t get the puzzle out of his head. He thought about it so much and -it worried him so that at last he went clean out of his mind. He became -_non compos mentis_, which is the doctors’ polite way of saying dotty. - -“I mention this story by way of a caution. What I am going to show you is -ever so much more incomprehensible than any number of apple-dumplings; -in fact, so extra-extraordinary that if anybody here was the least bit -excitable and I sprung it upon him unawares he might go dotty like -old Georgie. So if any of you feel at all nervous, don’t hesitate to -go home, or you can go and sit on the stairs till this particular -experiment is over. Nobody moves! I am pleased to find that you are all -so strong-minded, but if anything happens don’t blame me. - -“I have known strong men; men of massive intellect, like myself, come -here with a smile on their faces, but when they left the smile was -replaced by an air of grim determination. You could see at a glance that -they had made up their minds to find out how it was done, or _die_. They -haven’t come again: so I suppose they died.[19] - -“As you are prepared to run the risk I will ask some gentleman to oblige -me with the loan of a shilling, marked, in some unmistakable way. Thank -you, Sir. You have marked the coin? Then please place it here, on this -little tray. I won’t touch it myself at present. All please keep one eye -upon it, the other eye you had better keep on me.” - -Receive the coin on the mat, held in right hand. After showing the left -hand empty, transfer the mat to that hand and show the right empty. -Return the mat to right hand, but before doing so turn that hand over so -as to receive the mat with thumb undermost. Just as you reach the table -to place the mat upon it bring the second and third fingers over the -borrowed coin, and under cover of your own body turn the mat over. In -putting it down on the table draw away the borrowed coin into the hand -and palm it. To the eye of the spectator the state of things will be -unaltered, your own coin, now uppermost on the mat, being taken for the -borrowed one. - -You continue, standing behind your table, and resting the right hand, -with the palmed coin, close to the trick envelope, and holding up the -two nests in the other hand: “I have here two envelopes, or, to be -exact, six envelopes, for each of those you see contains two more, one -within the other: all carefully sealed. I am going to pass the coin this -gentleman has lent me into the innermost of one or other of them, I don’t -care which, for they are exactly alike, so I shall leave the choice to -yourselves.” - -While you are speaking as above the disengaged hand slips the genuine -coin into the trick envelope, closes it, pressing the flap well down, and -palms it, dropping it a moment or two later into a pochette till needed. - -“You decide for this envelope? Just as you please. As the other will not -be needed I will ask somebody to open it, and bear witness that things -are exactly as I have stated.” - -Leaving the chosen envelope on the table in full view and bringing -forward the other, have the latter opened by some member of the company -with the penknife. Hand the envelope produced from it, with the knife, to -a second spectator, to be dealt with in like manner. When the innermost -is reached, have this opened by the lender of the marked coin: this -apparent proof of good faith tending to make him less critical when, at a -later stage, he is invited to do the same with the trick envelope. - -“Nothing could be fairer, could it? You will all agree that it would -have been impossible to introduce anything into the innermost of those -three envelopes without breaking all three seals. When I say impossible, -of course I mean impossible to a mere man. To a magician there is no -such word as impossible, except in the dictionary. In fact, the more -impossible a thing is, the more any respectable magician makes up his -mind to do it. Watch me carefully, please. I want you to be quite sure -all through that there is no deception. - -“Now then, to pass the coin into this other envelope.” As you say this, -you pick up the coin mat, depress it enough for all present to see the -coin upon it, and make the motion of sliding it off into the left hand. -This should be done while standing a little in front of your table. In -turning to replace the mat, reverse it and lay it with the side to which -the coin adheres downwards. If deftly executed, this reversal of the mat -will be imperceptible, as it is covered by the turn to the table. Even -if it were noticed it would have practically no significance for the -spectators, who naturally take it for granted that the coin has passed -from the mat into your hand. The moment you have laid down the mat, the -now disengaged hand picks up the nest of envelopes, and you make believe -to rub the coin (supposedly in left hand) into it. This done, you hold -the envelope aloft in each hand alternately, allowing it to be seen that -the hands are otherwise empty. - -“So far, so good! The coin has passed from my hands into the innermost -envelope. But I don’t expect you to take my word for it. Will you, sir” -(any given spectator) “open the outermost envelope, first, however, -satisfying yourself that it is still securely sealed?” - -It is just possible, though not very likely, that the person to whom the -envelope and penknife have been handed may notice, and remark audibly, -that he cannot feel any coin in the envelope. If such a remark is made, -you reply that the coin naturally had to be dematerialised before it -could pass into the envelope, and it will take a few minutes for it to -re-materialise, but it will become gradually more solid, and will then be -distinctly perceptible. - -The outer envelope having been opened you take back its contents, and -under pretext of getting as many witnesses as possible to fair play, -have the next envelope opened by a second person, seated at some little -distance from the lender of the shilling. The last named gentleman is -invited himself to open the last envelope, or rather, the trick envelope, -which you in transit substitute for it. Having already opened a precisely -similar envelope, and found it securely fastened, he is not likely to -anticipate anything different about this one. If he uses the penknife -and cuts it open along the edge of the flap in the usual way he will -naturally hold it with the thumb upon the seal and all will be well. As a -rule, he will be more concerned to identify the coin as the one he lent -than to seek for any suspicious feature about the envelope. Even in the -unlikely case of his tearing open the envelope, instead of cutting it, -it is doubtful whether he would detect the use of the seccotine, which -should by this time be practically dry; and by the rest of the spectators -it would still be taken for granted that this envelope, like the rest, -was sealed in the ordinary way. - -It will be obvious to the expert reader that the central idea, viz., -the transformation by the use of seccotine of an open envelope into -one apparently sealed in the regular way, is one that admits of a wide -variety of detail as to the mode of presentation. For instance: The -procedure suggested for getting rid of the duplicate coin, and apparently -rubbing it into the envelope, is but one of many alternatives. The coin -might be “passed” by the agency of fire, _i.e._, wrapped in a piece of -flash paper with open fold at bottom and flared off at the psychological -moment over a candle flame, or it might be got rid of by vanishing it -into the pocket of a black art mat, or by the use of a black art patch, -as described at page 20. - -The critical part of the trick is the “switching” of the two envelopes at -the final stage, but in view of their small size this is a matter of very -little difficulty. The expert will probably do this after some fashion of -his own. The less instructed reader may use the following plan, which he -will find by no means difficult of execution, though it will need some -little practice to work it neatly. - -While the second envelope is being opened, get the trick envelope from -the pochette into the right hand, clipping it against the second and -third joints of the second and third fingers, with the “seal” side turned -away from them. When the genuine envelope is handed to you receive it -with the left hand, and immediately transfer it to the right, pushing it -between the fingers and the palmed one, with the seal facing in the same -direction. The moment it is masked by the fingers push the trick envelope -outward with the thumb, bringing this into view in its place. Smartly -executed the change is instantaneous and cannot possibly be detected. -The apparent object of passing it from hand to hand is to have the left -hand empty and so free to take back the penknife from the last holder. -From this point all will be easy, as it is the trick envelope which is -now alone in view, and all you have to guard against is any accidental -exposure of the one now hidden in the hand. - -This description may justly appear somewhat long-winded, but its length -is occasioned by the number of small details demanding notice. In -performance, the trick should not take, at most, more than ten minutes. -The introductory patter may of course be shortened at pleasure. - -[18] If the performer does not object to the slight additional trouble, -he will find an easy method of obtaining envelopes exactly square and of -any desired description of paper, indicated in the chapter entitled “A -Few Wrinkles,” _post._ - -[19] This rigmarole may equally well be used by way of introduction to -any other trick of sufficient importance. King George’s puzzlement about -the dumplings is said to be a matter of history, but, I do not guarantee -it as a fact. - - -THE WIZARD’S POCKETBOOK - -This is an extremely small volume, consisting in fact of six pages only, -and no letterpress, the instructions for its use being embodied in a -separate leaflet. On each of its pages are miniature reproductions of -thirty-six playing cards, six in a row; every card of the pack being -represented once at least among the whole number. The object of the book -is to enable the owner to discover the name of a card drawn (or merely -thought of) by some member of the company. The chooser is only asked to -look at the book, and state on which one or more of its pages the card -in question appears, when the performer, without seeing or handling the -book himself, can instantly name the card. The six pages of the book are -reproduced in the diagrams which follow. Figs. 37-42. - -[Illustration: FIG. 37] - -[Illustration: FIG. 38] - -[Illustration: FIG. 39] - -[Illustration: FIG. 40] - -[Illustration: FIG. 41] - -[Illustration: FIG. 42] - -To be in a position to work the trick, it is necessary in the first -place to memorise each of the fifty-two cards of the pack in connection -with a particular number. This may at first sight appear a formidable -undertaking, but it is not so in reality. - -All that really needs to be memorised is the order of the suits; which is -as under: - - 1. Clubs. - 2. Hearts. - 3. Spades. - 4. Diamonds. - -This order may be instantly recalled by using as a memory-peg the -word _CH_a_S_e_D_, which contains the initials of the four suits in -the proper order, or the reader may if he prefers it recall them by -reflecting that _Cool Heads Soon Decide_. - -The arrangement of each suit follows the natural order, the ace of clubs -being No. 1; the deuce 2; and the trey 3; knave 11; queen 12 and king 13. -The card next following, viz., the ace of hearts, will be 14; the deuce -of hearts 15, and so on, the complete arrangement being as shown below: - - 1. Ace of clubs. - 2. Deuce of clubs. - 3. Trey of clubs. - 4. Four of clubs. - 5. Five of clubs. - 6. Six of clubs. - 7. Seven of clubs. - 8. Eight of clubs. - 9. Nine of clubs. - 10. Ten of clubs. - 11. Knave of clubs. - 12. Queen of clubs. - 13. King of clubs. - 14. Ace of hearts. - 15. Deuce of hearts. - 16. Trey of hearts. - 17. Four of hearts. - 18. Five of hearts. - 19. Six of hearts. - 20. Seven of hearts. - 21. Eight of hearts. - 22. Nine of hearts. - 23. Ten of hearts. - 24. Knave of hearts. - 25. Queen of hearts. - 26. King of hearts. - 27. Ace of spades. - 28. Deuce of spades. - 29. Trey of spades. - 30. Four of spades. - 31. Five of spades. - 32. Six of spades. - 33. Seven of spades. - 34. Eight of spades. - 35. Nine of spades. - 36. Ten of spades. - 37. Knave of spades. - 38. Queen of spades. - 39. King of spades. - 40. Ace of diamonds. - 41. Deuce of diamonds. - 42. Trey of diamonds. - 43. Four of diamonds. - 44. Five of diamonds. - 45. Six of diamonds. - 46. Seven of diamonds. - 47. Eight of diamonds. - 48. Nine of diamonds. - 49. Ten of diamonds. - 50. Knave of diamonds, - 51. Queen of diamonds. - 52. King of diamonds. - -The arrangement of the table being once understood, the number associated -with any given card in the club suit suggests itself automatically, -_e.g._, the seven of clubs is likewise No. 7 in the list. To ascertain -the name of the card corresponding to any of the higher numbers, all that -is needed is to subtract from that number 13, or such higher multiple of -thirteen as the case will admit, and the difference will represent its -position in its own suit. - -Suppose, for instance, that the performer desires to know what card -answers to the number 20. Deducting thirteen from 20, the remainder, 7, -tells him that the card is the seventh (_i.e._ the seven) of the second -suit, viz., hearts. If he wants to know the name of No. 29, he deducts -26, when the remainder, 3, tells him that the card is the three of the -third suit, spades. If the card be No. 40, the number to be deducted -will be 39, and the remainder, 1, tells him that the card is the first -of the fourth suit, viz., the ace of diamonds. After a very few trials, -this little exercise in mental arithmetic becomes so familiar that the -calculation becomes practically instantaneous. - -Going a step further; with each of the six pages of the pocket-book is -associated a special number, known as its “key” number. These are as -under: - - Page 1 Key Number 1 - ” 2 ” ” 2 - ” 3 ” ” 4 - ” 4 ” ” 8 - ” 5 ” ” 16 - ” 6 ” ” 32 - -The memorising of these is also a very simple matter, for it will be -noted that the key numbers are the first six factors of the familiar -geometrical progression, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32. Printed as below: - - 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 - --------------------- - 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 - -the upper figures, in ordinary type, expressing the numbers of the pages, -and the lower, in black type, the corresponding key numbers, a very small -amount of study will associate them so closely in the mind as to fix them -firmly in the memory. - -Having mastered these two simple lessons, the learner is in a position -to use the pocket-book. To ascertain the card chosen, he has only to add -together the key numbers of the pages in which he is told that such card -appears. The total will be the number at which that card stands in the -list given on page 185, and, this being known, it becomes an easy matter -to name the card itself. - -We will suppose, for instance, that performer is told that the chosen -card appears on the second page, and no other. The key number of this -page being 2, the card must be the second in the list, viz., the deuce -of clubs. If he is told that the chosen card is to be found on pages 1, -3 and 6: the key number of these three pages being 1, 4 and 32: together -making 37, and thirty-seven less twenty-six being eleven, he knows that -the card must be the eleventh of the third suit, otherwise the knave of -spades. If he is told that the card is on the third, fifth and sixth -pages, the key numbers of which are 4, 16 and 32, total 52, it is clear -that the card must be the last in the list, viz., the king of diamonds. - - * * * * * - -So much for the working of the trick. But the reader, if of an enquiring -mind, will naturally ask, “How is this result obtained?” The answer -rests upon a special property of the geometrical progression which forms -the six key numbers. It is a curious fact that by the use of these six -numbers, either singly or in combination with others of the series, any -number, from unity up to 63, can be expressed. Thus, the numbers, 1, 2, -4, 8, 16 and 32 we already have, these being numbers of the series. As to -other numbers: - - 1 + 2 = 3 - 4 + 1 = 5 - 4 + 2 = 6 - 4 + 2 + 1 = 7 - 8 + 1 = 9 - 8 + 2 = 10 - 8 + 2 + 1 = 11 - 8 + 4 = 12 - 8 + 4 + 1 = 13 - -and so on throughout up to 52, which being the limit of the pack, is the -highest number with which we need concern ourselves. - -In making up the pages of the pocket-book, advantage has been taken of -this principle. A given card is inserted on that page or pages (and those -only) whose key numbers, alone or added together, correspond with the -position which the card holds in the list. Thus the ace of clubs will -appear on the first page (not because it is the first card, but because -the key number of that page is 1) and on no other. The deuce of clubs, -in like manner, on page 2, the key number of that card being two. The -next card, the three of clubs, must appear on page 1 and page 2, their -key numbers together amounting to 3. The process as to cards standing -at higher numbers is the same. Thus, the ace of spades, being the -twenty-seventh card, and twenty-seven being the aggregate of 16, 8, 2 and -1, will appear on the first, second, fourth and fifth pages. Conversely, -if the performer is told that the card appears on the four pages last -named, he knows that it is the twenty-seventh card, _i.e._, the ace of -spades. Any spaces remaining vacant on the page after the whole pack has -been dealt with, are filled up by duplicates of cards already figuring -_on the same page_, their appearing under these conditions making no -difference to the calculation. - -I am indebted to an ingenious amateur, Mr. Victor Farrelly, for the -idea of a novel method of using the pocket-book. Mr. Farrelly does not -offer of his own accord to show what can be done with it, but keeps it -in reserve, for use in a special emergency. Every conjurer meets now and -then with the pig-headed person who absolutely declines to have a given -card forced upon him, and persists in endeavouring to extract one from -some other part of the pack. Armed with the pocket-book, the performer -can set such a person at defiance, and indeed get additional _kudos_ from -his objectionable behaviour. - -He cheerfully gives up the struggle, saying “You seem to think, sir, -that I wish to influence your choice in some way. To prove the contrary, -I give the pack into your own hands. Shuffle it well. Thank you. Now -take from it any card you please. Look at it, and put it in your pocket. -You are satisfied, I presume, that I do not know that card? You are -quite right. I have not the smallest idea of it, but I shall discover -it without the smallest difficulty by a process of mathematical magic. -I have here” (producing pocket-book) “a little book of six pages, on -each of which thirty-six cards are illustrated. Will you kindly see -whether the card you chose is represented among those on the first page? -Meanwhile I will divide the pack, which please remember I have not -touched since you shuffled it yourself, into six portions, one for each -page of the book.” This is done, the six packets being turned face down -on the table. - -We will suppose that the chosen card is not found on the first page. -“Then,” says the performer, “this first packet will tell me nothing, and -may be disregarded. Now, for the second page, is your card upon that? It -is? Then I draw two cards from the second heap, and turn up one of them. -And now for the third page. Do you find your card there? You do? Then I -take up three cards from the third packet, and again turn up the last -one.” - -We will suppose that the chosen card is not found in either the fourth -or the fifth page, but re-appears on the sixth, whereupon six cards are -counted off from the corresponding packet, and the last of them turned -up. The performer has by this time mentally added up the key numbers of -the second, third and sixth pages: viz., 2, 4 and 32, together making 38, -and knows therefrom that the card is the thirty-eighth in the list, viz., -the queen of spades. He does not however at once display his knowledge, -but pretends to make a mental calculation from the cards exposed upon the -table, giving, if he so pleases, and the cards lend themselves to it, -some fanciful explanation of his method. It seems to me, however, that -this last is a needless elaboration. Personally, I should prefer merely -to call attention by name to the cards exposed, and say, “When these -three cards appear in conjunction, it is clear that the card drawn was -the queen of spades” (or whatever it may happen to be). Any one deluded, -as the majority will probably be, into believing that you really infer -the name of the drawn card from those on the table, will be farther from -the real solution than ever. - - - - -CONCERNING PATTER - - -It will doubtless have been observed that I have in the foregoing pages -been somewhat lavish in respect of patter. I have done so for two or -three reasons. - -First, in order to enable the reader to form a better estimate of the -effect of the trick presented, duly clothed and coloured, to the mind -of the spectator. A trick described, however minutely, from the mere -mechanical or technical point of view, gives scarcely more idea of its -actual effect than the rough charcoal sketch of the artist does of the -finished painting. Secondly, because ready-made patter, if the reader -cares to use it, will save him a considerable amount of trouble. My third -reason is more personal, namely, that it has been a labour of love to do -so. To my mind the devising of some little bit of appropriate fiction -to serve as introduction to a trick is the pleasantest part of the -inventor’s work. - -It may perhaps be thought that I have, in some of the more ambitious -tricks, been overliberal in this particular. I remember thinking, -after witnessing a “show” by Dr. Lynn, a popular performer of the last -generation, that he had talked a great deal, and done very little, and -that I had had very little real magic for my money. On the other hand, -the loquacious doctor was always amusing, and it must not be forgotten -that to amuse, even more than to puzzle, is the _raison d’être_ of the -modern magician. It seems to me therefore quite legitimate to use, to a -reasonable extent, the art of the _raconteur_ to supplement that of the -magician. - -If my own patter is in some cases found superabundant, I have at any rate -done my best to make it amusing, and if the reader opines that I have -not paid sufficient regard to the late Mr. Ducrow’s celebrated maxim, -“Cut the cackle, and come to the ’osses,” he is quite at liberty to cut -my cackle to what he may consider more reasonable proportions. No doubt, -time would be saved thereby. If, for instance, he were to cut out the -little romantic fictions with which I have introduced “The Miracle of -Mumbo Jumbo” and “The Story of the Alkahest,” and start “right away” with -the bare performance of the trick, both could be exhibited in little more -time than I have allotted to either alone. Which treatment is likely to -give the greater satisfaction to his audience, he must decide for himself. - -Where the performer has the gift (for a “gift” it undoubtedly is) of -devising effective patter for himself I am strongly in favour of his -doing so. Borrowed patter may be likened to a borrowed dress-coat. It is -never likely to be an exact fit, and a “giant’s robe upon a dwarfish -thief,” or the reverse, cannot be expected to be a becoming garment. -Every man has, or should have, a style of his own, and it is rarely -good policy to imitate that of somebody else. If a low comedy man were -to essay to play Hamlet, or a tragedian, however eminent, were to try -to give an imitation of Harry Lauder, the result would be likely to be -disappointing. - -The reader, undertaking to write his own patter, and desirous of making -it just what patter should be, will find counsels of perfection in “Our -Magic,” and the more nearly he can approach them the better. As, however, -all have not the good fortune to possess that admirable work, I venture -to indicate what to my own mind seem to be the chief points to be aimed -at. - -It is almost a commonplace to say that the main object of patter is -misdirection. As the term is more usually applied, this means something -said or done midway in the course of a trick to draw away the attention -of the audience at some critical moment, and to create what the French -conjurers call a “_temps_” _i.e._, an “opportunity” for doing, unnoticed, -some necessary act. But misdirection may very well start at an earlier -stage than this: in fact, well in advance of the actual execution of the -trick. Each trick should have some sort of introduction, and the patter -serving this purpose should be such as to lead the mind of the hearer -away from the true explanation of the marvel, and to suggest, in a more -or less plausible way, some other, remote from the real one. - -The suggested explanation may be either pseudo-scientific, where possible -based on some generally accepted truth (and it is surprising what a -long way even a few grains of truth go in such cases); or it may be -downright “spoof,” delivered however with due appearance of seriousness. -The explanations will naturally fall a good deal short of the George -Washington standard of truthfulness, but the most tender conscience need -not in such a case have any scruples on the score of veracity. No sane -person expects truth in a fairy tale, and a magical entertainment, from -beginning to end, is but a fairy tale in action. To put the matter in an -epigrammatic nutshell: - - Truth is “a gem of purest ray serene,” - A virtue always to be cultivated, - But such depends,--you’ll gather what I mean,-- - On how you happen to be situated. - At home, abroad, wherever I may be, - I tell the honest truth, and shame the d----. - But when you ask to be deceived. Good gracious! - You can’t expect me then to be veracious. - In that case only do I make exception, - And most deceive when vowing “no deception.” - -This function of patter, the leading away the minds of the audience -from the true explanation of the puzzle offered them, may be materially -assisted by the introduction, among the “properties” used, of some -object professedly essential to the trick, but as a matter of fact having -no real concern with the effect produced. The audience take for granted -that it must have something to do with the effect, or it would not be -used, and are thereby led away the more effectually from the actual -explanation. Numerous illustrations of the use of this device will be -found in the foregoing pages. - -If, in the case of a given trick, the performer is absolutely at a -loss to produce a satisfactory fable to introduce it, he may evade the -difficulty by stating that he is about to produce an effect for which he -cannot himself account, and inviting the assistance of his audience in -doing so. - -The second function of patter is the calling of the attention of the -audience to matters which you desire them to take note of, and to give -opportunity to do so. There is small credit to be gained by changing -the ace of clubs into the ace of hearts, or making a given article pass -invisibly from one spot to another, unless the spectators have been first -made to realise the original state of things, and they must be allowed -_sufficient time_ to do so. I have more than once seen an otherwise -brilliant show spoilt by being rushed through at railroad speed. The mind -of the spectator had not been allowed time to receive clear impressions. -The company in such a case disperses with a consciousness of having had a -rapid succession of surprises, but with only a cloudy recollection as to -what they were. - -In devising, as is sometimes desirable, new patter for an old trick, -an endeavour should be made to look at the effect from an entirely -fresh point of view, so as to make the trick practically a new one. A -remarkable instance of such a transformation is furnished by an incident -in the life of Robert-Houdin. At one period of his career he was -entrusted by the French Government with a very important mission. He was -sent to Algeria, specially charged to “astonish the natives,” and by his -greater wonders to destroy their belief in the pretended miracles of the -Aissoua. - -Among other surprises, he decided to make use of his “Light and Heavy -Chest,” a chest which, as the reader is doubtless aware, became at -command, by means of an electro-magnet in the pedestal on which it -rested, so “heavy” that the strongest man could not lift it from its -base. This trick, produced at a time when the phenomena of electricity -were but little understood, has produced an immense sensation at his -Paris performances. But the Master instinctively felt that the trick in -that shape would produce little or no effect on the more primitive mind -of the Arab. He would simply have taken for granted some mechanical means -of holding down the chest, beyond his own comprehension, no doubt, but by -no means to be regarded as miraculous. Robert-Houdin decided to change -the mode of presentation altogether, and to make the illusion no longer -objective, but subjective. He announced that by means of his magic power -he could take away the strength of the strongest man, and render him weak -as a little child. The “chest” was in this case merely brought forward -in a casual way, as a convenient object wherewith the assertion of the -magician could be tested. The strongest man in the company was invited to -come forward, and try whether he could lift that little box. Of course he -could, and did; a child could have done the same. “You lifted it because -I permitted you to do so,” said the magician. “But I take away your -strength. Try to lift it now!” - -Again the athlete tries his strength, but now he fails. With teeth set, -and every muscle tense, he strains, and strains, but in vain, and he has -to confess that the infidel wonder-worker has, for the time, taken away -all his strength. Here was a wizard indeed! - -In arranging your patter, be humorous if you can, but if, like the -gentleman we have all heard of, you “joke with difficulty,” don’t force -yourself to be funny. That it is possible for a man lacking humour still -to be a great conjurer is proved by the case of Hartz, who was notably -deficient in this particular, but by his excellence in other directions -won a place in the very first rank of his profession. But if you cannot -be humorous, at any rate be cheerful. Geniality of manner is one of the -most valuable assets of the conjurer. Above all, don’t be nervous. You -may say “I can’t help it,” but to a great extent you can. It is largely a -matter of _will_. Start with the idea that all will go well, and it will -probably do so. On the other hand, a low-spirited conjurer always makes a -low-spirited audience. - -In any case, be sparing of puns, which have been deservedly described as -the lowest form of wit. A single pun, if good enough (or bad enough) may -win a laugh, and score to your credit, but to pepper an audience with -verbal shrapnel in the shape of puns is an outrage on good taste. - -Passing to the third function of patter, the misdirection of attention in -the course of a trick, we will assume that you have made a start in the -right direction at the outset, by suggesting some fanciful explanation -of the effect you intend to produce, so that your audience, starting -from wrong premises, do not know the points at which their too close -observation would be inconvenient. The best way of diverting their -attention at one of these critical points is obviously to attract it -to some other direction. A mere sentence, particularly if accompanied -by appropriate action, will suffice. Supposing, to take an elementary -instance, that the performer desires to drop unseen into the profonde -from his left hand some small article for which he has just deftly -substituted a duplicate, now exhibited in the right hand, he has only to -say, “Now I want you particularly to keep an eye on this”--whatever the -article in the right hand may happen to be. All eyes are for the moment, -instinctively drawn to the object in question, and in that moment the -deed is done. The artifice is ridiculously simple, but it is effective, -and it is on being fully prepared with the right thing to say and do at -the critical moment that the success of a magical entertainment largely -depends. Careful rehearsal, preferably before an expert friend, will -furnish the best hints as to the danger-spots in the working of a trick, -and how best to devise patter to meet them. - -A final word of advice--advice that has been often given, but cannot be -too often repeated if you really aim to carry your audience with you. -Never lose sight of the fact that you are, in the words of Robert-Houdin, -“an actor playing the part of a magician,” and take your office -seriously. In particular, never before an audience use the word “trick,” -which at once gives away all your pretension to magical power. An actor -never tells his audience that he is an actor or that he is playing a -part. He does not call their attention to his make-up, however excellent, -or tell them that his wig comes from Clarkson. On the contrary, he does -his best to make his audience for the time forget that he is Hubert -de Barnstormer, or whatever his stage name may be, and to keep up the -illusion that he is actually the person whom he represents. The modern -magician should do the same. If he has enough of the true artistic -spirit to imagine, when he steps forward on the platform, that he _is_ -a magician, and that his miracles are genuine, he will go a long way -towards producing a like impression in the minds of his audience. Bearing -this in mind, describe what you propose to do as an “effect,” a “marvel,” -an “experiment,” or a “phenomenon”; never by any chance as a “trick.” - -It may be objected that I have myself repeatedly used the obnoxious -word in the course of the foregoing pages, but that is another matter. -This book is written by a conjurer for conjurers: and as between -ourselves we are forced to admit, painful though it be to do so, that -our greatest miracles are only tricks. But we need not tell the public -so. Logically-minded, persons know it well enough, if they are allowed -to think about the matter. Our business is to make them, for the time, -forget it. A wise old Roman said: _Populus vult decipi: decipiatur_. Your -audience wish to be deceived; in fact they have come together for that -purpose. By all means let them be deceived to the top of their bent; and -the first step towards effectually deceiving them, is to persuade them, -if possible, that there is “no deception.” - -The patter for a given trick, once composed, and tested by a few -performances in public, may thenceforth, so far as the professional is -concerned, be left to take care of itself. It should automatically -improve with each of its earlier repetitions as good wine improves -in bottle. Faults will correct themselves, and being made perfect by -practice, the performer will thenceforth be able to “speak his piece” -without effort, and devote his whole energies to the actual working of -the trick. - -To the amateur, only performing on special occasions, with perhaps -considerable intervals between them, I commend a plan from which I myself -derived great benefit, viz.: Write out from memory the patter for each -trick on the programme a day or two before a coming performance. After -you have given your show, go through your manuscript again carefully, -noting and correcting it in any point in which the patter failed to be -exactly right. The interpolation of a single sentence, the transposition -in point of sequence of two movements, or the alteration of some trifling -detail, such as standing at a different angle to your table at a given -moment, may make all the difference between partial failure and complete -success. - - - - -THE USE OF THE WAND - - -Closely connected with the subject of patter is the use of the wand, -which in my own opinion cannot be too sedulously cultivated. To the cases -in which the wand itself forms the prominent item of the trick, I devoted -a special chapter in “Later Magic.” To these therefore I need not further -refer. More important, however, is the part played by the wand from the -point of view of general utility. - -In the first place, it is the only remnant of the traditional outfit -of the magician. Time was, when the regulation costume of the wizard -was a sugarloaf hat, and a robe embroidered with highly coloured mystic -symbols. Such a robe is still worn as part of their make-up, by Chung -Ling Soo and a few other Orientals, but the orthodox costume of the -latter-day wizard is ordinary evening dress. The wand alone remains; the -symbol and the professed instrument of his mystic powers, and from its -traditional connection with magic, there is a special prestige attached -to it. - -For these reasons alone it would be desirable to retain the use of the -wand, but apart from them, its practical uses are many and various. -One of the first difficulties of the novice, as he comes forward to -introduce himself to his audience, is to know what to do with his hands. -He can hardly advance with hand on heart, within his vest, _à la_ -Pecksniff. Held open, with arms hanging down by the sides, the hands look -too stiff, and to advance with them in his pockets would hardly be good -form. By coming forward wand in hand, he avoids these difficulties. The -hand holding it automatically assumes an easy and natural position, and -he ceases to think about the other. With the wand held in the right hand -across the body, its free end resting on the palm of the opposite hand, -he is in an ideal attitude for delivering his introductory patter. Later -on, by holding the wand in the hand, he effectually disguises the fact -that he has some object, a card, a coin, or a watch concealed therein. -If he has occasion to call attention directly to any object, the wand -forms the most natural pointer. If he finds it necessary, for some reason -connected with the trick in hand, to make a turn or half-turn away from -the spectators, the fact that he has left his wand upon the table affords -him the needful opportunity. - -Lastly, if the wand is habitually used as the professed instrument of -a desired transposition or transformation, a certain portion of an -average audience gradually becomes impressed with the idea that there -really must be some occult connection between the touch of the wand -and the effect produced. There is much virtue in what may be called a -magical atmosphere, and after the wizard has proved his magical power -by performing two or three apparent impossibilities, the mind of the -spectator (though in his calmer moments, he knows, or should know, -better), is led to adopt in a greater or less degree the solution -“forced” upon him by the conjurer. Habitual use of the wand, with -apparent seriousness, goes far to create the desired atmosphere. - -A good effect may be produced by “electrifying” the wand now and then, -by rubbing it with a handkerchief. The main uses of electricity are so -widely known, and so little understood by the million, that they are -quite ready to give it credit for still more marvellous possibilities. - -My friend Mr. Holt Schooling, mentioned in connection with _The Secret -of the Pyramids_, finds an additional use for the wand. He uses, not one -only, but half a dozen, of different appearance, each credited with some -special magical virtue. At the outset of his show these are arranged -horizontally, one above another on pins projecting from a small sloping -blackboard. For each fresh trick the wand professedly appropriate to it -is brought into action, the one last used being at the same time replaced -on the stand. The spectators do not suspect that behind each top corner -of the board is a small servante, enabling the performer, under cover of -the change of wands, to change a pack of cards, or to effect some other -substitution necessary for the purpose of his next item. - -_Verbum sap_, by all means cultivate the use of the wand, and for the -sake of effect, let it be of an elegant and distinctive character. An -office-ruler or a piece of cane would serve many of its mechanical -purposes, but would lack the prestige attached to what is, professedly, -the genuine article. - -One of the most striking proofs of the extensive use and appreciation of -the wand by modern magicians is furnished by the remarkable collection of -such implements got together by Dr. Saram R. Ellison, of New York. - -Dr. Ellison[20] is an eminent and popular physician, whose ruling passion -is wanting to know things, particularly things that other people don’t -know. Such being his temperament, it goes almost without saying that at -an early period of his career he became a Freemason. Having been duly -initiated into the mysteries of the ordinary lodge, and learnt all it -had to teach him, he still yearned for “more light,” and accordingly -worked his way up step by step through intervening degrees in masonry -till he reached what is known as the thirty-third degree, an order even -more exclusive than that of the Garter, and claiming to possess secrets -as to which the ordinary “blue” mason, even though he be a Past Grand -Everything, knows no more than the veriest outsider. - -When in this direction there were no more mysteries left for him to -conquer, Dr. Ellison naturally turned his attention to Magic: and in -accordance with his habitual determination to know all that there is -to be known with regard to his hobby for the time being he began to -collect books upon the subject. At first there were but few to collect, -but the literature of magic has grown, and grown, and side by side with -its advance Dr. Ellison’s collection has grown larger and larger till -it numbers some hundreds of volumes. Harry Kellar, the dean of American -magicians, and himself an enthusiastic collector, yearned to possess it, -and offered the doctor for it the handsome sum of two thousand dollars, -equivalent in English money to about four hundred pounds. But Dr. Ellison -was not to be tempted. In order that the collection should be preserved -intact, he donated it, some years ago, to the New York Public Library, -also providing a fund for its upkeep and further development. - -But Dr. Ellison’s interest in, and services to Magic did not end here. -He has made a collection of models, entirely the work of his own hands, -of the appliances for over sixty stage illusions. Some are of full size, -others quite miniature affairs, but one and all exact to scale. Further, -the doctor has a special affection for souvenirs of famous magicians, -past and present, especially in the shape of wands, as being the most -characteristic possession of the wizard. Accordingly, some years ago, -he began to collect wands, and he now possesses more than eighty such, -each a wand which has been habitually yielded by some more or less -famous magician. By the courtesy of Dr. Ellison I am enabled to furnish -particulars of some of them; as given in a very interesting pamphlet by -Epes W. Sargent, a well-known American writer. - -The catalogue commences with a wand formerly belonging to Professor -Anderson, the once famous “Wizard of the North.” Here are found also the -wands used by the two Herrmanns (Carl and Alexander), Buatier de Kolta, -Lafayette, Martin Chapender, Carl Willmann and others who tread the stage -no more. As regards the living, there is here a memento of nearly every -English-speaking conjurer of note: besides many others of cosmopolitan -celebrity. - -The wand here exhibited is not always the conventional ebony and -ivory affair, some of the specimens being indeed of a highly original -character. For instance, the wand contributed by a Hindu magician -consists of the leg bone of a sacred monkey from the temple of Hanuman, -the monkey god, at Benares. The wands of Madame Adelaide Herrmann and -Chung Ling Soo take the shape of fans. Horace Goldin’s is a cut-down -whip-handle, and those of Clement de Lion and Imro Fox are portions of -one-while walking-sticks, promoted to a nobler use. Mr. J. N. Maskelyne’s -“wand” is an ordinary file, which, from the inventor point of view, he -regards as the greatest of wonder-working appliances. - -My own contribution may claim to be of exceptional interest, not merely -as being in itself a curio, but as a memento of a very remarkable -man, so remarkable, indeed, that a brief notice of his career may be -interesting. It was presented to me by Professor Palmer, a gentleman who -was not, like myself, a bogus professor, but the real thing, and withal -an exceptionally eminent man. Skill in sleight-of-hand was the least of -his accomplishments. He had a marvellous gift of tongue, there being -scarcely a European or Oriental language with which he was not thoroughly -familiar. He was born at Cambridge in 1840, and from his earliest years -showed indications of his peculiar gift for acquiring languages. As -a school-boy he made friends among the gipsies, and learned to speak -their queer language so perfectly as to deceive even those to whom it -was their native tongue. In later life it was a favourite joke of his -to saunter, in company with his equally accomplished friend, Leland, -into some gipsy encampment where they were not known, and after paying -their footing by having their fortunes told, to ask some of the nomads -gathered round the fire, to talk a little Rommany for their benefit. -Gipsies are chary of speaking Rommany except among their own people, and -the inquisitive strangers were frequently told that there was no such -language; whereupon, one of them would turn to the other, and in purest -Rommany quietly express an opinion that their temporary hosts were not -thorough-bred gipsies, but of some inferior stock. This produced Rommany -in plenty, and the visitors were energetically taken to task for that, -being themselves gipsies, they should ape the dress and manners of the -Gorgio. A friendly explanation made all end happily. - -Palmer made his first start in life as a clerk in the City of London, -where in his spare time he made himself master of French and Italian. -A little later he took up the study of Persian, Arabic and Hindustani, -and speedily conquered them. In 1867, after taking his degree at the -University of Cambridge, he was elected a Fellow by his College, an -honour conferred on him in recognition of his mastery of the Oriental -languages. During the years 1868-1870 he was employed on behalf of the -Palestine Exploration Fund, to make a survey of Mount Sinai, in the -course of which he became upon friendly and indeed almost brotherly -terms with many of the wild Arab tribes, among whom he was known as -the Sheikh Abdullah. As in England he had been made free of the gipsy -tent, so in Palestine he could drop in upon many a Bedouin encampment, -and be sure of a hearty welcome. His skill in sleight-of-hand, which -he had in the first instance taken up merely as a pastime, proved to be -of immense service to him in his desert wanderings; adding not only to -his popularity but frequently gaining for him the prestige of a genuine -magician, and thereby increasing his influence. - -In 1871 he was appointed to the professorship of Oriental languages -at Cambridge, his official title being the Lord High Almoner’s Reader -of Arabic. In 1882, in anticipation of the Arabi trouble in Egypt, he -was entrusted by the then Government with the difficult and dangerous -task of winning over the Sinaitic tribes, and preventing the threatened -destruction of the Suez Canal. - -His first trip, extending from Gaza to Suez, was carried out -successfully, but on penetrating farther into the desert, he and his -two companions, Captain Gill, R.E., and Lieutenant Charrington, R.N., -fell into the hands of a tribe to whom Palmer was unknown, and were -barbarously put to death. Happily, their bodies were recovered, and -received from the nation the posthumous honour of burial in St. Paul’s -Cathedral. - -The wand presented to me by Professor Palmer is a curiosity in many ways. -It is made of acacia wood (the “shittim” wood of the Old Testament) -brought by Palmer himself from Mount Lebanon. Around it, in spiral -form, is inscribed an invocation from the Koran, in Arabic characters. -The writing of the inscription is a genuine work of art, having -been executed as a special favour to Palmer, by Hassoun, an eminent -professional “scribe.” - -I am reluctantly bound to admit that the Palmer wand, in my hands, did -not exhibit any special magical virtues, and when I ceased myself to use -it, it seemed to me that it could not find a worthier home than in Dr. -Ellison’s fine collection. - - * * * * * - -Reverting for a moment to the subject of patter, I will conclude by -quoting, for the amusement rather than the instruction of the reader, -an oration which (with variations) now and then formed my introductory -_boniment_, and might on occasion still serve, in default of better. - -“Ladies and Gentlemen, and members of the Royal Family, if any happen to -be present, I am about to exhibit for your amusement, a few experiments -in Unnatural Philosophy, otherwise Magic. - -“Magic in the olden times was a very different thing, as I daresay you -know, from what it is at present. In those days every respectable wizard -kept a familiar spirit: a sort of magical man of all work. He cleaned the -boots and knives, and when his master gave a show, it was the familiar -who worked all his miracles for him. The magician only did the talking, -and pocketed the takings. But the familiar did much bigger things than -that. If his master’s next-door neighbour made himself disagreeable, the -familiar would hoist him up and drop him in the water-butt, or into -the Red Sea, according to order. If the magician wanted a week at the -seaside, he had no need to pay railway fare. The familiar would just pick -him up, house and all, and land him gently in the middle of the mixed -bathing. The only drawback was that, sooner or later, a time came when -there was no performance, because the magician had been carried off by -his familiar on a pitchfork. - -“As the French say, _nous avons changé tout cela_. Familiars are as -extinct as the dodo. Perhaps it’s as well, but it makes it very much -harder to be a magician. In the first place you must know all about -astrology, anthropology, Egyptology and all the other ologies. You must -be well posted in mathematics, hydrostatics, pneumatics and numismatics. -You must know all about clairvoyance, palmistry and thought reading, -sympathy and antipathy, magnetism, mesmerism, wireless telegraphy, X rays -and all the other kinds of rays. Of course you must be well up in Greek -and Latin, and a little Hebrew, not to mention a few other things which -I forget for the moment, but I won’t stop to think of them now. When you -have studied these little matters fourteen hours a day for nine or ten -years, you will be as ‘chock-full of science’ as old Sol Gills himself, -and you will be able to do all sorts of wonderful things, some of which I -hope to show you this evening. - -“Before I begin, there is just one little matter I should like to -mention. You hear people talk about the quickness of the hand deceiving -the eye. I don’t know whether the quickness of the hand ever does deceive -the eye, but I want you to understand that you must not expect anything -of that sort from _me_. I am naturally slow. I was born twenty minutes -after I was expected, and I have been getting slower and slower ever -since. - -“To-night, I intend to do everything even more slowly than usual: so that -you will only have to watch me closely to see exactly how it is all done. -Then, when you go home, if you do as I do, and say as I say, without -making any mistakes, no doubt you will be able to produce the same -results. If not, there must be ‘something wrong with the works.’” - -[20] Since this was written Dr. Ellison has passed into the mysterious -beyond. - - - - -A FEW WRINKLES[21] - - -Every conjurer who has in him, as all conjurers should have, the creative -instinct of the artist, and aims therefore at putting something of -himself into his work, must of necessity be to some small extent an -amateur mechanic. The hints which follow are addressed to the reader in -that capacity. I have no pretension to teach him how to do things in the -way of construction, but merely to make the doing of them easier. Though -relating to matters in themselves small, the “tips” which follow may -safely be said to come within the scope of Captain Cuttle’s celebrated -counsel, “when found make a note of.” It often happens that the amateur -mechanic has to take considerable trouble and pains in procuring some -special requirement, while there is already on sale, at small cost, just -the thing he wants, if he only knew what to ask for, and where to get -it. The paragraphs which follow will, in some at any rate of such cases, -supply the needful information. - -1. For woodwork on a small scale, an old cigar box will often be found -suitable material. Where such a box is not available or not suitable for -the particular work in hand, what is called “three-ply” may supply the -need. This consists of three layers of thin wood glued together under -pressure, with the grain of the intermediate layer running crossway -to that of the other two, the tendency to warp being thereby greatly -reduced. Drawing-boards are, for this reason, now usually made of wood -so combined, and a drawing-board makes for many purposes a good enough -_extempore_ work-bench. For a finer class of work, the amateur mechanic, -if he is willing to take the trouble, may make his own three-ply. For -this purpose he should procure a supply of what is called “knife-cut” -veneer, _i.e._, thin sheets of walnut, mahogany, satin,--or other -hard wood, and glue them together with the white glue to be presently -described. Veneer merchants form a distinct trade, and are comparatively -few in number, but the resident in London can obtain veneer and thin -woods of all descriptions from Messrs. McEwan & Son, 282 Old Street, -E. C. In country districts the shops which hold agencies for “Hobbies” -materials also sell planed-up woods of various kinds, ranging like veneer -from one-sixteenth to half an inch in thickness. - -2. As a handy substitute for glue, most people are acquainted with the -virtues of Seccotine, in its way a most useful preparation. But there -are many purposes for which Seccotine is too aggressively viscous, while -ordinary paste is not adhesive enough. In such cases I can strongly -recommend _Pastoid_, a composition midway between glue and paste. For all -purposes for which paste (in small quantity) is ordinarily used, Pastoid -may be substituted with advantage. I myself came across it accidentally -two or three years ago, “since when,” like the gentleman in the soap -advertisement, “I have used no other.” The maker is Henry Roberts, -Middlesborough, but it should be obtainable of any up-to-date stationer -or fancy dealer. It is supplied in glass jars, at sixpence and a shilling. - -3. Where an actual glue, of fine quality, is needed, procure sheet -gelatine, to be had of any grocer. Cut into small pieces and melt in -an ordinary gluepot using water enough to make the resulting solution -about as thick as ordinary gum water. It should be used as near boiling -point as possible, and the joined surfaces left to dry under the -heaviest pressure available. A joint made with this glue is practically -invisible.[22] - -4. For dividing up thin stuff (wood or cardboard), into rectangular -slabs, the handiest tool is the “cutting gauge.” This is practically -identical with the better known “marking gauge,” save that the “marker” -is replaced by a little spade-pointed cutter. This tool is only available -for cutting wood up to say eight inches in width, but to the amateur -attempting small work only, it will be found invaluable. - -5. For staining wood or cardboard a deep dead black I have found nothing -better than the “Record Jet Stain,” manufactured by the Record Polish -Company, Eccles, Manchester. It is normally designed for staining leather -only, the makers not having apparently realised its usefulness in other -directions. It is to be had of any dealer in leather goods, in twopenny -and sixpenny bottles. In many cases I have found it best to rub it in -with a pad, rather than to apply it with a brush, but this will of course -depend largely on the nature of the article to be treated. - -6. An excellent polish for use after staining, or for other purposes, -is made by dissolving _white_ wax in turpentine, to the consistency -of cream. Applied sparingly, with plenty of friction to follow, this -produces a clean hard gloss, free from the stickiness which is sometimes -left after the use of other polishes. - -7. For enamelling small articles use Maurice’s Porceleine (the makers of -which are Walter Carson & Sons, Grove Works, Battersea, S. W.) procurable -at “oil and colour” men in tins from three-halfpence upwards. - -8. For any article to be made of flat card or mill-board, without -folding or bending, preference should be given to “Bristol” board, sold -by artists’ colour-men. This is somewhat more expensive but is stiffer -and harder and has a better surface than the commoner articles. - -9. For joining wood to wood without glue where there is no great -thickness to be penetrated, “needle-points,” procurable of any -ironmonger, will be found useful. These are stout eyeless needles, of -very brittle steel, about two inches in length. To use them, bore with -a fine bradawl a hole partially through the wood, then drive in the -needle-point by gentle tapping with a hammer, and when it has penetrated -the desired depth snap off all that remains above the surface. - -10. Also useful for many purposes are what are called by drapers -“blanket” pins. These are of brass, and a card of such pins in -three sizes, ranging from two to three inches in length and varying -proportionately in thickness, may be bought for a penny. Pins a trifle -shorter and thinner than the above are known as “laundry” pins. Apart -from their normal uses, pins of these kinds are very useful for bending -into hooks, or to cut up into short lengths of stiff straight wire for -pivots or otherwise. - -11. For all effects dependent upon a thread pull use, in place of -ordinary thread, _plaited_ silk fishing line. This is procurable of -any sports’ outfitter or fishing tackle dealer, in twenty and forty -yard lengths, and in half a dozen grades of thickness, the finest being -not much thicker than a hair line. The breaking strain of this is much -greater than that of ordinary thread, and it has the further advantage -that being plaited instead of twisted it does not unroll or “kink” in -use. Allcock, of Redditch, a name familiar to all anglers, is a noted -maker of such line, but he has no monopoly of its manufacture. It is -usually sold white, but may be easily dyed any desired colour. - -For this last valuable “tip” I am again indebted to my often-quoted -friend, Mr. Holt Schooling, who, as an enthusiastic angler, is an expert -as to lines of all descriptions. The reader will find numerous instances -of the practical use of such line in the earlier part of this book. - -A good way of dyeing line is to thread a needle on to one end, and pass -it by the aid of the needle through one corner, moistened with the -appropriate dye, of a soft sponge, and then back again through the dry -part of the sponge to clean off any excess of moisture. When dry, if -necessary, repeat the process. - -12. Square envelopes, for the purpose of forming “nests” or otherwise, -are now and then needed by the conjurer, but envelopes precisely square -(save the small variety known as “pence” envelopes) are not kept in -“stock” by stationers in the ordinary way. When such are needed the -readiest plan is to take an envelope of the long “bag” shape and shorten -it to an exact square, closing the lower end as before. Envelopes of -the above kind are procurable in many varieties of paper, and in widths -ranging by various fractions of an inch from four inches upwards. - -13. To make a line, thick or thin, run freely over a pulley-wheel or -through an eyelet, use as a lubricant powdered talcum, otherwise known -as French chalk. This is equally useful for minimising friction between -wooden surfaces, or between wood and metal, say between a pulley-wheel -and the pivot on which it turns. Where the slight extra cost is not an -obstacle the use of ivory as the material of a pulley-wheel secures the -perfection of easy running. - - * * * * * - -It is, I trust, hardly necessary to say that wherever I have mentioned -an article to be had by purchase, my recommendation is based solely -upon practical experience of its merits. I have no interest, direct or -indirect, in any of the articles mentioned, and my knowledge of their -manufacturers is derived solely from their respective labels. - -[21] This book having been written primarily with a view to British -readers, some of my recommendations will naturally be of no value to my -American friends, but I have not thought it necessary to delete them. L. -H. - -[22] For the information contained in this paragraph, as also that -relating to the use of Veneers I am indebted to Mr. Holt Schooling, who -is an expert in such matters. My own essays in the direction of fancy -cabinet-making have for the most part been limited to rough models to be -reproduced in finished shape by more practised hands. - - - - -L’ENVOI - - -With these last lines I lay down my pen, as I have long since laid down -the wand. I do so with regret, for writing about magic has always been to -me a labour of love, but failing energy and failing eyesight warn me that -my day is over, and that “the night cometh, wherein no man can work.” - -When I first began to discourse of magic, I had the whole field, in a -literary sense, to myself. That state of things has long since ceased to -be. Fertile brains and ready writers have taken up my task, and magic has -now a worthy literature, growing day by day. “So mote it be!” - -Furthermore, if I may be allowed a word of advice, let me say that every -lover of magic, be he professional or amateur, should join a magical -society. No great work can be carried forward without organization, and -the success of such bodies as The Magician’s Club and the Magic Circle -here, and the Society of American Magicians over seas, has proved that -magic is no exception to the rule. - -I must not close without a word of hearty thanks to Harry Houdini, Oscar -S. Teale and John W. Sargent, of the Society of American Magicians, for -their generous offices in connection with the publication of my book. -With this last legacy to the friends, at home and abroad, who have -derived pleasure or profit from my writings, I bid them a cheery farewell. - - LOUIS HOFFMANN. - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Latest Magic, by -Professor Louis Hoffmann and Angelo Lewis - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LATEST MAGIC *** - -***** This file should be named 55279-0.txt or 55279-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/5/2/7/55279/ - -Produced by Chris Curnow and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/55279-0.zip b/old/55279-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 256aabb..0000000 --- a/old/55279-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h.zip b/old/55279-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9aa22dc..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/55279-h.htm b/old/55279-h/55279-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 009faa4..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/55279-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8246 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> - <head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> - <title> - The Project Gutenberg eBook of Latest Magic, by Professor Hoffmann (Angelo Lewis, M.A.). - </title> - - <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> - -<style type="text/css"> - -a { - text-decoration: none; -} - -body { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - -h1,h2,h3 { - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -hr { - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - clear: both; -} - -hr.tb { - width: 45%; - margin-left: 27.5%; - margin-right: 27.5%; -} - -hr.chap { - width: 65%; - margin-left: 17.5%; - margin-right: 17.5%; -} - -ul { - list-style-type: none; -} - -li { - margin-top: .5em; - padding-left: 2em; - text-indent: -2em; -} - -p { - margin-top: 0.5em; - text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: 0.5em; - text-indent: 1em; -} - -table { - margin: 1em auto 1em auto; - max-width: 40em; - border-collapse: collapse; -} - -td { - padding-left: 2.25em; - padding-right: 0.25em; - vertical-align: top; - text-indent: -2em; -} - -th { - font-weight: normal; - text-align: left; -} - -td.sub { - padding-left: 3.5em; - padding-right: 0.25em; - vertical-align: top; - text-indent: -2em; -} - -.tdb { - border-top: thin solid black; - font-weight: bold; - text-align: right; -} - -.caption { - text-align: center; - margin-bottom: 1em; - font-size: 90%; - text-indent: 0em; -} - -.center { - text-align: center; - text-indent: 0em; -} - -.ditto1em { - margin-left: 1em; - margin-right: 1em; -} - -.ditto2em { - margin-left: 2em; - margin-right: 2em; -} - -.figcenter { - margin: auto; - text-align: center; -} - -.footnotes { - margin-top: 1em; - border: dashed 1px; -} - -.footnote { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; - font-size: 0.9em; -} - -.footnote .label { - position: absolute; - right: 84%; - text-align: right; -} - -.fnanchor { - vertical-align: super; - font-size: .8em; - text-decoration: none; -} - -.noindent { - text-indent: 0em; -} - -.larger { - font-size: 150%; -} - -.pagenum { - position: absolute; - right: 4%; - font-size: smaller; - text-align: right; - font-style: normal; -} - -.poetry-container { - text-align: center; - margin: 1em; -} - -.poetry { - display: inline-block; - text-align: left; -} - -.poetry .stanza { - margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em; -} - -.poetry .verse { - text-indent: -3em; - padding-left: 3em; -} - -.poetry .indent1 { - text-indent: -2em; -} - -.poetry .indent2 { - text-indent: -1em; -} - -.right { - text-align: right; -} - -.smaller { - font-size: 80%; -} - -.smcap { - font-variant: small-caps; - font-style: normal; -} - -.spacer { - margin-left: 5em; - margin-right: 5em; -} - -.tdr { - text-align: right; -} - -.titlepage { - text-align: center; - margin-top: 3em; - text-indent: 0em; -} - -@media handheld { - -img { - max-width: 100%; - width: auto; - height: auto; -} - -.poetry { - display: block; - margin-left: 1.5em; -} -} - </style> - </head> -<body> - - -<pre> - -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Latest Magic, by -Professor Louis Hoffmann and Angelo Lewis - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: Latest Magic - Being original conjuring tricks - -Author: Professor Louis Hoffmann - Angelo Lewis - -Release Date: August 6, 2017 [EBook #55279] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LATEST MAGIC *** - - - - -Produced by Chris Curnow and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - - - - - - -</pre> - - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_i" id="Page_i">[i]</a></span></p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 430px;" id="FRONTISPIECE"> -<img src="images/frontispiece.jpg" width="430" height="700" alt="" /> -<p class="caption">Angelo Lewis</p> -<p class="caption">“Professor Hoffmann”</p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_ii" id="Page_ii">[ii]</a></span></p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_iii" id="Page_iii">[iii]</a></span></p> - -<p class="titlepage larger">LATEST MAGIC</p> - -<p class="titlepage"><span class="smaller">BEING</span><br /> -ORIGINAL CONJURING TRICKS</p> - -<p class="titlepage">INVENTED AND ARRANGED<br /> -<span class="smaller">BY</span><br /> -<span class="larger">PROFESSOR HOFFMANN</span><br /> -<span class="smaller">(ANGELO LEWIS, M.A.)</span></p> - -<p class="center smaller">Author of “Modern Magic,” etc.</p> - -<p class="titlepage"><i>WITH NUMEROUS ILLUSTRATIONS</i></p> - -<p class="titlepage"><span class="smcap">First Edition</span></p> - -<p class="titlepage">NEW YORK<br /> -SPON & CHAMBERLAIN, 120 <span class="smcap">Liberty St.</span><br /> -1918</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_iv" id="Page_iv">[iv]</a></span></p> - -<p class="titlepage">Copyright, 1918<br /> -<span class="smcap">By SPON & CHAMBERLAIN</span></p> - -<p class="titlepage smaller">CAMELOT PRESS, 226-228 WILLIAM ST., NEW YORK, U. S. A.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_v" id="Page_v">[v]</a></span></p> - -<p class="center">TO<br /> -<span class="larger">J. N. MASKELYNE, ESQ.</span><br /> -FOREMOST OF ENGLISH MAGICIANS,<br /> -AND<br /> -<span class="smcap">Fearless Exposer of Falsehood and Fraud<br /> -This Book is Dedicated</span><br /> -BY<br /> -<span class="smcap">His Friend and Admirer</span>,<br /> -<span class="larger">THE AUTHOR</span></p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_vi" id="Page_vi">[vi]</a></span></p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_vii" id="Page_vii">[vii]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="PREFACE">PREFACE</h2> - -<p>The tricks described in the following pages are -of my own invention, and for the most part are entirely -new departures: not only the effects produced, -but the appliances by means of which they -are produced, being original.</p> - -<p>From the nature of the case, it follows that few -of the items described have been submitted to the -supreme test of performance in public, but all have -been thoroughly thought out; most of the root-ideas -having in fact been simmering in my mind -for more than two years past. One or two of them -may demand a more than average amount of address -on the part of the performer; but the majority -are comparatively easy, and I believe I may -assert with confidence that all will be found both -practicable and effective. Should any of my modest -inventions be found, as is not improbable, susceptible -of further polish, the keen wits and ready -fingers of my brother wizards may safely be -trusted to supply it.</p> - -<p>The items entitled <i>The Mystery of Mahomet</i>, -<i>The Bewildering Blocks</i>, and <i>The Wizard’s<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_viii" id="Page_viii">[viii]</a></span> -Pocket-book</i>, have been described in the columns of -an English magical serial, but have never appeared -in book shape, and are by special desire, included -in the present volume.</p> - -<p>A final word on a personal matter. Had I been -prophet, as well as magician, when I first began -to write on conjuring, I should have chosen a different -pen-name. In the light of later events, my -selection was unfortunate. My identity has long -been an open secret, but as I cannot flatter myself -that it is universally known, I take this opportunity -to assure all whom it may concern that I am -British to the backbone.</p> - -<p class="right"><span class="smcap">Louis Hoffmann.</span></p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_ix" id="Page_ix">[ix]</a></span></p> - -<h2>CONTENTS</h2> - -<table summary="Contents"> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Portrait of Professor Hoffmann</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#FRONTISPIECE"><i>Frontispiece</i></a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td></td> - <td class="tdr smaller">PAGE</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Preface</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#PREFACE">vii</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Some New Appliances of General Utility</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#INTRODUCTORY">1</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Magical Mats</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_1">1</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Fairy Flower-Pots</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_5">5</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Patter Introducing the Flower-Pots</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_8">8</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Adhesive Cards and Tricks Therewith</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_10">10</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Missing Card</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_12">12</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Novel Applications of the “Black Art” Principle</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#NOVEL_APPLICATIONS_OF_THE">17</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Black Art Mats and Black Art Patches</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_17">17</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">A Magical Transposition</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_23">23</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Detective Die</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_26">26</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Dissolving Dice</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_32">32</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Where is It?</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_38">38</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Card Tricks</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CARD_TRICKS">46</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Arithmetic by Magic</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_46">46</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Those Naughty Knaves</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_49">49</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Magnetic Magic</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_55">55</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Telepathic Tape</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_57">57</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">A Card Comedy</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_60">60</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Fast and Loose Card-Box</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_63">63</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">A Royal Tug of War</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_64">64</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Sympathetic Cards</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_66">66</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Tell-Tale Fingers</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_68">68</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Divination Doubly Difficult</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_72">72</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">A New Long Card and Tricks Therewith</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_77">77</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Mascot Coin Box</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_83">83</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_x" id="Page_x">[x]</a></span><span class="smcap">Miscellaneous Tricks</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#MISCELLANEOUS_TRICKS">88</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Money-Making Made Easy</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_88">88</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Missing Link</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_92">92</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Culture Extraordinary</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_97">97</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Bounding Beans</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_104">104</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">Lost and Found</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_110">110</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Riddle of the Pyramids</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_115">115</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Miracle of Mumbo Jumbo</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_123">123</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Story of the Alkahest</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_130">130</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Oracle of Memphis</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_137">137</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Mystery of Mahomet</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_146">146</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Bewildering Blocks</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_156">156</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">An “Od” Force</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_162">162</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Mystery of the Three Seals</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_170">170</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub">The Wizard’s Pocket-book</td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_180">180</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Concerning Patter</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#CONCERNING_PATTER">192</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">The Use of the Wand</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#THE_USE_OF_THE_WAND">203</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">A Few Wrinkles</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#A_FEW_WRINKLES">215</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">L’Envoi</span></td> - <td class="tdr"><a href="#LENVOI">222</a></td> - </tr> -</table> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[1]</a></span></p> - -<h1>LATEST MAGIC</h1> - -<h2 id="INTRODUCTORY">INTRODUCTORY<br /> -<span class="smaller">SOME NEW APPLIANCES OF GENERAL UTILITY</span></h2> - -<p>The little appliances to be presently described -are the outcome of ideas which, after a long period -of incubation in my note-books, have ultimately -taken concrete form in what, I venture to believe, -will be found to be practical and useful items of -magical apparatus. I may further claim that they -combine in an exceptional degree absolute innocence -of appearance with a wide range of practical -utility. Examples of their uses are indicated in -the following pages, but the inventive reader will -find that these by no means exhaust their possibilities -of usefulness.</p> - -<h3>MAGICAL MATS</h3> - -<p>The first to be described are of two different -kinds, to be known as the “Card” and “Coin” Mat -respectively. They are in appearance simply circular -table—or plate mats, with an ornamental<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[2]</a></span> -border as depicted in Fig. 1, and about seven inches -in diameter. In the centre of each is an embossed -shield, ostensibly a mere ornament, but in reality -serving, as will presently be seen, an important -practical purpose.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> -<img src="images/figure1.jpg" width="300" height="100" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 1</span></p> -</div> - -<p>To the casual observer the two mats look precisely -alike, but there are in reality important -practical differences between them. The “coin” -mat is covered with leather on both sides, and each -has the embossed shield, so that, whichever side is -uppermost, no difference is perceptible to the eye. -In the case of the “card” mat the upper surface -only is of leather, the under side being covered with -baize. The object of this difference is that the -exposure (accidental or otherwise) of the baize-covered -side of the card mat may induce in the -mind of the spectator the assumption that the -under side of the coin mat is covered in the same -way, such assumption naturally precluding the -idea that it is reversible.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[3]</a></span></p> - -<p>Each mat has a secret space, after the manner of -the old “multiplying” salver, between its upper -and under surfaces. The opening in each case is -opposite the lower end or point of the shield before -mentioned, so that, however the mat may be placed, -a glance at the shield will always furnish a guide -to the position, for the time being, of the opening.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> -<img src="images/figure2.jpg" width="300" height="300" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 2</span></p> -</div> - -<p>In the case of the card mat the secret space (see -Fig. 2) is just large enough to accommodate three -playing cards, one upon another. The corresponding -space in the coin mat (Fig. 3) is shorter, -narrower and deeper, being designed to receive,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[4]</a></span> -one upon the other, a couple of half-crowns, or -coins of similar size.<a name="FNanchor_1" id="FNanchor_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a></p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> -<img src="images/figure3.jpg" width="300" height="300" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 3</span></p> -</div> - -<p>When required for use, the coin mat is prepared, -shortly beforehand, by rubbing the whole of the -space within the ornamental border on one of its -faces with diachylon, in the solid form. The -diachylon is used cold, the necessary friction melting -it sufficiently, without any additional heating. -This treatment renders the surface of the mat, for -the time being, adhesive, without in any way altering -its appearance. To make sure of its being just -right, press a half-crown or penny down firmly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[5]</a></span> -upon it, turn the mat over, and wave it about -freely. If the coin adheres securely, the mat is -in working order.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_1" id="Footnote_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_1"><span class="label">[1]</span></a> Where coins of English denominations are referred to in the text, -the American wizard will naturally replace them by corresponding coins -of the U. S. currency.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<h3>THE FAIRY FLOWER-POTS</h3> - -<p>These are, strictly speaking, only flower-pot -cases, called in French <i>cache-pots</i>. They may be -of leather or cardboard, ornamented on the outside, -but plain black inside, their general appearance -being as shown in Fig. 4. They have neither -top nor bottom, and when not in use, can be opened -out flat or rolled up as in Figs. 5 and 6, for greater -portability.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 220px;"> -<img src="images/figure4.jpg" width="220" height="250" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 4</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 480px;"> -<img src="images/figure5.jpg" width="480" height="200" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 5</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 165px;"> -<img src="images/figure6.jpg" width="165" height="250" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 6</span></p> -</div> - -<p>The pair, when needed for use, are exhibited in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[6]</a></span> -the first instance as one only, the one within the -other. The professedly single pot, after being -proved empty by exhibiting the interior and passing -the hand through it, is made into two, by simply -drawing out the inner one. The duplication -is not presented as a trick, the <i>modus operandi</i><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[7]</a></span> -being self-evident, but it has a pretty effect, and -the exhibiting of the two pots as one in the first -instance admits of the presence, within the outer -one, of a secret pocket, open at top, as depicted in -Fig. 7, but folding down, when not in use, flat -against its side.<a name="FNanchor_2" id="FNanchor_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_2" class="fnanchor">[2]</a></p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 550px;"> -<img src="images/figure7.jpg" width="550" height="200" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 7</span></p> -</div> - -<p>The main object of this pocket is to enable the -performer to “vanish” a card. The card to be -got rid of is dropped ostensibly into the flower-pot, -or rather, the pot being bottomless, <i>through</i> -it on to the table, where, when the pot is lifted, -the spectators naturally expect to see it. It has -however disappeared, having in fact been dropped -into the pocket, where it remains concealed. Two, -or even three cards may on occasion be dealt with -in the same way. By covering the pocket with the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[8]</a></span> -fingers in the act of picking up the pot, the interior -of the latter may be freely shown after their disappearance.</p> - -<p>The pocket, previously loaded accordingly -(though the flower-pot is shown, to all appearance, -empty), may also be used for the production of a -card or cards.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_2" id="Footnote_2"></a><a href="#FNanchor_2"><span class="label">[2]</span></a> It is extremely difficult to construct the “pots” so that the pocket is -workable on the concave inner surface, but if they are made four, five or -six-sided the pocket folds against a flat surface and works perfectly.—<span class="smcap">Ed.</span></p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<h3>PATTER APPROPRIATE TO THE FAIRY -FLOWER-POTS</h3> - -<p>The flower-pots may be introduced as follows:</p> - -<p>“Permit me to call your attention to one of my -latest improvements. Conjurers have a foolish -fancy, as I dare say you have noticed, for borrowing -other people’s hats. If a conjurer wants to -collect money from the air, he collects it in a hat. -If he wants to make an omelette, he cooks it in a -hat. If he wants to hatch a few chickens, he does -it in a hat. And, for fear of accidents, he never -uses his own hat, but always borrows somebody -else’s. It’s very wrong of us. As Sir William -Gilbert says, about some other forms of crime,</p> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">‘It’s human nature, P’raps. If so,</div> -<div class="verse indent2">O! isn’t human nature <i>low</i>.’</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<p class="noindent">But we all do it. The worst of it is, we get so in -the way of borrowing hats that we do it without -thinking. You will hardly believe that one evening -I came away from the theatre with two hats.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[9]</a></span> -One of them was my own. The other I had borrowed—from -under the seat. You don’t believe -it? Well, I said you wouldn’t. I always know!</p> - -<p>“But that is not all. It isn’t only the bad effect -on the conjurer’s own morals, and sometimes on -the hat. People are so careless. They do leave -such funny things in their hats. Cannon balls and -birdcages; babies’ socks and babies’ bottles; rabbits -and pigeons, and bowls of fish, and a host of -other things. And just when you are going to produce -some brilliant effect, you are pulled up short -by finding some silly thing of that sort in the hat. -It’s most annoying.</p> - -<p>“So, after thinking it over, I made up my mind -to do away with hats altogether. Of course I -don’t mean for putting on people’s heads, but so -far as conjuring is concerned, and it struck me -that a pretty flower-pot, like this, would form a -capital substitute.” (Show as one, the combined -pots, inside and out.) “Much nicer than a hat, -don’t you think? It is prettier, to begin with, and -then again, you can see right through it, and make -sure there is no deception. You see that at present -the pot is perfectly empty.</p> - -<p>“But no! I scorn to deceive you. I am like -George Washington, except that I haven’t got a -little axe. I cannot tell a lie. At least it hurts -me very much to do so, and I don’t feel well enough -to do it now. No! It is useless any longer to disguise -it! The pot is <i>not</i> really empty, for you see<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span> -here is another inside it.” (Produce second pot.) -“You wouldn’t have thought it, would you? In -fact, you would never have known, if I hadn’t told -you.</p> - -<p>“Of course I could keep on doing this all the -evening, but there wouldn’t be much fun in it, and -no time would be left for anything else, so I will -proceed at once to make use of the pots for a little -experiment with cards.”</p> - -<p>(Proceed with any trick for which the card mat -may have been prepared.)</p> - -<p>N. B. It will be taken for granted, in the -description of tricks dependent upon the use of the -flower-pots, that these have been already introduced, -after the above or some similar manner.</p> - -<h3>ADHESIVE CARDS AND TRICKS THEREWITH</h3> - -<p>I believe I may safely claim that the device I -am about to describe was, until I disclosed it some -months ago in the <i>Magazine of Magic</i>, an absolute -novelty. It consists in the preparation of one card -of a pack (or, better still, of a spare card, to be -substituted at need for its double), by rubbing one -or other of its surfaces, shortly before it is needed -for use, with diachylon, in the solid form.</p> - -<p>We will suppose, in the first instance, that the -<i>back</i> of the card is so dealt with. The rubbing -does not alter its appearance, but gives it a thin -coating of adhesive matter, and if another card is<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span> -pressed against the surface so treated, the two -adhere, and for the time become, in effect, one card -only, viz., the one whose face is exposed, the other -having temporarily disappeared from the pack.</p> - -<p>This renders possible many striking effects. To -take an elementary example, let us suppose that -the old-fashioned flat card-box, or some other -appliance for magically producing a card, is -loaded with, say, a seven of diamonds. The corresponding -card is forced on one of the company, -and taken back into the middle of the pack, on -the top of the prepared card. The performer does -not disturb or tamper with the pack in the smallest -degree. He merely squares up the cards, and, -pressing them well together, hands them to be -shuffled, meanwhile calling attention to the card-box, -which is shown apparently empty. He then -asks the name of the drawn card, announcing that -it will at his command leave the pack and find its -way into the box.</p> - -<p>He now counts off the cards, showing the face -of each as he does so, and leaving it exposed upon -the table. The seven of diamonds has disappeared, -being in fact hidden behind the prepared -card, which we will suppose to be in this instance -the queen of clubs.</p> - -<p>Leaving the cards outspread upon the table, the -performer opens the card-box, and shows that the -missing card has somehow found its way into it.</p> - -<p>In the hands of a novice, the trick might end at<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span> -this point; but even a novice may very well carry -it a stage further. To do so, he will in the first -place replace the card in the box, in such a manner -that it can be again “vanished.” In gathering -together the outspread cards, he takes care to place -the queen of clubs on top of the rest. As this, -however, is the double card, the actual top card is -of course the missing seven of diamonds. It is -an easy matter, in handling the cards, to detach -this from the queen of clubs, and, after a little -“talkee-talkee,” show that it has left the box and -returned to the pack.</p> - -<p>The above would, however, be much too crude -and elementary a proceeding to commend itself to -the expert. In the trick next to be described the -same expedient is employed after a more subtle -fashion.</p> - -<h3>THE MISSING CARD</h3> - -<p>The requirements for this trick consist of two -complete packs of cards and an extra card, which -we will suppose to be the knave of diamonds. One -of the two packs, which we will call <i>A</i>, has on top -a card made adhesive at the back as above -described, and its own knave of diamonds at the -bottom. The other pack, <i>B</i>, is wholly unprepared.</p> - -<p>The first step is to offer pack <i>B</i> to be shuffled, -and when it is returned to palm on to it the spare -knave of diamonds, after which the pack is left<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span> -temporarily for the time being in view on the table. -The next step is to pick up pack <i>A</i>, and force from -it the knave of diamonds, receiving it back on top of -the prepared card, passed to the middle of the pack -for its reception. Squaring up the pack and -applying the necessary pressure, the performer -offers it to be shuffled, meanwhile delivering himself -to something like the following effect.</p> - -<p>“Before going further, ladies and gentlemen, -I want you to remember exactly what has been -done. A card has been chosen from this pack. It -has been put back again, the cards have been -shuffled, and you can all bear witness that I have -not touched them since. Nobody knows, except -the lady who chose it, what card she chose. -Whereabouts in the pack it may be at this moment -not one of us knows, even the lady herself. I can -assure you truthfully that <i>I</i> don’t, but I propose, -by force of magic, to compel that card, whatever it -may be, to leave that pack altogether, and pass into -the other one. Nay, more than that, I shall compel -it to place itself at any number in that pack -you like to name. What shall we say? Seventh? -Good.</p> - -<p>“Now please bear in mind that that pack, like -the other, has just been shuffled, and that I have -not touched it since. It is therefore manifestly -impossible that I should know the position of any -card in it. Of course, as there is already a knave -of diamonds in the pack, it is just possible, though<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span> -scarcely likely, that that card may have been -shuffled into the seventh place. We will see.”</p> - -<p>He counts off cards from the top of the pack on -to the table, <i>faces down</i>, not exposing any card till -he comes to the seventh, which he holds up so that -all may see it. “Now, Madam, is that your card? -I don’t want to know the name of it yet. It is not -your card? I did not suppose it was, for the -chances were over fifty to one against it, but you -never can tell!”</p> - -<p>He gathers up the cards counted off, and without -disturbing their order, replaces them on the top -of the pack, thereby bringing the original top card -to the seventh place.</p> - -<p>“Now please observe that I do not touch these -cards again till the miracle has actually happened. -I will now ask you, madam, to be good enough to -name your card. The knave of diamonds, you -say? That is all right. Had you taken the knave -of clubs, I should have feared for the success of -my experiment, for that knave always gives -trouble, if he can; but the knave of diamonds is a -very gentlemanly card, and I have no doubt that -he will readily oblige. Now, Percy (perhaps you -didn’t know his name was Percy), I want you to -leave the pack you are in, and place yourself seventh -in the other pack. Go at once, like a good -boy. Start at the top, and go straight down. -One, two, three, four, five, six, seven!</p> - -<p>“I should think he has arrived by this time.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span> -Let us make sure first, though, whether he has -really left the other pack.”</p> - -<p>Picking up pack <i>A</i>, he counts the cards slowly, -not looking at them himself, but showing the face -of each before laying it on the table. “Stop me, -please, if you see the knave of diamonds.” He -counts, “one, two, three, four,” and so on to the -end. “Fifty-one cards only! Then there is one -card missing, and as you have not seen the knave -of diamonds, and as all the other cards are here, it -is plain that it is he who has left the pack. We -have still to find out whether he has obeyed orders, -and gone over to the other pack. You wished him -to place himself seventh, I think. I won’t touch -the cards myself. Will some gentleman come forward, -and count them off for me?” (This is -done.) “The seventh card is really the knave of -diamonds, is it not?</p> - -<p>“But, you may say, this might be the knave -properly belonging to this pack. Please look -through the pack, sir, and if there has been no -deception you will find the proper knave in some -other part of it. You have found the other knave? -Then you will admit that that proves clearly that -this first one is the identical card the lady drew.”<a name="FNanchor_3" id="FNanchor_3"></a><a href="#Footnote_3" class="fnanchor">[3]</a></p> - -<p>It would be easy to give other combinations -dependent on the use of the adhesive principle, but<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span> -these may safely be left to the ingenuity of the -reader. If the face, instead of the back, of a given -card be treated with the adhesive, that card will -itself disappear from the pack. By due adjustment -two adhering cards may (the one slightly -overlapping the other) be made to form a temporary -long or wide card.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_3" id="Footnote_3"></a><a href="#FNanchor_3"><span class="label">[3]</span></a> A somewhat more elaborate trick of mine on the same principle -(<i>The Elusive Card</i>) will be found described in the <i>Magazine of Magic</i>, -Vol. II, pp. 13, 47.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="NOVEL_APPLICATIONS_OF_THE">NOVEL APPLICATIONS OF THE “BLACK ART” PRINCIPLE</h2> - -<h3>BLACK ART MATS AND BLACK ART PATCHES</h3> - -<p>The Black Art Table has long since established -itself in the affections of the conjurer as one of his -most effective aids. At a stage performance the -presence of one or more such adjuncts is almost a -matter of course, but the drawing room performer -finds many occasions when, for one reason or -another, the use of such an aid is precluded. -Some wizards, as a matter of personal convenience, -decline to burden themselves with more artistic -luggage than can be bestowed in an ordinary handbag. -Others, again, hold (and not without reason) -that the use of a special table, imported by -the performer himself, tends to discount the marvel -of his show; as being suggestive of that “preparation” -which every artistic conjurer is anxious to -disclaim. It is no doubt an easy matter to arrange -a good enough programme for which the aid of -“black art” is not needed, but this means the -exclusion not merely of a valuable auxiliary, but -of many of the most striking magical effects.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 450px;"> -<img src="images/figure8.jpg" width="450" height="200" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 8</span></p> -</div> - -<p>I have pleasure in introducing to the reader a -substitute which, though its capabilities fall a good<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span> -deal short of those of the actual table, will answer -many of its purposes, apart from special merits of -its own, and which has the further recommendation -of exceptional portability. It may be appropriately -entitled the Black Art Mat. It consists -of a piece of Bristol board of size and shape suitable -to the purpose for which it is to be used, covered -on both sides with black velvet and edged with -narrow ornamental braid or binding. The one -side has no speciality, but the other has a flat -pocket across one or more of its corners; as indicated -in Fig. 8. In the case of a mat of small size -the pocket may extend diagonally from corner to -corner as in Fig. 9. The edge of the pocket may be -braided if preferred (the rest of the surface being -ornamented to correspond) but if the mat be well -made this is not necessary. The mouth of each -pocket is made slightly “full,” and is held open<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span> -a quarter of an inch or so by means of a stiffening -along its inner edge. By having the mill-board -foundation cut in half before it is covered, the mat -may be made to fold like a chessboard for greater -portability.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 450px;"> -<img src="images/figure9.jpg" width="450" height="200" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 9</span></p> -</div> - -<p>If some small article, say a coin or ring, is laid -on mat just behind the mouth of the pocket, it may -be made to disappear therein, being in fact swept -into the pocket in the act of apparently picking it -up. In the case of a coin, the pocket may by a -slight alteration of procedure be used to effect a -“change”; a substitute, palmed beforehand, being -exhibited in place of the one professedly picked up -from the mat.</p> - -<p>It is desirable when placing the mat upon the -table for use to see that the mouth of the pocket -is duly open and has not been, by any accident, -pressed flat, and so closed.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span></p> - -<p>The utility of the black art mat, however, does -not depend upon the pocket only. Its unbroken or -“plain” side, or indeed a mat wholly without -pockets may also be very effectively used for vanishing -purposes. In this case a little auxiliary -appliance comes into play. This is a small velvet -patch, serving as an “overlay.” It may be round -or square, according to the purpose for which it is -intended to be used. For coin-vanishing purposes -it is best circular, and about two inches (or less, -as the case may be) in diameter. The foundation -is in this case a disc of thin card covered on both -sides with velvet, in colour and texture <i>exactly corresponding -with that of the mat</i>, under which conditions -the patch, when laid on the mat, will be -invisible. The exact similarity of the two surfaces -is a point of the highest importance for black art -effects, and the velvet used, if not actually silk velvet, -should at least be of the silk-faced kind. Velvet -which is all cotton will never give satisfactory -results.</p> - -<p>If a coin be laid on any part of the mat the -performer has only (in the supposed act of picking -it up) to lay the velvet patch over it to render it -invisible. If it is desired to reproduce the coin, a -handkerchief shown to be empty, may be laid over -the patch, and a moment or two later picked up -again, bringing away the overlay within it, and -again revealing the coin <i>in statu quo</i>. A practical -example of the use of this device will be found in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span> -the case of the trick entitled <i>Lost and Found</i>, <i>post</i>.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 200px;"> -<img src="images/figure10.jpg" width="200" height="200" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 10</span></p> -</div> - -<p>Another little device which will be found useful -in connection with the black art mat is a cardboard -disc covered as above, to one side of which a coin, -say a half-crown or half-dollar, is cemented as in -Fig. 10. Such a patch, laid on the mat, coin side -down, will attract no notice, but the mere act of -turning it over will at any given moment produce -the coin. The “change” of a coin may be expected -very neatly by the aid of this device. Suppose, -for example, that the performer desires to retain, -unknown to the spectators, possession of a marked -coin just handed to him. He lays it, to all appearance, -in full view upon the table, but as a matter -of fact merely turns over a patch, loaded as above, -already on the table, the borrowed coin remaining -in his hand.</p> - -<p>The velvet patch may also be utilised in another<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span> -way for “changing” a borrowed coin. The performer, -asking the loan of a marked coin, brings -forward held in his left hand a velvet mat (of small -size) whereon to receive it; the right hand meanwhile -holding palmed against the second and third -fingers the velvet patch, and between this and the -hand a substitute coin of similar kind. Turning -(to the left) towards his table, with the coin in full -view on the mat, he (apparently) picks it up and -holds it aloft with the right hand, placing the -now empty mat alone on the table. What he -really does is to lay the velvet patch over the borrowed -coin and to pick the substitute in its place. -The original lies <i>perdu</i> on the mat, whence it is -child’s play to gain possession of it at any later -stage of the trick.</p> - -<p>The process may be varied by placing the mat, -after receiving the borrowed coin upon it, at once -on the table, and a little later picking up the mat -with the left hand, then proceeding as above indicated. -The advantage of this plan is that the turn -to the table to pick up the mat masks for the -moment the right side of the performer and gives -him a convenient opportunity to palm the coin and -patch, bestowed in readiness in the <i>pochette</i> on -that side.</p> - -<p>The same principle may be applied with appropriate -modifications to card tricks. The idea of -the black art mat is so completely a novelty that I -have not found leisure to give it the full consideration<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span> -it deserves, and have probably far from -exhausted its possibilities, but I offer by way of -illustration the trick next following, which it seems -to me would be rather effective, particularly as an -introduction to some other card trick. We will -call it</p> - -<h3>A MAGICAL TRANSPOSITION</h3> - -<p>Prepare two cards, say an eight of hearts and a -seven of spades, by blackening all their edges save -one of the narrow ends,<a name="FNanchor_4" id="FNanchor_4"></a><a href="#Footnote_4" class="fnanchor">[4]</a> and backing each with -velvet matching the mat. Lay the two cards so -treated face down with the white edge towards -yourself on the mat at some little distance apart, -or preferably on separate mats. Force corresponding -cards on two members of the company -and deliver an oration to something like the following -effect:</p> - -<p>“We hear people talk sometimes about the -quickness of the hand deceiving the eye. I suppose -such a thing must be possible, or nobody -would have thought of it, but it seems to me that if -it did anything of the kind, either the hand must be -extra quick, or the eye extra slow. I know I should -be afraid to attempt anything of that sort myself, -but if you are a magician of the right sort you have -no need to do so, for you can deceive the eye without<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span> -any quickness at all. I will prove it to you by -means of these two cards which have been chosen. -Please give me one of them. I don’t mind which.”</p> - -<p>We will suppose that the card handed up is the -eight of hearts.</p> - -<p>“Notice please what card this is; the eight of -hearts. You can’t possibly mistake it for any -other card, can you? I will turn it down here on -the table. And now for the other card.” (It is -held up that all may see it.) “This one, you see, -is the seven of spades. No mistake about that, -either! I will lay that one here.” The card is in -each case laid upon the velvet-covered card of the -opposite kind.</p> - -<p>“Please don’t forget which is which. There has -been no quickness of the hand so far, has there? -Now I am going to make these two cards change -places.” (You touch each with the wand.) -“Presto, change!” (Picking up the upper and -lower cards exactly one upon the other you show -what was a moment previously the eight of hearts, -but which now appears to be the seven of spades.) -“One card has changed, you see. And now for -the other.” (You show the other pair after the -same fashion.) “And here we have the eight of -hearts. I will now order them to change back -again.” You lay both pairs again face down.</p> - -<p>“Now I again give the cards a touch with my -wand, and say ‘Right about! Change!’ and now, -you see” (showing the faces of the original cards),<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span> -“they have returned to their original positions.</p> - -<p>“Now you will realise, if you think about the -matter, that those two cards couldn’t in any natural -way change places without your seeing them -do it, neither could the one change into the other. -But this is where magic comes in. What I really -did was to hypnotise you a little so as to make you -fancy, when I told the cards to change, that the -eight of hearts was the seven of spades, and that -the seven of spades was the eight of hearts. It’s -quite simple, when you know it, and you can see -for yourselves that the quickness of the hand has -had nothing to do with the matter. For my own -part I like to do things slowly; the more slowly -the better, and then you can all see how it’s done.”</p> - -<p>The trick is simple enough; but it will test the -performer’s expertness as to neatness of execution. -He must be careful in the first place to put -each of the drawn cards as exactly as possible on -the opposite velvet-backed card; and in picking up -two cards together he should frame them, so to -speak, between the middle finger and thumb at top -and bottom, and the first and third fingers at the -sides. Held in this manner they rest squarely one -upon the other and there is little fear of their -“duplicity” (or “duplexity”) being perceived. -In the act of again turning the double card down -the upper one should be partially drawn off the -one below it; this facilitating the picking of it up -alone a few moments later.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span></p> - -<p>An illustration of the use of the same device -in a somewhat different form will be found in the -item next described, and in the trick entitled -<i>“Where is it?” post</i>. Other ways of using it will -suggest themselves to any reader of an inventive -turn.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_4" id="Footnote_4"></a><a href="#FNanchor_4"><span class="label">[4]</span></a> Better still, thicken the under edge by the interposition between -card and velvet of a slip of white card, as described in <i>The Detective -Die, post.</i></p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<h3>THE DETECTIVE DIE</h3> - -<p>This is another of the new departures dependent -upon the use of the velvet mat. Broadly stated, -the effect of the trick is as follows.</p> - -<p>One of a group of six different cards laid out in -a row or rows repeatedly changes place with some -other, the position which it occupies, or to which it -has moved, being indicated by the cast of an ordinary -die. This may be repeated any number of -times.<a name="FNanchor_5" id="FNanchor_5"></a><a href="#Footnote_5" class="fnanchor">[5]</a></p> - -<p>The requirements for the trick are as follows:</p> - -<p>1. The Velvet Mat. This should be one with -a plain surface, dimensions preferably eighteen -inches by ten, so as to admit of the six cards being -laid in one row. A smaller size, say twelve by -nine, may suffice, the six cards in this case being -arranged in two rows. In either case there must -be a space of an inch or so between each pair.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span></p> - -<p>2. Six cards of like denomination (say for the -purpose of illustration six queens of diamonds), -each backed with black velvet and blackened at the -edges all around save at one end. Here the card is -thickened by the interposition of a slip of white -cardboard between itself and the velvet, so that the -card as viewed from that end shall show a clearly -visible white edge. Each card has all four of its -corners snipped off to a microscopic extent, say a -sixteenth, or less, of an inch.</p> - -<p>3. An ordinary pack of cards one of which (in -the case supposed, the queen of diamonds) bears a -mark upon its back recognisable by the performer, -but not conspicuous enough to be noticed by any -one else.</p> - -<p>4. An ordinary die and dice-box, or a champagne -tumbler to be used in place of the latter.</p> - -<p>5. A tray or plate, about six inches in diameter, -whereon to throw the die.</p> - -<p>6. The wand.</p> - -<p><i>Preparation.</i> Velvet mat on table, and laid -upon it, face down in a row (or a double row, in -the case of a small mat), the six velvet-backed -cards. These, so laid, will be undistinguishable by -spectators at a very short distance from the mat -itself. Each is laid with its “white” end toward -the hinder part of the table, so that this shall be -visible to the performer when standing behind it. -The marked queen of diamonds is laid on the top -of the pack. The die and dice-box, on their tray,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span> -are laid on the mat, which may partially cover two -or more of the six cards.</p> - -<p><i>Presentation.</i> Performer, picking up the pack -of cards with his right hand, transfers it to his left, -leaving the queen of diamonds palmed in the right. -Picking up the tray and its contents with the right -hand and advancing with it, he offers the pack to -some member of the company, saying: “Will you -kindly look well over this pack of cards and satisfy -yourself that there is nothing exceptional about -them; and when you have done so give them a -thorough shuffle. And you, Sir” (handing tray -and die to another spectator), “please test this die -in any way your please. Throw it as many times -as you like. I want you to be quite sure that it -throws a different number each time, and that it is -not loaded, or ‘faked’ in any way.</p> - -<p>“I don’t like bothering people to examine things, -for in most cases it is a mere waste of time. But in -this case I have a special reason for asking. There -is something about this pack of cards and this die -which I myself don’t understand; and I shall be -much obliged to anyone who will help me to do so. -As a matter of fact, these cards, though quite ordinary -in other respects, are afflicted with a peculiar -restlessness. They change places without notice -and without any apparent reason. If I were to -try to play bridge with them, for instance, I should -find as likely as not that my best trump had invisibly -left my hand and passed over to the enemy,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span> -which would naturally upset my game and get me -into trouble with my partner. The die is equally -peculiar, but in another way. From some curious -effect of sympathy it knows where a given card -is to be found when I don’t know myself.</p> - -<p>“The only possible explanation I can think of -for their peculiarities is the fact that both cards -and die were formerly the property of an old -magician, and that after his death they were shut -up together for some years in the same box with -this wand, which also belonged to him, and that -they have imbibed some of its magical qualities. -I will give you a sample of their ‘eccentricities.’”</p> - -<p>Performer takes back the cards and proceeds to -force the queen of diamonds on some member of -the company (a lady for choice). Leaving the -drawn card for the time being in her hands, he -asks a gentleman to shuffle and cut the rest of the -pack and count off from the cut five indifferent -cards. The card drawn by the lady is then shuffled -with these, so that its position among the six shall -be unknown. Performer, taking these from the -holder, deals them in a row (or double row, as the -case may be) upon the velvet mat, placing each -exactly over one of the velvet-backed cards; the -white hinder edges of these guiding him as to their -positions.</p> - -<p>“We will now consider these cards as numbered -in regular order, One, Two, Three, Four, Five, -Six! Among them somewhere or other, is the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span> -card the lady chose. At what number it stands -nobody knows (I can assure you that I don’t), but -the die will tell us instantly. May I ask you, -Madam, to name your card. The queen of diamonds; -you say? Good! Now will the gentleman -who holds the die kindly throw it. What is -the number thrown? A three?” (Whatever the -number happens to be.) “The die says the card -stands number three. Let us see whether that is -correct.”</p> - -<p>He picks up the two cards occupying the position -indicated, and shows the face of the undermost, -which is of course seen to be the queen of -diamonds.</p> - -<p>“But now we come to the more remarkable feature -of the case. I told you about the queer way in -which the cards change places. Even in this short -time I daresay the lady’s card has got tired of -being number three, and has moved away to some -other number. If so, the die will tell us. Throw -it again, Sir, please.”</p> - -<p>This is done, the die bringing up a new number, -say “five.”</p> - -<p>“The die declares that the card has moved, and -now stands fifth. We shall soon see whether such -is really the case. First, however, let us see -whether it has really departed from number -three.”</p> - -<p>Performer has meanwhile replaced the two -cards just lifted. He now lifts the upper one only,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span> -which (being one of the indifferent cards) shows -a different face. “The queen has gone, you see. -And now to ascertain whether she has really -passed to number five.”</p> - -<p>The two cards standing at that number are lifted -together, and again a queen of diamonds is exhibited. -The trick can of course be repeated any -number of times, but it is better not to prolong it -beyond a third or fourth “move.”</p> - -<p>In picking up two cards together, in order to -show the undermost, they are lifted with second -finger at top, thumb at bottom and the first and -third fingers at the sides. Thus “framed” so to -speak, the two cards will lie squarely the one upon -the other and be undistinguishable from a single -card. When it is desired to lift the upper card -alone, it should be nipped between the second finger -at top right-hand corner and thumb at bottom -left-hand corner, when it will be brought away -clear without difficulty.</p> - -<p>There is one contingency for which the performer -must be prepared, namely, that the throw -of the die may happen to correspond with the -actual position of the card drawn. Both cards of -the pair are in this case alike, and the performer -cannot, at the succeeding throw, show that the -drawn card is no longer in its late position. This -possibility is provided for by having the back of -the card marked as before explained. Should the -contingency in question arise, the performer, having<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span> -meanwhile noted the marked card, does not call -attention to the disappearance of the queen from -that number, but proceeds at once to show that it -has moved to its new position. There is not the -smallest fear that anyone will notice the omission.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_5" id="Footnote_5"></a><a href="#FNanchor_5"><span class="label">[5]</span></a> Since the description which follows was written, it has come to my -knowledge that there is already on sale a trick on somewhat similar -lines in point of <i>effect</i> entitled <i>The Educated Die</i>. I need hardly say -that my own trick, so far as I am concerned, is absolutely original. The -advertised description of <i>The Educated Die</i> would suit either trick, but -there is little further resemblance between them.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<h3>THE DISSOLVING DICE</h3> - -<p><i>To be worked on a Black Art Table</i></p> - -<p>The requisites for this trick are as under:</p> - -<p>1. Three small billiard balls, one red, two white.</p> - -<p>2. A white half-shell to correspond, vested or -placed in a pochette.</p> - -<p>3. Three hollow wooden dice, each of such a size -as just to contain one of the balls, and lined inside -with velvet to prevent “talking.” One side of -each is left open, but the opening can be closed -at pleasure by the insertion of a loose side with a -beveled edge. When this is in position, the die -appears solid. The inner surface of each of the -loose sides is also covered with black velvet, so that -when lying with that side upwards on a black art -table it is practically invisible.</p> - -<p>4. Three cardboard covers, fitting easily over -the dice. In preparation for the trick the three -balls are placed inside the dice, and these are -placed on the table, open side upward, but with the -loose sides inserted on top, and the covers over -them.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span></p> - -<p><i>Presentation.</i> The opening “yarn” may run as -follows:</p> - -<p>“I once read a story about a man who invented -a most ingenious piece of furniture of the ‘combination’ -kind. It started, say, as a table, but by -giving it a pull here and a push there, it became a -step-ladder. Another pull and push, and it turned -into a mangle, or by just turning a button or two, -you could make it a clothes-horse.</p> - -<p>“The story says that at first it was a great success, -but after a little while the thing began to work -too easily, and sometimes changed of its own -accord when least expected, which was a drawback. -It was annoying, naturally, when you were using -it as a step-ladder, and hanging up a picture, to -have it suddenly turn into a clothes-horse, and land -you on the floor. It was vexing, too, when it was -a table, and the family were seated round it at -breakfast, to have it turn into a mangle, and mangle -the cups and saucers.</p> - -<p>“I shouldn’t care myself to have a piece of furniture -like that: it would make life too exciting. -But the story gave me an idea. It struck me what -a convenience it would be, after showing one of my -little experiments, to be able to turn the articles I -had been using into what I wanted for the next. I -haven’t got very far as yet, but I have made a -beginning in a small way, and I will show you how -it’s done.</p> - -<p>“I have here three wooden dice, with a cover for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span> -each of them.” (Take off all three covers, placing -each beside its own die. Then, placing one of them -on the end of your wand, advance with it to the -company, tacitly inviting anyone who pleases to -take it off and examine it.) “I use these covers -to spare the feelings of the dice at the critical -moment. Like myself, they are rather bashful. -They don’t mind doing the Jekyll and Hyde business, -but they don’t like to be seen doing it. By -the way, there is a very ancient trick (believed to -have been invented by Noah in the Ark, to amuse -the boys on a wet Sunday), which is worked by -means of a sham die fitting over the real one. -Please take my word for it that I do not use any -such stale device. If I did, you may be quite sure -I should not mention it. These are all three genuine -dice. They are rather too large to play backgammon -with, but save as to size, they are merely -big brothers of the regular article. Most of you -know, no doubt, that in properly made dice, the -points on opposite sides always together make -seven. Notice please, that each of these dice has -the numbers placed correctly.” (Taking up one -of the dice and turning it about.) “You see, five -on this side, two on that; together, seven. Three -on this side, four on that; together, seven. Six on -this side, one on that; again seven.”</p> - -<p>This is repeated, in a casual way, with the other -two dice, the object being two-fold, viz.: first, by -showing all six sides, to induce the belief that the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span> -dice are solid, and secondly, to enable the performer, -in replacing them on the table, to turn each -the other way up, so as to bring the loose side -undermost. This is best done by placing the -thumb on top of the die, with the first and second -fingers behind it, then tilting the die over a little -to the front, and slipping the two fingers underneath -it. After showing it on all sides, as above -mentioned, it is an easy matter to replace it with -the loose side undermost, as desired.</p> - -<p>“Now, as it happens, I have no immediate use for -dice, but I want to show you a pretty little effect -with billiard-balls. Naturally, the thing to be -done is to change the dice into billiard-balls. It’s -quite easy, if you are provided with my patent -quick-change combination dice. All you need to -think about is to take care to have even numbers -in front.” (You turn the dice accordingly, and in -so doing lift each die a little, and shift it forward -a couple of inches or so, leaving the loose side -undisturbed just behind it, the ball travelling forward -with the die, though still covered by it.) -“You don’t see why they should show even numbers? -Because they would look ‘odd’ if they -didn’t. Quite simple,—when you know it. Now -I cover all three dice over, to spare their blushes, -as I explained just now. I wave my wand over -them and say, ‘Presto! Proximo! Change!’ -And we shall find the dice have all turned to billiard-balls.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span></p> - -<p>The right hand lifts the first cover, pressing its -sides sufficiently to lift the die within it, exposing -the ball, and in bringing it down again lands it -close to one of the wells of the table. The exposed -ball is picked up with the left hand, and while the -attention of the company is attracted in that direction, -the die is allowed to slide out of its case into -the well, after which the ball and cover are brought -forward and handed to someone of the company.</p> - -<p>The other two balls are now uncovered in the -same way, but in this case the dice may be left in -their covers, the offer of the first cover, found -empty as above, having sufficiently proved that -they really disappear.</p> - -<p>“Well, we have got our three billiard-balls. -Good, so far. Next, can any gentleman oblige me -with the loan of a billiard table? Nobody offers: -that’s unfortunate. Well, does any gentleman -happen to have a cue about him. No again? -Well, perhaps it would be ‘cuerious’ if any gentleman -had. I beg your pardon, it slipped out -unawares. It shall not occur again.</p> - -<p>“It’s unfortunate that I can’t borrow a billiard -table and a cue, because it prevents my showing -you my celebrated break of ninety-three off the -red with my eyes shut. When I showed it to Gray, -he turned green, but that is another story. You -don’t believe it? Well, I told you it was a story.</p> - -<p>“Anyhow, as we have got the balls, we must do -something with them.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span></p> - -<p>The sequel may vary, according to the fancy of -the performer, and his skill in ball-conjuring. -For lack of a more effective <i>dénouement</i>, the trick -may be brought to a finish as follows:</p> - -<p>Secretly getting the shell ball into his right -hand, and picking up the red ball with the left, -the performer proceeds:</p> - -<p>“Well, here we have three balls, one red and two -white. To prevent ill feeling between them, I -think we had better make them all the same colour: -and as the white are in the majority, we will have -them all white. It is quite easy, if you know how -to do it. You have only to breathe on the ball, -give it a roll round in the hand to take the colour -off, and there you are.”</p> - -<p>After breathing on the ball, you bring the right -hand containing the shell over it, and exhibit it, -shell in front. You then transfer it in the same -condition, to the opposite hand. Then pick up one -of the two white balls with the right hand, transfer -it to the left and show the two side by side. Then -pick up and add the third ball, in so doing letting -the red ball fall into the right hand, and while -calling attention to the three in the opposite hand, -drop it into the profonde. You then bring up the -shell over one or other of the two solid white balls, -thereby transforming the three into two. Drop -the solid from the shell into the right hand, making -the two into one; finally causing the disappearance -of this last after the usual manner.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span></p> - -<p>If the reader (being an expert) is provided with -a spare red ball and red shell, he may offer the -choice as to which shall be the colour of all three, -finally causing their disappearance after the manner -above described, or his own version thereof.</p> - -<h3>WHERE IS IT?</h3> - -<p>This is another of the tricks dependent on the -novel application of the black art principle.</p> - -<p>For programme purposes the trick may, if preferred, -be entitled “The Erratic Shilling.” Its -effect may be broadly described as follows:</p> - -<p>A marked shilling, lent by some member of the -company, after being professedly magnetised or -mesmerised by rubbing, is laid upon a black velvet -mat and covered with a playing card, face down. -Two other cards are laid (also faces down), one on -each side of the first, at a few inches distance from -it, and the audience are given to understand that -the rubbing has imparted to the coin the power to -travel from card to card at command, and indeed -sometimes of its own accord. When the card -which covered the coin is lifted, this is found to be -the case. The shilling is no longer where first seen, -but is found to have placed itself under one of the -other two cards. The spectators may be invited -to say under which of the cards they would like the -coin to pass, when it will place itself accordingly.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span> -The coin may be identified by the owner in the -course of the trick, as well as at its close.</p> - -<p>The requirements for the trick are as follows:</p> - -<p>1. The velvet mat.</p> - -<p>2. A pack of cards, arranged as presently to -be explained.</p> - -<p>3. Three overlays (<a href="#Page_20">see p. 20</a>), each consisting, in -the present instance, of a court card, backed with -velvet of similar tint and texture to that with -which the mat is covered. Three of the edges of -each card are blackened, but the fourth (one of its -shorter sides) is left white, and thickened by the -insertion of an extra slip of white card along that -end. The effect of this is that, as the card lies -on the mat, its white edge is visible from that side, -but from no other position.</p> - -<p>4. Three cards, corresponding with the three -overlays, which we will suppose to represent the -queen of clubs, and the knaves of spades and diamonds -respectively. The queen is wholly unprepared, -but each of the two knaves has a point of -fine wire, or a black bristle projecting a sixteenth -of an inch or so, midway from each of its sides. -The “queen” overlay is furnished with similar -points, the object of these being to enable the performer -the more easily to lift a given card with or -without its duplicate overlay.</p> - -<p>In preparing for the trick the two “knave” -overlays, each covering a shilling, are laid beforehand -on the mat, velvet side up, eight or ten inches<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span> -apart, as shown in Fig. 11, under which circumstances -they are invisible to the spectators at a few -feet distance, and very nearly so to the performer, -save that their white edges, turned towards himself, -furnish him with an exact guide to their position. -On the top of the pack are laid, first the two -knaves. On these the queen overlay, and uppermost -the unprepared queen.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px;"> -<img src="images/figure11.jpg" width="400" height="160" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 11</span></p> -</div> - -<p>In presenting the trick the borrowed shilling -is laid on the mat midway between the two -overlays already on the table, and is covered with -the top card of the pack, the third overlay being -lifted off with it, and resting beneath it with its -centre as nearly as possible over the coin.</p> - -<p>The two following cards are now laid one on each -side of the first, as in Fig. 12, each on the corresponding -overlay, the white edges of these, visible<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span> -to the performer, but not to the company, serving -as guides to exact position. When the performer -desires to show that the coin is not under a given -card, he raises the card only, lifting it lengthwise, -and leaving the coin covered by the overlay. -When he desires to exhibit a coin, he picks up the -card covering it breadthwise between finger and -thumb and with it the overlay beneath it.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px;"> -<img src="images/figure12.jpg" width="400" height="160" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 12</span></p> -</div> - -<p>The introductory patter may run as follows:</p> - -<p>“You have all heard, no doubt, of what is called -the thimblerig trick, frequently exhibited at fairs -and on race-courses. Some of you gentlemen may -even have parted with a little money over it. For -the benefit of the ladies I will explain what it is.</p> - -<p>“The operator has before him on a small board -or tray three thimbles, or half walnut-shells. He -exhibits a small pea, or a pellet the size of a pea, -which he affectionately calls the ‘joker.’ This he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span> -places under one of the thimbles, all three of which -he then shifts about on the tray; inviting the spectators -to bet with him as to which thimble the pea -is under. He has two or three confederates, who -bet, and naturally win, but if an outsider is rash -enough to back his own supposed smartness he -loses; for as a matter of fact the pea is not placed -under either of the thimbles at all until after the -bet is made, when it is skilfully introduced under -whichever thimble best suits the performer.</p> - -<p>“The trick is in truth a mere affair of dexterity; -the performer having acquired by long practise -the power of placing the pea under any thimble -he pleases. What I propose to show you is a similar -effect, but more surprising, because, as you will -see, there is no room for dexterity, or indeed any -form of trickery; so that I have to depend entirely -upon my magic power. I shall use a shilling, as -being more easily seen than a pea, and three cards -from this pack to represent the thimbles.</p> - -<p>“Will some gentleman oblige me with the loan -of a shilling; marked in such a way that he may -be sure of knowing it again.”</p> - -<p>Receiving the coin in his right hand, the performer -makes believe to transfer it to his left; -wherein he already has a shilling of his own. -Surreptitiously depositing the coin lent to him -behind the pack of cards on the table, he exhibits -the substitute on the palm of the left hand and rubs -it with the fingers of the right.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I do this,” he explains, “in order to drive out -all adverse magnetisms, and to substitute my own. -I will now put the coin in full view on the table -and cover it with a card. See that I do so fairly.”</p> - -<p>After laying down the coin he takes the top card -of the pack, and with it, unknown to the spectators, -the overlay beneath it, and lowers them on to -the coin.</p> - -<p>“Notice particularly, please, where I have -placed the coin, and notice too that I do not touch -it again. I will now place two more cards, one on -each side of the first one.” He does so, letting the -spectators see clearly that there is nothing in the -hand save the card itself, and then slowly lowering -it exactly on to one of the two overlays on the -table. “Now I make a few magnetic passes over -the cards, so.” He waves his wand backwards and -forwards above the cards, at a few inches’ distance.</p> - -<p>“And now, where is the coin? Still under the -middle card, you would say? You are mistaken.” -He lifts that card lengthwise, leaving the overlay -covering the coin; then replacing the card. “It is -no longer there, you see. In point of fact it has -passed under this card.”</p> - -<p>He lifts one of the side cards breadthwise, the -overlay coming with it, and exposes the coin -beneath it. “Here it is, you see. We will try -once more.” He replaces the card and then shows, -in like manner, that the coin has passed to the -card on the opposite side. After one or two transpositions<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span> -have been shown, the audience being -allowed to say under which card the coin shall -appear, and the last shift having been to one of -the side positions, the performer says: “I should -like you to be satisfied that it is really the marked -coin and no other, that wanders about in this way. -I will ask the gentleman who lent it to me to verify -his mark.”</p> - -<p>He picks up from one of the side positions the -coin last uncovered and brings it forward, but in -transit “switches” it for the borrowed coin, which -he has a moment previously picked up from its -resting place behind the pack. It is, of course, -this last which he offers for identification, again -exchanging it for the substitute before replacing -this in its former position. The final reproduction -must be from under the centre card, the performer -again ringing the changes before returning -the coin to the owner. At the close of the trick all -three cards are placed on the pack, the centre overlay -going with them. The other two overlays are -left on the mat, each still covering its own coin, -and the whole being carried off together. If the -mat is of the folding kind it can be closed before -removal, effectually concealing the accessories -used in the trick.</p> - -<p>Some amount of skill will be found necessary -to pick up the card with or without the corresponding -overlay, as may be desired. The difficulty -however speedily disappears with practice. On<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span> -the other hand, the trick is well worth the trouble -needed to master it, for if the spectators are convinced -(as, given perfect execution, they should -be) that it is really the borrowed coin which travels -about as it appears to do, nothing short of genuine -magic will furnish an adequate explanation.</p> - -<p>The performer is of course by no means bound -to adopt the <i>mise en scène</i> above suggested. If -preferred, the patter might be based on a supposed -plot between the two knaves to rob the queen, the -coin representing the stolen property, secretly -passed from the one to the other when either was -accused of the theft. The story might conclude -with an appeal by the queen to a benevolent -magician, through whose good offices her property -is brought back to its original position, and in due -course restored to her. The touch of the mystic -wand would naturally play an important part in -effecting the restoration.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="CARD_TRICKS">CARD TRICKS</h2> - -<h3>ARITHMETIC BY MAGIC</h3> - -<p><i>Preparation.</i> The two “flower-pots” (<a href="#Page_5">see page -5</a>), separated, are placed upon the table. Also the -card mat (<a href="#Page_1">see page 1</a>), loaded with the <i>ten</i> of any -given suit, say diamonds, taken from the pack performer -is about to use, and a double-faced card, -representing on the one side the seven, and on the -other the three of the same suit. The deuce and -five of same suit to be laid on the top of the pack.</p> - -<p>Performer, advancing pack in hand, palms off -the two top cards, and offers the rest to be shuffled. -This done, he forces these two cards on different -persons. On receiving back one of them, he brings -it to the top; executes a false shuffle leaving it in -the same position; brings it again to the middle by -the pass, and has the second card replaced upon it; -then, once again making the pass, brings both -together to the top.</p> - -<p>(The use of the Charlier pass is here recommended.)</p> - -<p>The patter may be to something like the following -effect: “Two cards have been chosen, ladies -and gentlemen. I can’t say what they are, but I -can very easily find out. I shall simply order<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span> -them to rise up and paw the air. It all depends on -the strength of the will. I myself happen to have -a very strong will, in fact, I don’t know anyone -who has a stronger will, except my wife. I exert -my will, and say, ‘first card, rise!’ and up it comes, -as you see.”</p> - -<p>Stepping well back from the spectators, so that -they cannot distinguish from what part of the pack -the card comes, he works up the hindmost card -by the familiar “hand” method. (“Modern -Magic,” p. 129.)</p> - -<p>“Here we have one of the two cards. Let us see -what it is. The five of diamonds! Good! And -now for the other. Second card; rise! Up comes -another card, you see, the deuce of diamonds. -Those are the cards which were drawn, are they -not?</p> - -<p>“Now the question arises, ‘what shall we do with -them?’ It is a pity the ladies didn’t choose bigger -cards. You can’t ‘go nap’<a name="FNanchor_6" id="FNanchor_6"></a><a href="#Footnote_6" class="fnanchor">[6]</a> on a deuce and a five, -can you? I think I can’t do better than use them -to show you a little experiment in conjurer’s arithmetic. -Will some young mathematician among -the audience kindly tell us what two and five, added -together, make?” (He waits for reply, but if -none, pretends to hear one.) “Seven! Right -first time. And if you take two from five how -many remain? Three? Good again. Really<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span> -there are lot of clever people about, if you know -where to look for them.</p> - -<p>“Now I want to show you that the cards know -all about it themselves; in fact, they are just as -clever at doing sums as we are. I will take these -two cards and drop them into one of these pretty -flower-pots. Let me show you first that it is quite -empty.”</p> - -<p>He lays the cards on the little mat while showing -inside of flower-pot (the one with secret -pocket), then picks up mat, and transfers it from -hand to hand, showing, without remark, that the -hands are otherwise empty, and lets the two cards -slide off it into the flower-pot, the concealed cards -naturally going with them.</p> - -<p>“Now, ladies and gentlemen, what shall the cards -do for you, the addition, or the subtraction sum? -It is all the same to me. The addition? Very -good. They can’t talk, so they will call another -card from the pack to give you the answer. Yes, -here we have it. Five—and two—are—seven.”</p> - -<p>As he names each card, he produces it from the -flower-pot, the third being the double-faced card, -shown as the seven.</p> - -<p>“Now I can hear what some of you are thinking. -Oh, yes! I often hear what people think. You -are thinking that if you had said subtraction -instead of addition, I should have been in what is -popularly called a hole. But you are mistaken. -Now we will ask the cards to do the subtraction<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span> -sum. The seven will go back to the pack, and send -another card in its place.” He drops all three -cards back into the flower-pot, and brings them up -as before, save that this time the trick card is made -to face the other way. “<i>Five</i>—less <i>two</i>—are -<i>three! Quod erat demonstrandum</i>, as our old -friend Euclid used to say when he had just floored -a new poser. As the cards seem to be in a good -humour, we will try them once more, and see if we -can get them to do a little multiplication.” (He -drops the three cards into the flower-pot, as before, -but this time lets the fake card fall into -the pocket.) “Five times—two—are ‘ten.’” -(Showing the two cards and the ten, in that order.)</p> - -<p>“Now I will ask some gentleman to see that these -three cards really belong to the pack. The three -and seven went back to it as soon as they were done -with. The flower-pot, as you see, is again empty.” -(He shows by lifting it that apparently it is so.)</p> - -<p>If the first choice of the audience is for subtraction -the order of production will naturally be -varied accordingly.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_6" id="Footnote_6"></a><a href="#FNanchor_6"><span class="label">[6]</span></a> To endeavor to take all five tricks in the game of Napoleon.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<h3>THOSE NAUGHTY KNAVES</h3> - -<p>This item may be described, if preferred, as -“Knavish Tricks.”</p> - -<p><i>Requirements.</i> Card mat loaded with knaves of -spades, hearts and diamonds, taken from the pack -in use. Knave of clubs on top of pack.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span></p> - -<p><i>Presentation.</i> Advance, palming off the knave -of clubs, and offer pack to be shuffled. When it is -returned, force the knave on one of the company. -Borrow a hat, and after showing that it is empty, -place it, crown downwards, on the table. Receive -back the drawn card upon the mat, remarking that -you will place it in the hat, which you do accordingly, -the other three knaves going in with it. -Then, assuming a worried expression, deliver patter -to something like the following effect.</p> - -<p>“I am afraid, ladies and gentlemen, that I shall -not be able to show you the experiment I had -intended. I have a telepathic nerve in my left -thumb, a sort of private fire alarm, only more so, -which always gives me warning when things are -going wrong, and I feel it now. If you have read -‘Macbeth,’ you will remember that one of the -witches says:</p> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">‘By the pricking of my thumbs,</div> -<div class="verse">Something wicked this way comes.’</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<p>“I have often wondered whether that old lady -could have been a sort of great-great-great grandmother -of mine. Magic certainly runs in the -family, and we may have inherited it from her. -Anyhow, I have just the same sort of sensation -myself. Unfortunately, in my case the warning is -incomplete. I dare say you will remember that -story (I rather think it’s in Macaulay’s ‘Lays of -Ancient Rome’), about Little Queen Cole. Her<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span> -Majesty had the misfortune to develop a mole upon -her nose, and King Cole was worried about it. He -consulted Old Moore and Zadkiel, and all the leading -astrologers of the day, but all they could tell -him was</p> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">‘A mole upon the face</div> -<div class="verse">Shows that something will take place,</div> -<div class="verse">But not what that something will be.’</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<p>That’s just my case. My prophetic thumb merely -tells me that something is wrong, but doesn’t say -what. It may be drains, or the house on fire, or -something in the county court. You never can -tell!</p> - -<p>“Of course it’s nothing of that sort now. In -the present case it has no doubt something to do -with the experiment I want to show you. You -chose your card quite freely, did you not, Madam? -It never matters to me in the least what card is -chosen, with the exception of one particular card, -which is a holy terror. May I ask if you happened -to draw the knave of clubs? Yes? I feared as -much. The knave of clubs is the bane of my life. -He is always endeavouring to get himself chosen, -and then he does his best to upset my arrangements. -And the worst of it is, he leads away the -other three knaves. The four of them form a -secret society, which they call ‘The cheerful blackguards.’ -The knave of clubs is the president, and -the rest have to do just as he tells them. He communicates<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span> -with them by means of a sort of wireless -telegraphy, and when he calls they go to him -at once.” (You here make the “click.”) “Did -you hear that sound? That’s his call now, -despatched by wireless from the hat to the very -middle of the pack. I have no doubt that we shall -find that the other three knaves have already left it, -and joined him in the hat.” (Make believe to look -over the pack, and hand it to a spectator.) “Yes! -just as I thought: they are all gone.” (To a spectator.) -“See for yourself, sir. Not a single -knave left. And here they all are, in the hat.” -(Whence they are produced accordingly.)</p> - -<p>As the “click” in some cases adds much to the -effect of a trick, and as it may to some readers be -an unfamiliar sleight, I may pause to explain that -it is executed as follows: Take the pack in either -hand, held upright between forefinger and thumb, -a little more than halfway down, with the middle -finger curled up behind it as in Fig. 13. With the -tip of the third finger bend back the extreme bottom -corners of the last half dozen or so of the -cards, allowing them to escape again smartly. -The sound made by the corners in springing back -again constitutes the “click.” It needs a little -practice, but if the cards are held properly, and -the sleight worked smartly, the sound will be -audible at a considerable distance, whilst the movement -of the finger producing it is quite invisible -to the spectators.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 235px;"> -<img src="images/figure13.jpg" width="235" height="300" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 13</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span></p> - -<p>But we have not yet done with our trick. You -may resume as follows:</p> - -<p>“I will give you a further illustration of what I -have to put up with from the knaves. I should -like you to be satisfied that I have nothing to do -with their bad behaviour.” (You palm off the -three top cards, and with the same hand offer the -four knaves to a spectator.) “Will you, sir, make -sure that these really are the four knaves, and then -place them here on the top of the pack,”—offered<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span> -with the left hand. When the knaves have been -laid upon it, you transfer it to the opposite hand, -and palm on to them the three concealed cards, -but immediately slide them off again, with the -uppermost of the four knaves beneath them. You -hold them up in a careless way, so that the -audience, catching sight of this card, may be confirmed -in the belief that the cards exhibited in the -right hand are really the four knaves.</p> - -<p>“Here we have the four knaves, at present all -together. I will now distribute them in different -parts of the pack, as far apart as possible. One -here, nearly at the bottom, one a little higher up, -another about the middle, and this last” (you show -it carelessly), “close to the top.” (This, being a -genuine knave, must be placed among the other -knaves.) “They could hardly be placed farther -apart than that: but to make things a little more -difficult for them, I will ask some lady to cut the -cards.”</p> - -<p>This done, and the cards handed back to you, -you repeat the click. “There it is again: the wireless -signal. You can all bear witness that I have -nothing to do with the matter. Now, Sir, will you -kindly examine the pack, and unless I am much -mistaken, you will find that the other three knaves -have answered Black Jack’s call, and that the four -cheerful blackguards have got together again, in -which case, with your permission, I will leave them -severely alone, and try some other experiment.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span></p> - -<p>The expert will recognise this last effect as a -“chestnut” among card tricks, but it is none the -worse on that account, and it forms a particularly -appropriate sequel to the principal trick.</p> - -<p>If the performer possesses the “flower-pot,” one -of these will naturally be used in place of the hat.</p> - -<h3>MAGNETIC MAGIC</h3> - -<p><i>Requirements.</i> Card mat, loaded with a single -known card (precise nature optional). Pack of -cards with corresponding card at top. A horseshoe -magnet, the larger the better for the sake of -effect. The two flower-pots, placed at some distance -apart, preferably on separate tables.</p> - -<p>We will suppose that the card selected for the -purpose of the trick is the ten of spades. Performer -advances, and delivers patter to something -like the following effect.</p> - -<p>“By way of a change, I should like now to show -you a little experiment in magnetism, but magnetism -of a new kind. The old sort was a comparatively -poor affair. It was only useful with -iron or steel. Anything else it wouldn’t attract -for nuts. My sort of magnetism is a very superior -article. It will attract all sorts of things, so long -as they are not too heavy, like a sack of coals, or a -lawyer’s bill. So far, I have been chiefly experimenting -with cards, and I will show you how it -works.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I want three ladies each to choose a card from -this pack.” (He forces the ten of spades, allowing -the other two cards to be chosen freely, and -takes all three back, face down, on the mat, keeping -in mind which of them is the forced card.) “I -will take one of these cards.” (He picks up the -forced card, and holds it aloft.) “Please all -notice what it is: I don’t want to see it myself. I -drop it into this pretty flower-pot” (actually dropping -it into the secret pocket). “And now as to -these other two.” (He picks them up and shows -them, then replacing them on the mat.) “These -I will place in the other flower-pot. First, however, -I will show you that at present it is empty.” -He does so, and then lets the two cards slide off -the mat into the pot, the concealed card going with -them.</p> - -<p>“Now I take this magnet. It is a very powerful -magnet, and I make it still more vigorous by -rubbing it on my left coat sleeve. Do you know -why on the left? You all give it up? Because in -this case the left happens to be right. Simple, -when you know it, isn’t it? Again, you will -observe that one-half of this magnet is painted -red. Can you guess why that is? It’s so that -when it is wanted it is sure to be ‘reddy.’ I hear -a lady smile! Thank you <i>so</i> much! This is the -eleven hundred and third time I have let off that -little impromptu joke, and no one has ever laughed -at it till now.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span></p> - -<p>“Well, as I was saying, or as I was going to say -when the lady interrupted me—I mean complimented -me, by smiling—Upon my word, I’ve forgotten -for the moment what I <i>was</i> going to say, but -I daresay it was of no consequence, so we’ll skip -it, and proceed at once to ‘business as usual.’</p> - -<p>“Observe, I just draw the magnet slowly across -from the one flower-pot to the other, when the -single card, being naturally the weaker, will be -drawn out of its own flower-pot, and join the other -two.” (Looks into flower-pot holding the pair.)</p> - -<p>“Yes, it has found its way, as you see.” (Lifts -the pot, and shows that the third card is on the table -with the other two.) “And as it’s a well-known -fact that nobody but a bird can be in two places at -the same time, it naturally follows that it is no -longer in this other pot, which is once more -empty.” (Lifts it up and shows that it is so.)</p> - -<p><i>Variation.</i> If the flower-pots are not available, -the single card may be placed in a card box, or -other suitable appliance adapted for causing its -disappearance, the other two, with the concealed -card, being dropped from the mat into a borrowed -hat.</p> - -<h3>THE TELEPATHIC TAPE</h3> - -<p><i>Requirements.</i> Two or three yards of half-inch -tape or ribbon, wound on a reel, to which its inner -end is secured, and having a loop on its outer end. -Coin mat made adhesive, and two packs of cards,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span> -which we will call A and B respectively. From -pack A take a court card (say the queen of diamonds), -and press it face down against the waxed -side of the mat: then turn this over, and place the -rest of the pack upon its unprepared side. On the -top of pack B lay the corresponding card, in readiness -for forcing. This pack also to be placed on -table.</p> - -<p><i>Presentation.</i> Advance with pack A on the mat. -Invite a gentleman to take it in his own hands -and after shuffling, to pick out a card, and without -looking at it, lay it face down on the mat. Remark: -“I have asked you not to look at the card, -because I find people fancy I find out by what is -called thought-reading, and if you don’t know the -card yourself, I can’t find it out that way, can I? -You are sure you don’t know what card you have -taken? I can honestly say that I don’t. Now -please notice that I don’t look at it, or even touch -it—I will place it here, where you can all keep an -eye on it. You had better keep the other eye on -me.”</p> - -<p>You accordingly place the mat on the table, in -transit keeping the card just laid upon it in place -by the pressure of the thumb, and just as you -reach the table, under cover of your own body, turn -over the mat, so as to bring the adhering card -uppermost.</p> - -<p>You then say, picking up the reel, “I must now -introduce to your notice my telepathic tape. Like<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span> -myself, it isn’t anything particular to look at, but -it has an extraordinary talent for finding out -things; even secrets that people don’t know themselves. -Now you will admit that the name of that -card on the table is at present an A1, copperbottomed -secret. Even the gentleman who chose the -card doesn’t know what it is; you don’t know; -in fact nobody knows. Nothing could well be more -secret than that. But this tape will find it out. -Will you, Sir,”—(addressing the gentleman who -chose the card) “be kind enough to pass this loop -over your left little finger. Thank you, and now -I want some lady to assist me. Perhaps you will -oblige, Madam?” A sufficient length of the tape -is unrolled, and the reel placed in the lady’s hands. -“And now I will ask you to do me the further -favor of taking a card from this other pack.” -(The second queen is forced on the lady.)</p> - -<p>“Now, Madam, what was the card the gentleman -chose? You don’t know? Oh, yes, you do. The -tape has told you. Unless it has betrayed me for -the first time in my experience, it will have compelled -you by an effect of sympathy to draw the -very same kind of card as the one freely chosen, as -you will remember from the other pack. What -card did you draw? The queen of diamonds?” -(Goes to table, and turns up card on tray.) “The -tape was right, you see. The card the gentleman -drew is also a queen of diamonds.”</p> - -<p>In default of the card mat, the trick can be<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span> -equally well performed by the aid of the card-box, -or any other appliance for “changing” a card.</p> - -<h3>A CARD COMEDY</h3> - -<p>This may be otherwise described for programme -purposes as “A Royal Row,” or “A Row in a -Royal Family.”</p> - -<p><i>Preparation.</i> Card mat loaded with two kings -of hearts: one of them taken from the pack -to be used: the other a spare card. The king of -clubs and queen of hearts to be laid on top of pack. -The two flower-pots on table.</p> - -<p><i>Presentation.</i> Advancing to the company, palm -off the two top cards, and hand the pack to be -shuffled. This done, force the palmed cards on -two different persons. Then say, “I want you to -take notice that I do not handle or tamper in any -way with either of the cards you have chosen. -Please lay them yourselves face down on this mat. -Thank you. Now still without touching them I -will put them temporarily in this elegant flower-pot, -which you observe is quite empty. You see -that it has neither top nor bottom, and nothing -between. You couldn’t have anything much -emptier than that, could you?”</p> - -<p>Having duly exhibited the flower-pot (this by -the way must be the one <i>without</i> pocket) you let -the two drawn cards slide off the mat into it, the -two concealed kings going with them. Then,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span> -assuming a perplexed air, you say, “I don’t know -why it is, but I have that peculiar sensation in -my left thumb that always means that something -has gone wrong. What it is in this case I can’t -imagine, but I must find out before we go further. -As the two chosen cards have passed out of my -hands, I may now ask the ladies who drew them -to name them.</p> - -<p>“The queen of hearts and the king of clubs, you -say? Ah! that accounts for it. When those two -cards come together there is sure to be trouble. -The queen of hearts is a bit of a flirt, and the king -of hearts is very jealous, particularly of the king -of clubs, who is rather a gay dog, though he is old -enough to know better. I fancy I hear some sort -of commotion going on in the flower-pot.” (You -look into it.) “Yes, it is just as I feared. The -king of hearts has found out that his queen has gone -off with the king of clubs, and has followed the -queen post-haste. Here he is, you see.” (You -plunge hand into flower-pot, and take out and -exhibit the two drawn cards, and with them one of -the two kings of hearts.) “It’s too bad, for as a -matter of fact the queen of hearts doesn’t really -care two-pence about the king of clubs. In fact -she has even been known to call him a giddy old -kipper.</p> - -<p>“But I can’t have my arrangements upset by -these little family jars. To teach the king of -hearts better manners I shall put him in solitary<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span> -confinement. We will drop him into the other -flower-pot, which, as you see, is also empty.” -(The card is in this case not dropped through the -pot, but into the pocket.)</p> - -<p>“Now we shall be able to get on. No! my left -thumb tells me that there is still something not -quite right.” (Glance into second flower-pot.) -“Upon my word, this is too bad. The king of -hearts has already got away and followed the -queen again.” (Lift flower-pot, and show that the -king has disappeared.) “I thought I had him -safe, but his prison, as you see, is empty, and here -he is again in the first flower-pot.” (Show the -three cards accordingly.) “He is too many for -me; I can’t show you what I had intended. I must -give it up and try something else.”</p> - -<p><i>Variation.</i> Load mat with a single king of -hearts and the queen of clubs, the latter taken from -the pack. Proceed as before up to the putting of -the king in prison, and then exhibit the queen of -clubs, as having come in pursuit of her spouse, the -patter being modified accordingly. The imprisoned -king of hearts will still be found to have -escaped, but in this case to have returned to the -pack.</p> - -<p>For lack of the two flower-pots, the drawn cards -may be dropped with the concealed pair into a borrowed -hat, and the jealous king made to escape -from a card-box, or some similar appliance.</p> - -<p><i>Apropos</i> of the card-box, by the way, I have<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span> -always had a sort of affection for this in its oldest -and simplest form, viz., the reversible flat box with -loose flap falling from the one into the other half -at pleasure. I should not recommend the use of -it at a school treat, as there would be much risk -of some demon small boy proclaiming to all whom -it might concern that he “knows how that’s done,” -but before an average mixed audience its use is -safe enough. Should one of the spectators happen -to be acquainted with the box he will probably -smile in a superior way, pluming himself on having -a little inside information, though he may be no -nearer the complete solution of the trick than the -rest of the company.</p> - -<p>The expert will easily guard himself against -even this small risk. For example, he may use a -duplicate box, innocent of guile, ostensibly merely -to contain the cards he is about to use, and after -turning the pack out of it upon the table, switch -this (obviously empty) box for the faked box to be -used later, or after using the latter he may extract -the fake and the superseded card during the journey -back to his table, where the box will of course -be inspection-proof.</p> - -<p>Better still, he may make matters absolutely safe -by using an improved box, which has been christened -the “Fast and Loose” card-box. This is a -recent invention of an Italian wizard named -Veroni, of Glasgow (an old soldier of Garibaldi). -It is an idealised version of the old flat box, being<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span> -of the same shape, but a trifle larger. The loose -slab is retained, but it is only loose when the performer -desires it to be so. The box may be -handled beforehand with the utmost freedom, and -after a card has been placed in it it may be closed -and re-opened any number of times, nothing happening -till, “Presto,” a mere touch in the right -place, and the flap is free. When the box is now -closed, this falls into the opposite portion, concealing -the card, or producing another; and again -locking itself, automatically, in its new position. -The box in this condition will again stand the -closest scrutiny.</p> - -<p>Whether this box is yet placed upon the market -I cannot say (having myself been favoured with a -sight of an “advance” model), but it will certainly -commend itself to all who appreciate a good thing -in the way of ingenuity of contrivance and -mechanical finish.</p> - -<h3>A ROYAL TUG OF WAR</h3> - -<p><i>Preparation.</i> Card mat to be loaded with king -of hearts and king of diamonds, <i>not</i> taken from -the pack in use. Flower-pots on table.</p> - -<p>Performer advances with ordinary pack, delivering -patter to something like the following effect. -“It is not generally known, ladies and gentlemen, -what a lot of human nature there is about a pack -of cards. They have their likes and dislikes, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span> -their little tempers, just as we have. Some of -them are bosom friends; others again hate each -other like rival suitors to the same best girl. The -four kings are generally pretty friendly, but there -is a good deal of emulation between them, particularly -between the two red kings on the one -hand, and the two black ones on the other. Each -pair claims to be the stronger, and they are always -pleased to have a chance of putting the matter to -the test.</p> - -<p>“I will give you an illustration of this, by allowing -them to hold a little tug of war. They have -already had six trials, and each side has won three -of them. This evening we will let them play a -final game, which is to settle the matter. Will you, -sir, kindly pick out the four kings for me, and lay -them on this little tray. Thank you!” (This -done, performer lays mat with cards on table.)</p> - -<p>“I will drop the two red kings into this flower-pot.” -He takes them from the mat and after -showing them drops them into the flower-pot (in -reality into the pocket), “and the black ones into -this other.” (The black kings are allowed to slide -directly off the mat, into the flower-pot, the concealed -pair going with them.) “Are your Majesties -ready? Silence gives consent! Then Go!”</p> - -<p>He waits a moment or two, and then looks over -into the flower-pot with the pocket. “Nothing has -happened yet. Yes, there goes the king of diamonds, -pulled over to the other side. There’s not<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span> -much chance now for the poor king of hearts, left -single-handed. He won’t hold out long. Yes! -Now he is gone too.”</p> - -<p>Performer lifts flower-pot, with fingers inside -pressing against pocket, and shows it apparently -empty. “And here, in the other flower-pot” (lifts -it and shows the four cards lying together on -table) “are all four Kings. One more score to -black. You didn’t see the cards go? Of course -you didn’t; because they fly horizontally, like the -aeroplanes, and they go so fast that they get there -almost before they have started.”</p> - -<h3>SYMPATHETIC CARDS</h3> - -<p><i>Preparation.</i> Card mat loaded with two cards -of different denomination, say the queen of clubs -and the knave of diamonds, <i>taken from the pack</i>. -Flower-pots on table.</p> - -<p><i>Presentation.</i> Force the corresponding cards -of same colour (in this case the queen of spades -and the knave of hearts), lay the pack aside, and -take the drawn cards back face down on the mat, -leaving them thus on table till needed. The patter -may run as follows:</p> - -<p>“As I think I have mentioned before, the cards -of a pack, from long association, become a sort of -family. They have their likes and dislikes, just -as human beings have. In particular, there is a -curious bond of sympathy between each pair of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span> -the same colour, say the king of hearts and the king -of diamonds, or the ten of clubs and ten of spades. -If they are parted, and they possibly can, they will -get together again.</p> - -<p>“I will try to give you an example with the cards -that have been drawn. We will put them for the -moment in this pretty flower-pot, which, as you see, -is quite empty.” (Show by lifting it up, that it is -so, and then drop the two cards from the mat into -it, the concealed pair going with them.) “They -will only require to be assisted by a gentle electric -current, which I shall create by waving my wand, -so.</p> - -<p>“Before we go any further, will the ladies who -drew the cards say what they were,—I don’t mind -asking you now, because they have passed out of -my control. The queen of spades and the knave -of hearts, you say? A fortunate choice, for the -queen of spades and the knave of hearts happen to -be particular friends, so I think we may now be -sure of success. Now to establish the wireless -wave, and I doubt not the queen of clubs and the -knave of diamonds will speedily find them. -(Make any appropriate gesture with wand.)</p> - -<p>“Did you notice a little flash, like the striking -of a very inferior lucifer match in a gale of wind? -That’s when they went. Quick work, isn’t it? -The cards were timed by two gentlemen one evening, -each with his own watch. By the one gentleman’s -watch they started at one minute past nine,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span> -and by the other gentleman’s watch, they arrived -at one minute <i>to</i> nine, so it is clear that they must -have made the journey in two minutes less than no -time. But let us make sure that they have -arrived.” Lift the flower-pot, and show the four -cards lying on the table together. “And now, to -convince you that there is no deception, will some -lady or gentleman kindly look through the pack, -and make sure that the queen of clubs and knave -of diamonds have really left it.” Which is found -to be the case.</p> - -<p>The trick may of course be worked with any two -pairs of cards, the mat being loaded and the corresponding -cards forced accordingly.</p> - -<h3>TELL-TALE FINGERS</h3> - -<p>The discovery, in some more or less mysterious -way, of an unknown card is one of the stock feats -of the conjurer, and indeed in one shape or another -is one of the most hackneyed of card tricks. But -the wise magician never discards a good trick simply -because it is an old one. He repolishes it, adds -a bit here, takes away a bit there, presents it in a -new shape and with new patter, and behold! the -“chestnut” of yesterday becomes a latest novelty -of today.</p> - -<p>To obtain the maximum effect from a trick of the -above kind, it is necessary in the first place to convince -the spectator that the drawn card cannot possibly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span> -be known beforehand to the performer; and -in the second place to persuade him that it is discovered -in some actually impossible (and therefore -magical) way; taking advantage, where possible, -of some known scientific truth which may lend -colour to your suggestion. It is surprising, in conjuring -matters, how much even the smallest percentage -of fact increases the power of the average -spectator for swallowing fiction. The patter for -the trick which follows has been arranged upon -these lines.</p> - -<p>The requisites for the trick are a pack of cards -from which three known cards have been withdrawn -and palmed (or so placed to be in instant -readiness for palming), a hand-mirror, and a silk -handkerchief.</p> - -<p>The introductory oration may run somewhat as -follows:</p> - -<p>“You all know, ladies and gentlemen, what an -important part finger-prints now play in the detection -of crime. Happily there is no connection -between conjuring and crime, beyond the fact that -they both begin with a <i>C</i>. No conjurer that I -know of has ever murdered anybody or been murdered -himself, and when a conjurer borrows a half-crown, -he always—well, almost always returns it. -But each one of us, whether criminal or curate, -burglar or bishop, possesses a definite set of finger-prints, -quite unlike those of anybody else. And, -what is more, we cannot touch anything, ever so<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span> -lightly, without leaving upon it our sign manual -in the shape of a more or less perfect impression -of our fingers, imperceptible to ourselves, but quite -visible to the expert in such matters.</p> - -<p>“Practice in distinguishing such points forms -a highly interesting study. Of course it must be -pursued with a proper amount of tact, or it may -get you into trouble, as in the case of a gentleman -I once heard of who took up the study with more -zeal than discretion. He said to his wife, not leading -up to the subject gently, as he should have done, -but in a peremptory sort of way, ‘Maria, I want -your finger-prints.’ Unfortunately, Maria was -rather a quick-tempered lady, and she had just -been having a few words, of a hostile nature, with -the cook. She slapped his face, and said, ‘Well, -now you’ve got ’em.’ He had! They were very -distinct, but not quite in the shape he wanted. I -am going to ask permission to read some of your -finger-prints, but, I trust without fear of such -painful results.</p> - -<p>“In the first place, I should like this pack of -cards to be thoroughly well shuffled.”</p> - -<p>While this is done, performer palms the three -known cards, and when the pack is returned, proceeds -to force them on different members of the -company. Each of the drawers is requested to -allow his or her card to lie for a few moments face -down on the palm of the outspread hand. The -cards drawn are then returned to the pack, which<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span> -is again shuffled, and spread face upward on the -table.</p> - -<p>“Each of the three cards which have been drawn -now has a complete set of finger-prints upon its -surface, but there are no doubt others on many -other cards, the result of previous handling. To -enable me to distinguish the right ones, I must ask -each person who chose a card to give me, for the -purpose of comparison, a fresh impression, on -the glass of this mirror. First, however, we -must remove any prints that may already be upon -it.”</p> - -<p>He accordingly breathes upon the glass, and -wipes it carefully with the handkerchief.</p> - -<p>“Now, Sir” (to the person who first drew), “will -you kindly press your hand flat against the glass. -Thank you. Not a very clear impression, but I -dare say it will be good enough. I have now only -to discover the card bearing the same imprint, and -I shall know that it was the one you drew.” (He -picks it out from the exposed cards on the table.) -“Here it is, I think, the —— of ——” (as the case -may be).</p> - -<p>The other two cards are then discovered after -the same fashion. As the performer knows -beforehand what they are, this will give him little -trouble, but he will be wise, for the sake of effect, -not to discover them too readily. For the same -reason, great importance should ostensibly be -attached to the thorough cleaning of the hand mirror<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span> -before each new attempt, so as to get a clear -impression.</p> - -<p>The trick as above described can be worked with -any pack of cards, but where those used are the -performer’s own property, he can make it even -more effective by marking the three cards to be -freed in such a way as to be distinguishable (by -himself only) by their backs. The drawers in this -case are requested to press their hand against the -<i>back</i> of the card, and the cards are spread face -down upon the table, the performer apparently not -knowing the nature of the card indicated to him -until he has turned it up.</p> - -<h3>DIVINATION DOUBLY DIFFICULT</h3> - -<p>This trick, though it merely rests upon a combination -of methods already familiar to the expert, -may as a whole fairly claim to be a complete novelty. -The <i>mise en scène</i> is so simple, and the -room for deception apparently so small, that to the -uninitiated it seems like a genuine miracle. -Unlike most card tricks, it is even better adapted -to the stage than to the drawing-room.</p> - -<p>The effect of the trick, baldly stated, is that the -performer divines the nature of nine cards, -selected apparently quite haphazard, and then -picks out the corresponding cards from another -pack, freely shuffled and covered by a handkerchief.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span></p> - -<p>The requirements for the trick consist of two -packs of cards, and an envelope with adhesive flap, -of such a size as to accommodate one of them. One -of the two packs is a “forcing” pack, consisting of -three cards only, each seventeen times repeated. -The cards of each kind are however not grouped -all together, as is usually the case, but are arranged -after the manner explained in <i>More Magic</i> (p. 13), -viz.: assuming the three cards to be the knave of -clubs, the seven of spades, and the nine of diamonds, -the pack will consist of groups of those -three cards, in the same order, repeated throughout. -The effect of this arrangement is that, -wherever the pack be cut, the three cards above -or below the cut will always be a set of those three -cards: and the same result follows, however many -times the pack may be cut, or however many such -groups may have been taken from it.</p> - -<p>The second pack has no preparation, but the -three cards corresponding to those of which the -forcing pack is composed are so placed as to be -ready to hand for palming.</p> - -<p>The performer advances with the forcing pack, -meanwhile executing a false shuffle of the kind -which leaves the pack as if cut, but otherwise -undisturbed as to order. Holding the pack on the -outstretched palm of his left hand, he invites someone -to cut it. This done, he takes back with the -other hand the upper portion of the cut, and says, -“You have cut where you pleased, have you not?<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span> -If you think I made cut at that particular point, -you can cut again. You are satisfied? Then I -will ask you to be good enough to take three cards -from the top of this lower heap. Keep them carefully. -Don’t let me see them: in fact don’t show -them just yet to anyone, but please remember -exactly what they are.” He replaces the top half -of the cut, and passing to another spectator, at -some little distance from the first, has the pack cut -again, and a second three cards taken in like manner. -This is repeated with a third person, just far -enough away from the second as to preclude any -possibility of the three drawers comparing their -cards.</p> - -<p>“Now, ladies and gentlemen, you must all agree -that I have not sought to influence the choice of -these gentlemen” (or ladies, as the case may be) -“in the slightest degree, and it must be equally -clear to you that I cannot possibly know even one -of the cards that have been chosen. To make sure -that I do not get sight of them in any way, we will -have them placed, with the remainder of the pack, -in this envelope.” He collects the cards accordingly, -allowing each person who drew to replace -his cards himself in the envelope, and requesting -the last person to moisten the flap, and make all -secure.</p> - -<p>Returning to his table, he places the closed -envelope in full view. “I shall now want the -assistance of some gentleman. Thank you, sir.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span> -Will you kindly shuffle this other pack for me.” -(He runs the cards over fanwise, showing their -faces, so as to prove that they are an ordinary -mixed pack: then hands them to be shuffled, and -while this is being done, palms the three secreted -cards.) “Shuffle them thoroughly, please, and then -spread them a little, faces down, upon the table, -and lay your handkerchief over them.</p> - -<p>“Now I am going, in the first place, to attempt -a little thought-reading. I shall endeavour by -that means to discover the three cards each person -chose, and then, by means of the sense of touch, -which I have cultivated to a rather unusual degree, -to pick them out, without seeing them, from among -the cards under the handkerchief. I shall only -ask one indulgence. To leave a little margin for -possible mistakes. I shall ask your permission to -pick out four cards instead of three for each person, -so as to give me one extra chance. Will the -gentleman who drew first kindly look my way, and -say to himself slowly, the names of the cards he -drew. Thank you, Sir! I think I read them -right.” He inserts his hand under the handkerchief, -and after a little pretended fumbling, brings -out the three palmed cards, with one indifferent -card in front of them. He does not show or look -at them, but asks the second chooser to think hard -of his three cards, afterwards taking four more -from under the handkerchief. Having done the -same in the case of the third drawer, he spreads<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span> -the twelve cards he has taken from under the handkerchief, -and shows them fanwise. Addressing -the first drawer, he says, “Your three cards are -among these, I think, sir?” and the same question -is then addressed to the other two choosers, the -answer being of course in the affirmative.</p> - -<p>“Now, gentlemen, in order to prove that there -is no deception, I will take away three cards at a -time, one from each set of three. Pray observe -that from beginning to end, I have not looked at -the face of any card.” He accordingly removes -one of the forced, and two of the indifferent cards, -making however some pretence of selection and -throws them aside. “There are now only two -cards belonging to each gentleman left. That is -so, is it not?”</p> - -<p>The question is addressed to each of the three -drawers in turn, and answered accordingly, after -which the same process is again twice repeated.</p> - -<p>“And now, gentlemen, we have three cards left, -belonging to neither of you, which is just as it -should be. It is a peculiarity of this experiment -that if it comes out right it always brings good -luck to those taking part in it, so you may all fairly -expect to live happily ever afterwards, and I trust -you will.”</p> - -<p>If the performance is given before the family -circle, or very intimate friends (who sometimes -consider themselves privileged to be disagreeable), -it is just possible that some ill-mannered person,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span> -in the hope of embarrassing the conjurer, may ask -at the close to be allowed to examine the envelope -containing the drawn cards. Such an examination, -if permitted, would of course largely give -away the trick. If the performer has any reason -to fear such a contingency, he may guard against -it by “switching” the envelope, during his return -to the table with it, for a duplicate containing an -ordinary mixed pack. In some part of this the -three cards corresponding to those drawn should -be placed <i>together</i>, as the obnoxious person, if himself -one of the drawers, will naturally expect so to -find them.</p> - -<p>At a public performance such a precaution -would be supererogatory.</p> - -<h3>A NEW LONG CARD PACK AND A TRICK -DEPENDENT ON ITS USE</h3> - -<p>Some few months ago I was shown by a clever -amateur, Mr. Victor Farrelly, a pack of cards prepared, -after a method of his own, to replace in a -more subtle form, the familiar <i>biseauté</i> pack. Mr. -Farrelly’s plan is to round off, in a very minute -degree, three of the corners of an ordinary pack. -If a given card be turned round in a pack so -treated, it is obvious that its unfiled corner will -project, to a microscopic extent, beyond those -above and below it, rendering the card instantly -discoverable by touch.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span></p> - -<p>Mr. Farrelly’s idea is decidedly ingenious, but -the uses of the <i>biseauté</i> pack are rather limited, -and the fact that the pack must be reversed before -the card is replaced in it is a drawback. It struck -me, on reflection, that the idea might be developed, -in a slightly different direction, to greater advantage.</p> - -<p>My own plan is as follows: Two packs, exactly -alike are used. As to one of these, I treat all four -corners after the manner indicated by Mr. Farrelly, -when any card of the second pack, inserted -into the one so treated, naturally becomes in effect, -a long card. There is in this case no need to -reverse the pack, and as the minute projection is -duplicated at each end of the diagonal, a less degree -of rounding off is necessary.</p> - -<p>As a practical illustration of the possible uses -of such a pack, I offer the trick which I am about to -describe. The expert will recognise that, save for -the use of the new pack, it is merely a combination -of well-known methods, but as regards the mode -of presentation it is original, and I think will be -found worthy of a place in the <i>répertoire</i> of the -card-conjurer.</p> - -<p>For the purpose of description we will call the -pack with rounded corners the “short,” and the -other the “long” pack. Three known cards are -borrowed from the long pack, which may then be -put aside, as it plays no further part in the trick. -These three cards are palmed, and after the short<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span> -pack has been shuffled by one of the company, are -added to it, and forced upon three different spectators. -We will suppose that the three selected -cards are the queen of hearts, forced on a gentleman; -the king of clubs and the ten of diamonds; -the two last mentioned forced on ladies.</p> - -<p>This done, each of the drawers is invited to -replace his or her card in the pack, which is passed -from the one to the other for that purpose, and -before it is returned to you is once more shuffled. -You then deliver a “yarn” to something like the -following effect:</p> - -<p>“Please bear in mind, ladies and gentlemen, -exactly what has been done. To begin with, you -have seen that the pack was thoroughly well -shuffled. Three cards were then freely chosen -from it. They have been put back, not by me, but -by the persons who drew them, and the pack has -since been shuffled again. It is therefore -obviously impossible that I should know either -what cards have been chosen, or whereabouts they -may now be in the pack. But I enjoy impossibilities. -The more impossible a thing is, the more I -want to do it. I will find out these cards or <i>die</i>! -Don’t be alarmed, I don’t mean to die just yet; so -I must do the other thing. It’s easy enough, if -you know how to do it.</p> - -<p>“In the first place I cut the pack into three portions.” -(You cut three times, nipping the “long” -corners between second finger and thumb, at each<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span> -of the drawn cards in succession, and placing the -cards left at bottom on one or other of the three -heaps; then solemnly rub your wand, without -remark, with a silk handkerchief, and lay it across -the tops of the three packets.)</p> - -<p>“Now, if the electric influence is strong enough, -the three chosen cards will gradually sink down -to the bottom of these three heaps. A nice easy -way of finding them out, is it not? It will take a -minute or two for the charm to operate, so in the -meantime I will try to find out the names of the -cards for myself by thought-reading. You drew -a card, I think, Sir? Will you kindly think of -that card, as hard as you can, and meanwhile look -straight at me? Thank you. Judging by physiognomy, -I should say that you were rather a ladies’ -man. Don’t blush, Sir. It’s nothing to be -ashamed of, is it, ladies? But he did blush, didn’t -he? Now, being a ladies’ man, you will naturally -have chosen one of the ladies of the pack, that is to -say one of the queens, and your blush suggests that -it was a red queen. Now there are only two red -queens to choose from. The queen of hearts represents -Love, and the queen of diamonds Money. -If I read your thoughts aright I feel safe in declaring -that you chose the queen of hearts. That is -right, I think? Quite simple, when you know how -it’s done.</p> - -<p>“And now, Madam, for your card. I can see at -a glance that you have a liking for aristocratic<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span> -society, and you will therefore naturally have -chosen a king. But which king? Think hard of -your card, please. A picture of a dark-complexioned -gentleman comes up before my mind’s eye, -and I feel that I can say with confidence that -the card you chose was the king of clubs. Am I -right?</p> - -<p>“And you, Madam. I have an idea that you -have a taste for pretty things, particularly jewellery. -Such being the case, you would naturally -choose diamonds. Think of your card, please. -Thank you. I see I was right in my guess. The -card you chose was the ten of diamonds.</p> - -<p>“And now to verify my discoveries. If my -wand has done its work, those same three cards will -now have percolated through the rest, and settled -down at the bottom of these three heaps. Let us -see whether they have done so.” (The three heaps -are turned over.) “Yes, here we have them: the -king of clubs, the queen of hearts, and the ten of -diamonds. It is a curious thing for the cards to -do, and I daresay you would like to know how it is -done. As a matter of fact, it is done by synthetic -re-adjustment of dissociated atoms. You don’t -know what that means, perhaps? Well, to say the -truth, I don’t quite know myself, but that is the -scientific explanation, so no doubt it is correct.”</p> - -<p>The trick may very well end at this point, but -if the reader possesses a card-box, or other apparatus -adapted for “vanishing” cards, he may bring<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span> -it to a still more striking conclusion. In this case -he may continue as follows:</p> - -<p>“Now, I should like to show you a curious effect -of sympathy. I take away these three cards and -hand the rest of the pack to the gentleman who -drew the queen of hearts. Kindly hold it up above -your head where all can see it. The three drawn -cards” (show them one by one) “I place in this -box. Again I electrify my wand a little, and lay -it across the box. Now I want each gentleman or -lady to think of his or her card. Think of it -kindly, and feel as if you would like to see it again. -Think hard, please, because it is you, not I, that -perform this experiment, and if you don’t think -hard it will be a failure. I am pleased to see by -the expression of your countenances that you are -all thinking hard. Thank you very much. You -may leave off now. The deed is done. The three -cards have left the box, and gone back to the pack. -Please look it through, sir, and tell the company -whether it is not so.”</p> - -<p>The reader, being familiar with the wiles of conjurers, -will doubtless have guessed that the three -cards supposed to have returned to the pack have -in fact never left it, being those naturally belonging -to it, corresponding with the three long cards. -But to the outsider their supposed return will be, -in the words of the lamented Lord Dundreary, -“one of those things that no fellow can understand.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span></p> - -<p>As regards the disappearance of the three cards, -the performer is of course by no means restricted -to the use of the card-box. If he is an expert in -sleight-of-hand, he may with even better effect, -“vanish” them one by one by means of the back -palm, dropping them a moment later into the profonde.</p> - -<h3>THE MASCOT COIN BOX</h3> - -<p>This is a little device on the same principle as -the well-known flat card-box, but adapted for use -with coins, and with an addition which largely -increases its utility inasmuch as it will not only -enable the performer to “change” or “vanish,” -but to get instant and secret possession of a coin -placed in it.</p> - -<p>The box (see Fig. 14) is of ebonized wood, -unpolished, and in size about three inches square. -It consists of two parts (<i>a</i> and <i>b</i>), which are -alike in size and appearance, so that either half -may be regarded as “box” and either as “lid,” at -pleasure, according as the one or the other is made -uppermost, no difference being perceptible between -them. In the centre of each half is a circular -well, not quite two inches in diameter.</p> - -<p>Used with the box is a thin disc of wood corresponding -to that of which the box is made. This -is of such diameter as to fall easily from the one -well into the other, according to the way in which -the box is turned, but on the other hand fits so<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span> -closely within that its presence or absence is not -perceptible to sight. If a coin be laid in the box -upon the disc and the box is then closed and turned -over, the disc settles down over the coin in the -opposite half, either leaving the box apparently -empty or exhibiting in place of the original coin a -substitute with which the opposite side of the box -has been previously loaded.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 220px;"> -<img src="images/figure14.jpg" width="220" height="300" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 14</span></p> -</div> - -<p>Thus far, as the reader will doubtless have perceived, -the effect produced (save that a coin instead -of a card is dealt with) is precisely the same as in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span> -the case of the card-box. But the “mascot” has -a speciality of its own, in the fact that in that half -of the box marked <i>a</i> (see Fig. 14) a horizontal -slot is cut on the side opposite to the hinge, just -long enough and wide enough to allow the passage -of a half-crown. The wood being dead black, this -small opening is invisible save to close inspection, -which the box is never called upon to undergo.</p> - -<p>When it is desired to gain secret possession of a -coin lent by one of the company, the lender is -invited to place it himself in the box, held open -bookwise as in Fig. 14, the side <i>b</i> of the box having -been previously loaded with a duplicate coin.</p> - -<p>The lender of the coin may place it in whichever -side of the box he pleases, but the manner of closing -the box will vary accordingly. If he places it -in the side <i>a</i>, the opposite (or loaded) side is treated -as the lid and turned down over <i>a</i>. In this case, -the coin being already in the slotted half, no turn-over -of the box is necessary, the performer having -merely to allow the coin to slip out into his hand. -In the opposite case, viz., that of the coin being -placed in <i>b</i>, <i>a</i> is treated as the lid, and the coin -being in this case <i>above</i> the disc the box must be -turned over before it can be extracted. If preferred -the performer can hold the box so that the -coin will naturally be placed in <i>b</i>, but in this case -the turn-over is unavoidable.</p> - -<p>When the box is again opened, the duplicate coin -is revealed in place of the original, which is meanwhile<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span> -dealt with as may be necessary for the purpose -of the trick. After the borrowed coin has -been extracted, the further fall of the disc closes -the slot, and bars any possibility of the substitute -coin escaping in the same way.</p> - -<p>The following will be found an easy way of -working the exchange.</p> - -<p>“For the purpose of my next experiment,” says -the performer, “I shall have to ask the loan of a -half-crown; marked in such a way that you can -be sure of knowing it again. I should like one, if -possible, that has seen some service, for a coin in -the course of circulation imbibes a certain amount -of magnetic fluid from each person who handles it; -and this renders a well-worn coin more susceptible -to magical influences than a new one.”</p> - -<p>The reason alleged for asking the loan of an old -coin is of course “spoof,” but there <i>is</i> a reason; -and it is two-fold. In the first place it ensures your -getting a coin tolerably like your own; which you -have chosen in accordance with that description, -and which you have marked after some commonplace -fashion, say with a cross scratched upon one -of its faces. Secondly, a well-worn coin, having -lost the sharp edge which is caused by the milling -in a new one, passes the more easily through the -slot, which for obvious reasons is kept as narrow as -possible.</p> - -<p>Performer, advancing toward the person offering -the coin, continues:</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I don’t want even to touch the coin myself till -the very last moment, so I will ask you meanwhile -to put it in this little box. I believe it was built for -a watch-case, but as I don’t happen to need one, I -use it to hold my money, when I have any, or when -I can get somebody to lend me some.”</p> - -<p>The box is held open bookwise, as above mentioned, -and closed according to circumstances, in -one or the other of the two ways described.</p> - -<p>“I will now ask some gentleman to take charge -of the coin in the box. Who will do so? You will, -Sir? Thank you. But stay! I think I heard -somebody say (it was only said in a whisper but I -heard it) ‘I don’t believe the half crown is in the -box.’ It is very sad to find people so suspicious, -especially when I take such pains to prove that -there is ‘no deception.’ But the gentleman was -wrong, you see.” (He opens box, and shows the -substitute coin.) “Here it is. Take it out, sir, -and keep it in your own hands till I ask you for -it again.”</p> - -<p>During the delivery of the patter the borrowed -coin has been extracted, and the coin exhibited in -the box and handed for safe-keeping is, of course, -the substitute. The box, as being no longer needed, -is laid without remark upon the table, and the -trick proceeds, after whatever may have been its -intended fashion.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="MISCELLANEOUS_TRICKS">MISCELLANEOUS TRICKS</h2> - -<h3>MONEY-MAKING MADE EASY</h3> - -<p><i>Requirements.</i> Coin mat loaded with two -double pennies, shell side undermost. Lighted -candle and velvet mat (with pocket) on table.</p> - -<p><i>Presentation.</i> Performer comes forward with -coin mat hanging down in his right hand (mouth of -loaded space upwards), and asks for the loan of a -penny, marked in some conspicuous way. Receiving -it on the mat, he shows it, so placed, to the persons, -seated on each side of the owner, in so doing -making it obvious to them, without remark, that -his hands are otherwise empty. Then returning to -his table, with the mat and the coin on it still in -his hand, he delivers patter to the following effect:</p> - -<p>“Now I am going to show you a nice easy way -of making money. I was told when I was a small -boy, ‘Take care of the pence, and the pounds will -take care of themselves.’ I believe they do. The -pounds take such good care of themselves that very -few of them seem to come my way. But you can -make a bit even with pennies, if you know how to -set about it. All you need is a really good penny -to start with. It doesn’t matter how you get the -penny. You may beg, borrow, or steal it. Personally,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span> -I prefer to borrow it. If you try the other -two ways you get yourself disliked, but you can -always get people to lend you things, if you ask -prettily; and I’ve always been celebrated for my -nice borrowing manner. You must all have noticed -that the gentleman lent me a penny without -the slightest hesitation. I daresay if I had asked -him, he would have made it two-pence, or even six-pence, -if he had as much about him. In this case, -however, one penny is enough for my purpose; -and here it is with the owner’s own mark upon it. -Observe that it is just a plain ordinary penny, and -you can see for yourselves that it is the only one -I have—in my hands, I mean. I am always truthful. -As a matter of fact, I believe I have another -in my left trouser-pocket, but I promise you that -I won’t use it.”</p> - -<p>Pass mat, with coin on it, from one hand to the -other, showing the hands otherwise empty, and -leaving the mat finally in the right hand: then let -the marked coin slide off it into left hand, the -concealed coins passing with it. Put down the -mat, and show all three coins together (the marked -coin in front) held between forefinger and thumb, -broadside toward the spectators. Thus held, they -are, even at a few feet distant, undistinguishable -from a single coin.</p> - -<p>“Now I am going to make money. Not much, -perhaps, in fact only a penny at a time. I shall -start by making this one penny into two. Cent<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span> -per cent is not bad, is it? Observe, I use no violence. -It’s all done by kindness. I just warm the -coin a little over this candle-flame. That softens -the metal and I am able to squeeze another penny -out of this one, <i>so</i>!”</p> - -<p>Show as two accordingly, by sliding off the -hindermost coin in its shell, exhibiting it on both -sides, and laying it on the table.</p> - -<p>“You have all heard of turning an honest penny. -Well, this is one way of doing it. It is said, too, -that one good turn deserves another, so we’ll try -again. I warm the first penny a little more, and -again I pull another out of it.” (Draw second -double coin from behind the original penny.) -“Now we have three, two in my hands” (showing -one in each hand) “and one on the table.</p> - -<p>“I think I heard somebody say that I couldn’t -make any more? I don’t like to do it, because the -process takes a good deal out of the original penny, -and I might spoil it. On the other hand, I don’t -like to decline a challenge, so here goes! I warm -these two again, and then, with a little extra pressure, -because it naturally becomes more difficult -each time, I get yet another penny, as you see. -So now, in all, we have four.” (Show those in -hand as three, by drawing solid coin out of shell, -then, picking up double coin from mat, show as four -accordingly.) “Did I hear a lady say ‘Just one -more’? Well, then, one more.” (Develop the -double coin just picked up, and show as five.)<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span> -“But here I must really draw the line. If I kept -on like this, there would be none of the original -penny left. It is already getting weaker and -weaker. Besides, there wouldn’t be time for anything -else, and I have several still more wonderful -things to show you.</p> - -<p>“And now to put these extra pennies back again -into the original coin. At present it is only one-fifth -its proper weight and if the owner tried to -pass it in this condition there would be trouble. -I should explain, by the way, that these others are -not really solid coins: though they look like it. -They are what the spiritualists call astral coins, -if you know what that means: I don’t quite know -myself; so I won’t attempt to explain, but I believe -in the Police Courts they are known as ‘duffers.’”</p> - -<p>Lay all five coins on the velvet mat, each of the -shells slightly overlapping the solid coin to which -it belongs.</p> - -<p>“Here we have one, two, three, four, five. I -pick up two of them.” (Draw shell over solid in -act of picking up.) “I give them a gentle squeeze -and they become one only.” (Show as one, and -replace on mat behind the mouth of pocket.) -“Now I treat two more in the same way.” -(Repeat accordingly, replacing these also, as one, -on mat.) “We have now only three left. Let me -see, which is the original? Ah! here it is, with the -owner’s mark upon it.” (Pick it up and show in -left hand.) “Now I rub one of these others into<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span> -it.” (Make the movement of picking up one of -the double coins, and of rubbing it into the coin in -left hand, but in reality “vanish” it, in the supposed -act of picking up, into the pocket of mat.) -“And now I pass this other one into it in the -same way, and we have only the original penny left. -It is like the ten little niggers, isn’t it, only that -they never came back. Here is your penny, Sir. -Please observe that it still has your own mark -upon it, which is proof positive that there has -been ‘no deception.’”</p> - -<p>N. B. If the performer is a novice, he may -simplify the trick by loading the coin mat with -one double and one ordinary coin only, or two -ordinary coins, limiting the successive productions -accordingly.</p> - -<h3>THE MISSING LINK</h3> - -<p>At an early period of my magical career, I -devised a trick to which I gave the name of <i>Concatenation -Extraordinary</i>, and which will be found -described in <i>Later Magic</i>, page 94. In effect it -consisted of the magical welding of a number of -loose iron links into a continuous chain. It was -performed by the aid of a Black Art table, a bottomless -tumbler, and a silk thread. “Though I -say it that shouldn’t,” it was an ingenious trick, -and I was very proud of it. Unfortunately, some -good natured friend (I rather think it was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span> -Mr. David Devant) pointed out to me that about -ninety-five per cent of my ingenuity was wasted, -inasmuch as the same effect, so far as the spectator -was concerned, could be produced by infinitely -simpler means, viz.:—by using a glass with double -mirror partition, when all the other paraphernalia -became unnecessary. You had only to load the -hinder compartment with the complete chain, and -after a due amount of “talkee-talkee,” drop the -loose links into the forward one, turn the glass -round, and the deed was done.</p> - -<p>The trick, as a trick, was just as good in its new -shape as before, but being at that time (comparatively) -young and foolish, its extreme simplicity -spoilt it for me, and I lost all interest in it. Not -long since, however, I was reminded of it by coming -across the chain and links which had figured in -my performance of the trick, and it struck me that, -in a slightly modified form, it may still be worth -the attention of the drawing-room conjurer.</p> - -<p>The requirements for the trick in this, its latest -form, are as follows:</p> - -<p>First, the mirror glass; and as to this I may note -in passing that the “mirror” is best made of tin-plate, -not too highly polished, in place of the looking-glass -plate which was, until a quite recent -period, generally employed for the purpose.</p> - -<p>Secondly, a length of small iron chain, made up -of twenty-six links, connected in the centre by a -twenty-seventh link of brass.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span></p> - -<p>Thirdly, two shorter lengths of similar chain, -consisting of thirteen links each, and a loose brass -link, corresponding to the one in the centre of the -longer chain. The complete chain is to be placed -at the outset in the hinder compartment of the -mirror glass, which should be of such a size that -the chain nearly fills it.</p> - -<p>Lastly will be needed a bottle containing Eau de -Cologne, of which a few drops have been poured -on the chain in the glass.</p> - -<p>The patter may run to something like the following -effect.</p> - -<p>“You are doubtless aware, ladies and gentlemen, -that electricity is now largely employed in the -welding of metals. Of course to produce such a -result on a large scale, such as welding guns, enormous -strength of current is required; amounting -in fact to millions of ampères, or volts, or ohms, or -watts. I blush to confess I don’t know which is -which, but it’s of no consequence. If I had ever -so many ampères, or the rest of it, I shouldn’t know -what to do with them. I am only able to manufacture -my electricity on a very small scale, but -with the aid of a little magic, I get very good -results.</p> - -<p>“You are also no doubt aware that when certain -metals, particularly copper and zinc, are brought -into close connection, an electrical current is set -up between them. The same thing applies, in a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span> -less degree, to iron and brass, as I hope to be able -to show you.</p> - -<p>“I have here two short lengths of iron chain. -Will somebody be kind enough to count the links? -You will find, I think, that there are exactly -thirteen in each. Please notice this, because, in -some mysterious way, it has something to do with -the success of my experiment. You know thirteen -is an unlucky number, and the chains themselves -don’t like to consist of that number of links, and -if they can alter it, they try to do so. I am going -to give them the opportunity, with a little electrical -assistance. Thirteen, as I have said, is an unlucky -number, and twice thirteen makes twenty-six, -which is not much better, but if you add one more, -you get twenty-seven, which is a very lucky number -indeed. Everybody knows that three is a -lucky number. Three times three are nine, which -of course must be luckier still, and three times nine -are twenty-seven, which is naturally best of all.</p> - -<p>“Now I am going to give these two chains an -opportunity to convert themselves into that lucky -number, by taking in this extra link, which as you -perceive is brass, an opposition metal. Observe, -I drop one of the chains into this glass. See that -I do so fairly. Then I drop in the single link, -and lastly, the other piece of chain. And now, in -order to set up an electrical reaction, I add just a -few drops from this bottle of Eau de Cologne. As -a matter of fact, a little salt and water would have<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span> -the same effect, but I use Eau de Cologne because -it smells nicer. And now I must ask the loan of -some lady’s handkerchief, to cover the glass, and -concentrate the electric current.”</p> - -<p>Holding the handkerchief in right hand, pick -up the glass with left hand, and raise it a few -inches from the table. In lowering it, cover it with -the handkerchief, and at the same time give it the -necessary half-turn. Take out your watch, and -make believe to time the operation, remarking, “I -find it needs a full half-minute, to allow the charm -to work. Time! Let us see how we have succeeded.”</p> - -<p>Take off the handkerchief, and draw the chain -slowly out of the glass. “Yes. All is well. I -should say welded, and I trust you will say, ‘Well -done.’ The chain is complete, and now consists of -twenty-seven links, the lucky number. Perhaps -some gentleman will verify the fact.</p> - -<p>“I must tell you frankly that I don’t guarantee -the correctness of my explanation. I can’t say -exactly how much the electricity has to do with it. -I only know that if you go to work the right way, -which means, do as I do, you get the result, and -there you are. This experiment always provokes -a lot of discussion. The other evening one gentleman -said it was done this way. A lady said it was -that way, and a sharp boy (the younger they are -the more they know) was quite sure it was done -another way altogether. But they were all wrong.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span> -It is done just the way I have shown you, and if -you do as I do, and say as I say, you will no doubt -produce the same result.<a name="FNanchor_7" id="FNanchor_7"></a><a href="#Footnote_7" class="fnanchor">[7]</a> If you don’t, well, you -will be no use as a conjurer, and you had better -go into some other business.”</p> - -<p>Some less instructed reader may possibly -enquire, “But why the Eau de Cologne? What -does that do?” Precisely nothing, and therein lies -its virtue. As indicated in the section on “patter” -(<i>post</i>) it often happens that some little bit of -spoof, supererogatory in reality so far as the spectator -is concerned, is accepted as covering the real -key to the puzzle. This is a case in point. Taking -it for granted that the Eau de Cologne would not -be used without <i>some</i> reason, the spectator sets to -work to discover that reason, and so gets farther -from the real solution.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_7" id="Footnote_7"></a><a href="#FNanchor_7"><span class="label">[7]</span></a> This last bit of patter is a plagiarism from somebody or other, I -rather think the late Dr. Lynn.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<h3>CULTURE EXTRAORDINARY</h3> - -<p>The root-idea of this item must be credited to -Signor Antonio Molini, the inventor of the very -effective stage trick known as <i>Le Souper du -Diable</i>. The principle on which that trick is -worked is so subtle, and withal so simple, that it is -surprising that it has not long since been applied -to the production of less bulky objects than the -tablecloth, eatables and drinkables which figure in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span> -the Satanic supper. The following is an application -of the Signor Molini’s idea on a scale better -adapted to the drawing room.</p> - -<p><i>Requisites.</i></p> - -<p>(1) Three zinc or zinc-lined tubes, as <i>a</i>, <i>b</i>, <i>c</i>, in -Fig. 15, ranging in height from about three inches -upwards, and graduated in size so as to fit easily -one within the other.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 450px;"> -<img src="images/figure15.jpg" width="450" height="290" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 15</span></p> -</div> - -<p>(2) Three balls, one red and two white, of such -diameter as to pass easily through the narrowest -tube. Two smaller balls, one red and one white, -about half an inch in diameter.</p> - -<p>(3) A box of matches.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span></p> - -<p>Each of the two smaller tubes (<i>c</i> and <i>d</i> in diagram) -to be loaded with one of the larger white -balls, suspended from the upper edge of the tube -by a wire hook, shaped as <i>a</i> in Fig. 16, connected -with the ball by a loop of fine silk or cotton thread. -The red ball is vested, and the two little balls may -rest in a shallow tray or other appropriate receptacle -on the table, deep enough as to conceal them -from the view of the spectators.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 200px;"> -<img src="images/figure16.jpg" width="200" height="300" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 16</span></p> -</div> - -<p><i>Introductory Patter.</i> “You have no idea, ladies -and gentlemen, what a lot of hints I get from different -people for the improvement of my entertainment. -If I were to adopt them all, I have no<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span> -doubt it would be very fine indeed. The worst of -it is that it would take a year or two to try them, -so for the present I am obliged to leave things as -they are.</p> - -<p>“You will observe that I have here three tubes” -(showing No. 1 and passing wand through it to -prove it is empty), “quite ordinary tubes, with a -hole at each end, and nothing at all between. I -don’t suppose you would notice anything to object -to about them, but some people are so very particular. -A gentleman who said he had an artistic -eye (I don’t know which eye it was) said to me, -‘Look here, Professor, that trick of yours would be -ever so much better if you had all those tubes the -same size. That lot looks as if you had picked -them up at a jumble sale.’<a name="FNanchor_8" id="FNanchor_8"></a><a href="#Footnote_8" class="fnanchor">[8]</a> I explained to him, -kindly but firmly, that there was a special reason -for having the three tubes of different sizes; -namely, that by so doing it was made possible” -(suiting the action to the word) “to pass this one -(No. 1) over this other (No. 2); and this again -over the smallest one, thereby saving much space -in packing. He said, ‘Never mind, you take my -tip and make ’em all the same size.’ I dare say -he was right, but I haven’t had time to do it yet.”</p> - -<p>During this little harangue, which appears to be -mere “spoof,” you have practically worked the -trick. Suiting the action to the word, you have -passed the largest tube No. 1 over No. 2 and lifted<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span> -it off again. In its downward movement the tube -passes over the little hook on No. 2; but in lifting -it off again its upper edge comes within the outer -arm of the hook, and carries this off with the ball -attached to it, leaving tube No. 2 empty. The latter, -shown empty accordingly, is passed over No. -3 and carries off its load in the same way.</p> - -<p>You have thus proved (!) in the most convincing -way that all three tubes are empty, though as -a matter of fact No. 3 is the only one in that condition, -Nos. 1 and 2 each containing a suspended -ball.</p> - -<p>The patter from this point may vary according -to the fancy of the performer. If he has the knack -of producing the appropriate combination of fact -and fiction, it is preferable that he should do so for -himself. As I have elsewhere remarked, borrowed -patter rarely comes so “trippingly on the -tongue” as that of which the performer can say -with, let us hope, undue depreciation of his merits, -“a poor thing, but mine own.”</p> - -<p>The fable with which I should myself introduce -the trick would run somewhat as follows:</p> - -<p>“You have all heard, ladies and gentlemen, of -intensive culture, gooseberries grown while you -wait, and that sort of thing. It is done by enclosing -the seed, or the young plant, in a confined space -and keeping it warm and comfy. It has always -seemed to me that there is a good deal of magic -about the process, and I thought I would like to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span> -try it myself, but it would be no good my trying -to grow vegetables. I shouldn’t have room to -grow more than one radish, or one spring onion -at a time, which would hardly be worth while. I -finally decided to grow a few billiard balls, for use -in my entertainment, and I’ll show you how it’s -done.</p> - -<p>“You must please imagine that these three tubes -are three hothouses on the new system.” (Picks -up and exhibits one of the little white balls.) “Of -course everything has to be raised from seed in the -first instance, but it would take too long to show -you the whole process from the beginning, so we -will start with this little ball, grown from seed last -night. In its present condition it is too small to -be of any use, but by means of my intensive culture -we can soon make it grow larger. I will drop -it into No. 1 forcing house.”</p> - -<p>Performer shows little ball in right hand and -makes believe to transfer it to the left, in reality -rolling it, as in the well-known “Cups and Balls” -trick, between the roots of the second and third -fingers. The left hand, held above tube No. 1, -makes the movement of crumbling an imaginary -ball into it. “Now we will plant another in the -same way.”</p> - -<p>You pick up apparently another little white ball, -but in reality the same; which has remained in the -right hand. Now, however, it will be well to vary -the sleight used, so you show the ball between the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span> -second finger and thumb of the left hand, and -apparently take it back by means of the pincette -or tourniquet; then professedly dropping it into -the second tube.</p> - -<p>“And now, to complete the set, we shall have to -grow a red ball. Here is a seedling of that colour.” -You pick up the little red ball, and make -believe to pass it after the same fashion into the -third tube.</p> - -<p>“And now to supply the heat. We do not need -much, the space being so confined. I find that even -the flame of a match is sufficient.”</p> - -<p>You strike a match and move the flame round -and round within the top of the larger tube till the -thread catches fire and releases the ball. Should -this be heard to drop, you account for it by remarking -“I dare say you noticed a little explosion. -That is caused by the sudden radio-activity of the -component atoms re-arranging themselves in the -expanded form.” You raise the tube and show -the ball: then go through the same process with -the second tube. Under cover of raising this tube -to show the ball, you get the large red ball from the -vest into the left hand and palm it.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps you would like to watch the progress -a little more closely.” You pick up the third tube -and place it upright on the palm of the left hand, -in so doing introducing the palmed ball from -below, and advance with it to the company.</p> - -<p>“The red balls are especially sensitive to heat.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span> -Even the warmth of the breath is generally enough -for these. Anyhow, we will try.” You breathe -into the tube, and lifting it show the ball, then -offering both tube and ball for inspection.</p> - -<p>It will hardly be necessary to point out to the -acute reader that the alteration of procedure in -the case of the last tube is rendered necessary; first, -by the fact that the tube up to that point contains -no ball, and secondly in order to avoid the difficulty -of striking a match with the right hand only, the -left being otherwise occupied.</p> - -<p>The trick may appropriately be followed by the -exhibition of a few of the usual ball sleights. If -it is worked on a “black art” table it may be -brought to an effective close by the “dematerialisation,” -in succession, of the three balls.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_8" id="Footnote_8"></a><a href="#FNanchor_8"><span class="label">[8]</span></a> Rummage.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<h3>THE BOUNDING BEANS</h3> - -<p>This is another application of the principle -introduced by Signor Molini and utilised in the -trick last described.</p> - -<p>The requisites for the trick are as follows:</p> - -<p>(1) Mirror glass; at the outset, empty.</p> - -<p>(2) Two tubes of cardboard, sheet brass, or zinc, -as A and B in Fig. 17. The height and width of -A are about 3½ and 2½ inches respectively. B is -a little taller, but a trifle less in diameter.</p> - -<p>(3) A third tube, C, with its lower edge turned -inward an eighth of an inch all around. This tube<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span> -is a little shorter than A, and in diameter a trifle -smaller than B, which must pass easily over it. -Attached to either side of its upper edge, outside, -are soldered two little wire hooks, the points on the -outside directed downwards.</p> - -<p>(4) A coil of paper ribbon, of such size as to fit -closely into the lower end of C, and forming, when -so placed, a temporary bottom to it. The inner -end of the coil must be drawn up an inch or so, -so as to form a little cone in the centre.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 450px;"> -<img src="images/figure17.jpg" width="450" height="230" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 17</span></p> -</div> - -<p>(5) A similar coil unwound into a loose mass -of paper ribbon.</p> - -<p>(6) About three-quarters of a pint of haricot -beans. Of these a sufficient number must be -poured into C (around the little cone), to fill it.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span> -The remainder are to be brought forward on some -sort of tray.<a name="FNanchor_9" id="FNanchor_9"></a><a href="#Footnote_9" class="fnanchor">[9]</a></p> - -<p>C loaded as last described, is to be placed -within B.</p> - -<p>The trick may be introduced as follows:</p> - -<p>“Most of you, I dare say, have seen the little -natural curiosity known as the Jumping Bean. -To all appearance these are just like other beans; -but if you spread a dozen or so of them on the -table and watch them carefully, you presently see -one or more of them turn over, or even make a little -jump. A young and lively bean will sometimes -hop as far as half an inch.</p> - -<p>“Scientific gentlemen tell us that their agility is -caused by a little insect inside the bean. When -he wags his tail, or scratches himself with his hind -leg, it causes the bean to turn over, or to make a -hop. That seems to me rather a lame explanation -because there is no hole in the bean that the insect -could possibly have got in at. I believe myself, -that they are in truth magic beans, and I have been -trying to train some beans of my own to do the -same thing on a larger scale, and in such a way -that you can all see them do it.</p> - -<p>“Here are my beans.” (Show those on tray.) -“Examine them as much as you like. The more -you examine them, the more you won’t find anything<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span> -particular about them. You won’t notice -any difference between them and any other beans, -but as a matter of fact they are a good deal more -energetic than beans of the ordinary kind, and -when they get to know and love you, they will do -all sorts of remarkable things.</p> - -<p>“I will pour a few of them into this glass.” -(The front compartment of the mirror glass is -filled to about two-thirds of its height.) “To prevent -their getting out again without your knowing -it I will press them down with a handful of these -pretty paper shavings.”</p> - -<p>This is also done, the quantity of paper being so -regulated, in accordance with previous experiment, -that when pressed down it shall come half -an inch or so below the brim of the glass.</p> - -<p>“To make matters still more secure I will ask -the loan of a lady’s handkerchief to cover the glass -with.”</p> - -<p>The handkerchief is taken in the right hand, the -left meanwhile raising the glass a little way to -meet it. In covering and lowering it again to the -table the needful half-turn is made.</p> - -<p>“I will not touch the glass again until the experiment -is finished. Meanwhile I want to call your -attention to these two tubes. You will observe -that one of them is slightly larger than the other. -A gentleman told me the other evening that I was -wrong in saying so. He maintained that the one -was smaller than the other. I didn’t argue with<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span> -him. I never do with that sort of man. It is just -a question of the point of view. Anyhow, I had -the one made larger, or the other one smaller, -whichever way it is, so that the one can go comfortably -over the other, like this.”</p> - -<p>A, first carelessly moved about so as to show -clearly that it is empty, is brought down over B -and lifted off again, carrying off within it C and -its load; after which B is in turn shown to be -empty.</p> - -<p>“Now I am going to order the beans to jump out -of the glass and into one or other of these empty -tubes, at your own choice. Right? or left? -Which shall it be?”</p> - -<p>Performer asks the question standing behind his -table, and by means of the familiar equivoque -(“my” or “your” left or right) interprets the -answer to mean A.</p> - -<p>“And now I have only to pronounce the proper -magic spell. The trouble is to remember the right -one. They are rather confusing, and if you happen -to pronounce the wrong one, or even pronounce -the right one the wrong way, the consequences may -be serious. But I think I know this one pretty -well. ‘Peripatetico-paticocorum.’ I fancy I -have got it right. I don’t know quite what it -means myself, and nobody seems to be able to tell -me. A Japanese gentleman told me he thought it -was Spanish, but a Spaniard said he felt sure it -was Welsh. Somebody else suggested that I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span> -should ‘ask a pleeceman.’ I did ask a policeman, -and he said, ‘Go to—’ somewhere I won’t mention, -but I don’t think he meant it as a translation. My -own idea is that it is a bit of Esperanto. Anyhow, -it has the desired effect; for you see the beans have -left the glass” (uncovering it and showing it -empty), “and they have jumped into this tube, -which is what I wanted them to do.”</p> - -<p>The beans are poured from the tube into the -vacant portion, now to the front, of the mirror -glass, with due care that the coil at bottom shall not -be seen.</p> - -<p>“But there’s something wrong here. I must -have made some little mistake in the pronunciation -of the magic spell, for the paper seems to have disappeared -as well as the beans. There is certainly -no room for it in the tube. Here it is, though, or -some of it.”</p> - -<p>The paper is unwound, and when it comes to -an end the wand is passed through A and C (now -bottomless) together, again proving (?) that the -former which is always shown to the spectators -could not possibly have contained the beans -in any natural way. A moment or two later the -inner tube can easily be got rid of behind the mass -of paper ribbon.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_9" id="Footnote_9"></a><a href="#FNanchor_9"><span class="label">[9]</span></a> The little dishes of paper pulp sold for picnic purposes will be found -to answer this and similar purposes excellently and have the further -advantage of being exceptionally portable.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span></p> - -<h3>LOST AND FOUND</h3> - -<p>This trick may be worked either upon a black -art table or black art mat. We will assume that -the latter is used.</p> - -<p>The requisites for this trick will in such case -be as follows:</p> - -<p>1. The mat. This may be a small circular one, -a few inches in circumference without pocket.</p> - -<p>2. A handkerchief, fourteen or fifteen inches -square, of some gaudy pattern, carefully folded -and placed in a square Japanese handkerchief box.<a name="FNanchor_10" id="FNanchor_10"></a><a href="#Footnote_10" class="fnanchor">[10]</a></p> - -<p>3. A circular velvet patch as described <i>ante</i>, in -the chapter dealing with novel applications of the -Black Art principle.</p> - -<p>4. A half-crown placed in a pochette, or otherwise -so as to be readily get-at-able.</p> - -<p><i>Presentation.</i> Performer opens the box and -takes out the handkerchief, which he carefully -unfolds, handling it as if it were something of -extraordinary value.</p> - -<p>“I have here, ladies, a curio of an exceptionally -curious kind. This is said to be the identical -handkerchief which Othello gave to Desdemona, -and which afterwards caused so much unpleasantness. -No doubt you all know your Shakespeare, -and will remember that Othello tells his wife, -‘There’s magic in the web of it.’ And there is<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span> -magic in it still. Not so much as there was, I dare -say, but still it retains a good many magical qualities. -Among them is a curious talent for recovering -lost property. For instance, I once had a dog. -His name was Socrates, but he was generally called -‘Socks.’ In fact, he preferred it. He was a valuable -dog, because he combined so many different -breeds. He was partly pug, and partly greyhound, -and partly dachshund, and partly chow, -and partly bull-dog and partly terrier, and partly -of two or three other breeds that I can’t for the -moment remember. One day Socks went out to see -a friend, and didn’t come back again. I sat up all -night for him with a stick, but he didn’t come home -till morning. In fact, he didn’t come home even -then. I thought I had lost him for good, and I -was quite distressed about it.</p> - -<p>“Just when I was beginning to get over the loss -I had a further shock. My precious Desdemona -handkerchief was missing. But the very next day -I heard a barking outside, and there was my dog -with the handkerchief tied round his neck and -three other dogs with him. The handkerchief had -recovered them all.</p> - -<p>“You don’t believe that little story. I thought -you wouldn’t. People never will believe anything -a little bit out of the way. It is just the same with -fish stories. I know a man who, when he was a -boy, fishing in a pond with a maggot on a bent pin, -caught a four-pound salmon. He didn’t claim<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[112]</a></span> -any credit for doing it. He says himself it was -just an accident, and might have happened to anybody. -But he never can get anyone to believe him, -and it has spoilt his character. He was naturally -a truthful man, but being always disbelieved has -made him reckless, and now, whenever he tells the -story he sticks another half-pound on to the salmon. -I believe it is a fifteen pounder now.<a name="FNanchor_11" id="FNanchor_11"></a><a href="#Footnote_11" class="fnanchor">[11]</a></p> - -<p>“With regard to the handkerchief, however, I -can easily prove to you that what I have stated is -correct. I can’t prove it quite in the same way, -because even if any lady or gentleman present -had lost a dog, it would take the handkerchief a -day or two to find it, and you would get tired of -waiting. So I must show you the virtues of the -handkerchief in a simpler way.</p> - -<p>“Will some gentleman oblige me with the loan -of a half-crown, marked so that he can be sure of -knowing it again?”</p> - -<p>On receiving the coin the performer returns to -his table, holding it on high so that it can be seen -that there is no substitution, and lays it on the -black art mat.</p> - -<p>“Presently I propose to lose this coin, and get<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span> -the handkerchief to find it, but first you would like, -no doubt, to have a look at the handkerchief itself. -Notice the richness of the pattern. It is said to -be after a design in the Alhambra. I don’t mean -the Alhambra you gentlemen go to, but the real -Moorish one in Spain.”</p> - -<p>Leaving the handkerchief for the time being in -the possession of a spectator he returns to the -table, meanwhile palming the velvet patch, and the -substituted half-crown, and ostensibly picks up -the original, in reality rendering it invisible by -laying the patch over it, and showing the substitute -in its place, after the manner described at <a href="#Page_19">p. 19</a>. -He then advances to the company with the substitute -coin and offers it to one or other of the spectators, -remarking, “Take it, please, and pass it to -one or other of your neighbours so that I shan’t -know where it is.”</p> - -<p>Under pretence of offering the coin, he passes -it from the one hand to the other, and vanishes it -by, say, the tourniquet, so that the person holding -out a hand to receive it gets nothing, and says so.</p> - -<p>“What do you say, Sir? You have not got it? -But surely, I have just handed it to you. You are -not joking? Then it must have fallen on the floor. -Please look around you a bit.” (Pretends to do -so himself.) “Not there? Well, this is extraordinary.” -(To the lender of the coin.) “I am -very sorry, Sir. Your money is lost in a way I -did not anticipate. But after all, when I come to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[114]</a></span> -think of it, it’s of no consequence. The handkerchief -will find it wherever it is, even if it has to -follow it into somebody’s pocket. By the way, -where is the handkerchief?” He takes it from the -person with whom it was left, and holding it by -two of its corners, and showing both hands otherwise -empty, lowers it down carefully over the -black patch on table.</p> - -<p>“And now to work the spell. ‘Bismillah! -Bechesm! Salaam Aleikoum!’ You must excuse -my speaking Arabic, but that is the only language -the handkerchief understands. I see that the gentleman -who lent me the half-crown is looking a -little bit anxious. Cheer up, Sir, the handkerchief -has never failed me yet. But we must give it time. -Say, half a minute.” (Looks at watch.) “This -is curious. Half a minute gone. One minute, -and nothing has happened. The handkerchief has -made no move. Something must have gone wrong. -But stay! If the handkerchief has not gone to the -coin, perhaps the coin has gone to the handkerchief. -Let us see!”</p> - -<p>He lifts the handkerchief by the centre, picking -up the black patch with it, and thereby disclosing -the coin, which is handed back on the mat to the -owner. Then carefully folding up the handkerchief, -performer replaces it in its box, and in so -doing regains possession of the velvet patch, to be -got rid of at a convenient opportunity.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_10" id="Footnote_10"></a><a href="#FNanchor_10"><span class="label">[10]</span></a> The handkerchief should be readily recognizable as a cheap and -commonplace one.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_11" id="Footnote_11"></a><a href="#FNanchor_11"><span class="label">[11]</span></a> This story, as also a few other “yarns” with which I have endeavoured -to brighten my otherwise serious pages, may be suppressed if it -is thought desirable to shorten the patter. I ought perhaps to apologise -for introducing such irrelevant fiction, but I am encouraged in misdoing -by the example of the lamented Artemus Ward, who said that the -best things in his lecture were generally the things that had nothing -to do with it.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span></p> - -<h3>THE RIDDLE OF THE PYRAMIDS</h3> - -<p>This, in good hands, will be found a very effective -trick. I have the less hesitation in saying so, -because the assertion is only to a very limited -extent self-praise. The idea of the effect to be produced -was my own, as also to a certain extent the -method of producing it. I had even got so far as -to devise, in anticipation, suitable patter. When, -however, I proceeded to put my ideas into practice -I found myself pulled up by unexpected obstacles.</p> - -<p>The object to be attained, as will be seen by the -sequel, was the instantaneous re-adjustment of the -sundered parts of a small pyramid, and this I proposed -to do by means of the pull of a thread, fine -enough to be practically invisible. Now, to make -segments of a pyramid not only draw together, -but sit squarely one upon another, it is necessary -to have forces operating simultaneously in two different -directions, and the need for this caused difficulties -which I found myself unable to cope with. -Indeed, I had practically decided to content myself -by producing a somewhat similar effect in a simpler -way, as exemplified in the trick which I have -called the <i>Miracle of Mumbo Jumbo</i>, which next -follows.</p> - -<p>As luck would have it, however, I mentioned my -difficulties to my good friend, Mr. Holt Schooling, -a gentleman whom I have more than once had -occasion to refer to in my writings in connection<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span> -with some neat device. Mr. Schooling declared -that the original idea was too good to be abandoned, -and offered to try his hand at bringing it to a successful -issue. I must frankly confess that I had -no great hope of his success; but Mr. Schooling is -a man of many talents. Apart from eminence in -his own profession (that of actuary and statistician) -he is not only an expert amateur conjurer, -but an exceptionally skilful mechanic, and he -possesses withal an unlimited capacity for taking -pains. He used these qualities to such good purpose -that I am enabled to include this striking -effect among the contents of the present volume.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 250px;"> -<img src="images/figure18.jpg" width="250" height="200" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 18</span></p> -</div> - -<p>The principal item of apparatus is naturally the -pyramid itself, which is of blackened wood as -illustrated in Fig. 18. For the sake of lightness it<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span> -is of necessity a small affair, being four inches in -height, about six across the base, and two across -the top. It is divided into five horizontal slabs or -segments, as indicated by the dotted lines. Midway -on each side of each slab, at about half an inch -distance from the upper edge, a minute hole is -bored, parallel to the outer slope of the segment; -exactness in this particular being an essential condition -of success. Of the four holes in each slab, -two only are actually used in the trick, the other -two being added partly for the sake of uniformity, -and partly to disguise the significance of the other -pair. Each slab, save those at the top and bottom, -is also perforated perpendicularly by three or four -holes of considerable diameter, the object of these -being merely to lessen the weight of the slab.</p> - -<p>In preparing the pyramid for use in the trick, a -piece of plaited silk fishing-line, stained black, and -in length five to six feet, is passed by the aid of a -needle upwards through the small hole in one side -of the largest slab; then in the same way through -the corresponding hole in the next, and so on till it -comes out through the uppermost. Thence it is -again passed downward through the next adjoining -hole in each slab till it comes out at the bottom, -when the ends are drawn level and tied in a -knot.</p> - -<p>The use of plaited silk fishing line for such purposes -is one of Mr. Schooling’s specialties, and is a -“tip” to make a note of. Line of this kind is in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span> -proportion to its thickness much stronger than -ordinary silk thread, and, not being liable to -untwist, its surface remains permanently hard and -smooth, a great desideratum where it is important -to minimise friction. Further, it does not “kink” -as a twisted thread is liable to do.</p> - -<p>Two other items of apparatus are used, viz.:</p> - -<p>(1) An electric torch in the shape of a wand, the -light appearing at the end.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 65px;"> -<img src="images/figure19.jpg" width="65" height="65" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 19</span></p> -</div> - -<p>(2) A little knife or cutter specially designed by -Mr. Schooling for use in this trick. This consists -of a half-inch length of a safety-razor blade, set -in a handle consisting of a piece of tin one inch -square, folded in half, and then bent back to a right -angle on each side, the blade projecting along the -line of juncture as shown in Fig. 19. In use the -cutter is held by what may be called its backbone -between the first joints of the first and second -fingers of the extended hand, as shown in Fig. 20. -This cutter must be placed ready to hand upon the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[119]</a></span> -table. It is so minute that there is no fear of its -attracting attention.<a name="FNanchor_12" id="FNanchor_12"></a><a href="#Footnote_12" class="fnanchor">[12]</a></p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px;"> -<img src="images/figure20.jpg" width="400" height="175" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 20</span></p> -</div> - -<p>In presenting the trick the pyramid, with its sections -duly threaded and placed one upon another, -is brought in on a wooden board similar to an -ordinary drawing-board, measuring twenty-four -inches by sixteen, and like the pyramid itself, -stained black. It is essential to the satisfactory -working of the trick that the “base” section of the -pyramid shall not shift when the thread is pulled. -This is ensured by having two L shaped “stops” -of thin wood glued or screwed to the board near the -left hand corner nearest to the performer when in -use.</p> - -<p>The trick may be introduced as follows:</p> - -<p>“I don’t know whether any of you ladies and -gentlemen are well up in Egyptology. I can’t say -I am, myself. I know a camel when I see one, but -that is about as far as I have got. There is, however, -one point about it which has always interested -me very much. It is a point which has puzzled -not only the Egyptologists, but all the other -ologists; namely, how the pyramids were built. -They consist, as no doubt you know, of enormous -masses of stone; so large that the cleverest engineers -of our day cannot tell us how they were -placed one upon another. If you can imagine the -lifting of the Royal Exchange in one lump and -dumping it down on the top of the Bank of England,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[120]</a></span> -you will have some idea of the sort of job -the Egyptian builders had to tackle.<a name="FNanchor_13" id="FNanchor_13"></a><a href="#Footnote_13" class="fnanchor">[13]</a> Anyhow, -the work was done, and as it is clear that it could -not have been done by any known mechanical -means, we are compelled to seek some other solution -of the problem.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know whether any of you read novels. -If you do, you must often have noticed the curious -way in which fiction constantly anticipates fact. -The novelist describes some utterly impossible -thing, and a few years later some other fellow goes -and does it. Jules Verne described a voyage -under the sea long before the submarine was -invented, and Mr. Wells wrote ‘The War in the -Air’ while the aeroplane and the Zeppelin were -still in their infancy. But there is one conception -of the novelist which has not till now been made -an accomplished fact. That is the force called -‘Vril,’ described by Lord Lytton in his novel, ‘The -Coming Race.’ He describes Vril as a sort of -hyper-electricity capable in the hands of those who -know how to gather and use it, of producing all -sorts of wonders, even to removing mountains. -Imprisoned in a wand and directed by a strong -will, it will shrivel up an enemy or a wild beast as -by a flash of lighting.</p> - -<p>“I have always had an idea that this must have -been the force used by the Egyptians to build the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[121]</a></span> -pyramids. I have managed to collect a small -quantity of an unknown force which answers very -closely to Lord Lytton’s description of Vril, and -I have charged this wand with it. As regards killing -things, I have only tested it so far on a black -beetle. The experiment was a success. He was -blown to atoms, all but one hind leg. I should -like to try it on a tiger; if I could get one cheap. -Does any gentleman present know of a secondhand -tiger in a good strong cage going cheap? -No? I was afraid you wouldn’t. I am hoping -however for a chance of trying it some night on -a burglar. If a gentleman of the Bill Sykes persuasion -should steal into my chamber at dead of -night with felonious designs upon my Waterbury -and my collarstud, he will be as a dead man. I -shall just point this wand at him and say ‘Die,’ -and he will be merely a little heap of ashes to be -swept up by the housemaid in the morning.</p> - -<p>“I can however give you an example of the power -of my Vril as a motive force. I shall do so by -using it to build or rather rebuild this little pyramid -in your presence.</p> - -<p>“This is a correct copy of the real thing. It -takes to pieces, as you see. One, two, three, four, -five!”</p> - -<p>As he pronounces the last few words, the performer, -standing behind his table, picks up the -pyramid, and holding it aloft in his right hand -draws away the base from the other sections, sliding<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[122]</a></span> -it along the thread, and “bedding” it between -the “stops” at the left hand bottom corner of the -board. He then slides the other portions, one by -one, along the thread in the same way, laying them -in a row diagonally across the board. This will -have taken up a considerable portion of the thread, -but there will still be a loop some inches in length -hanging down near the left hand corner of the -table.</p> - -<p>“Now please watch carefully. This wand, you -will remember, has been carefully charged with -my imitation Vril.”</p> - -<p>While speaking these last words the performer -gets one finger of his left hand within the loop. -He now turns on the light at the end of the wand, -and with it makes a quick sweep from right to left -over the severed parts of the pyramid, making at -the same time a half-turn away from the table, and -quickly drawing away the thread. If this is done -neatly the severed parts of the pyramid run -together one upon the other in a single instant.</p> - -<p>It is probable that the parts may not sit exactly -one upon another. Whether this is so or not, the -performer makes believe to notice that it is so, as -it gives him a needful opportunity. He remarks:</p> - -<p>“The power was hardly strong enough, I see. -There is a block here that needs a little straightening -up.” Having meanwhile picked up the little -cutter between the fingers he bends over the table -and squares up the pyramid as may (or may not)<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[123]</a></span> -be necessary, and under cover of so doing draws -the blade across the thread where it crosses the -top, thereby severing it, and then moving back a -little to note the effect of his correction draws it -away altogether. Shifting the restored pyramid -to the centre of the board he brings all forward for -examination. The severed thread is allowed to -drop on the floor, to be picked up after the performance -is over.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_12" id="Footnote_12"></a><a href="#FNanchor_12"><span class="label">[12]</span></a> As a further precaution it should be painted flesh-color.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_13" id="Footnote_13"></a><a href="#FNanchor_13"><span class="label">[13]</span></a> Before an American audience the names of any two well-known -buildings in New York may be substituted.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<h3>THE MIRACLE OF MUMBO JUMBO</h3> - -<p>The items needed for the presentation of this -trick are as follows:</p> - -<p>(1) A miniature pagoda of quaint design. It -consists of five circular sections, resting one upon -another as illustrated in Fig. 21. The trick in -effect consists of the automatic re-adjustment of -these sections after being taken apart and shown -lying apparently haphazard on a Japanese tray. -For drawing-room use the pagoda is about six -inches high and the same diameter across the base. -For stage purposes it may be made a trifle larger.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 250px;"> -<img src="images/figure21.jpg" width="250" height="220" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 21</span></p> -</div> - -<p>(2) The tray. This, for use with a pagoda of -the size above mentioned, should be not less than -twenty inches long by ten or twelve wide, and -fairly heavy, as being less liable to shift in use. It -must have an upright rim; through one corner of -which a minute hole is bored, countersunk and -polished on each side of the opening in order to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[124]</a></span> -diminish friction on a thread passing through it.</p> - -<p>(3) An electric torch in the shape of a bottle; -the light showing itself at the mouth.</p> - -<p>(4) A black dress-hook, sewn point upwards to -the lower edge of the performer’s vest on the right -or left side, as may best suit his own position in -working the trick, just where back and front meet.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 250px;"> -<img src="images/figure22.jpg" width="250" height="275" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 22</span></p> -</div> - -<p>It will be found on examination of the pagoda -that each of the parts of which it consists has a hole -bored vertically through its centre. The topmost -portion has in addition a pinhole passing horizontally<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[125]</a></span> -across it, about halfway down. Through this -a black pin, bent at the head, passes as shown in -Fig. 22. In preparation for the trick a piece about -three feet long of black <i>plaited</i> silk line, with a -small wire ring at one end, is passed by the aid of -a needle through the hole in the tray from the outer -side; thence upward through the various sections -of the pagoda, beginning with the undermost, till -it finally comes up through the head. After the -needle has been drawn off, the end of the thread is -formed into a loop, which is passed over the cross-pin -before mentioned. The thread is then drawn -taut from below, the several segments of the -pagoda resting fairly one upon another in the centre -of the tray. The intermediate portion of the -thread is drawn up till the little ring at the outer -end comes close to the tray, and is laid upon it in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[126]</a></span> -zigzag fashion so as prevent the possibility of -its fouling at a critical moment.</p> - -<p>The introductory patter may run as follows:</p> - -<p>“In the course of my travels in Central Africa—you -didn’t know that I had been in Central Africa? -Strange, how little the world knows of its greatest -men! But no matter! When I was in Africa I -chanced to come upon the place where the Golliwoggs -live.</p> - -<p>“It’s a nice place—for those who like that sort -of place, but most people would find it a little too -warm. It is so warm there that the hens lay their -eggs hard-boiled, and you dig up potatoes ready -baked. It is too warm for anything but simple -life,—the very simple life, particularly as regards -clothing. The ordinary walking dress for a gentleman -Golliwogg is a pair of braces. The king -wears two pairs; except on state occasions, when -he wears one of those short shirts instead. You -know the kind I mean—all front. I think they -call them ‘dickeys.’</p> - -<p>“The ladies are more dressy. They get the -fashions from back numbers of the <i>Daily Mail</i>; -kimonos and camisoles and corsets all in the latest -style. They are made with green paint and put -on with a shaving brush. There is only one thing -that bothers the court dressmakers. They can’t -make a crinoline.”</p> - -<p>[If desired to shorten the patter the fashion -details may be omitted.]</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[127]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I mention these little matters in order to give -you an idea of the place, in case any of you might -like to take a week-end trip there. If you are old -and tough, you might risk it. If you are young -and tender, you had better not.</p> - -<p>“The special point of interest is a curious pagoda -in the centre of the village. It is seventy-five feet -high and is supposed to be the habitation of Mumbo -Jumbo; a sort of deputy devil, much respected in -those parts. This little model is an exact copy of -it. You can’t call it pretty, but there is a very -remarkable thing about it. When the king -dies (which happens by accident about once -a fortnight), the pagoda is pulled down, and if the -new king is acceptable to Mumbo Jumbo (which -depends upon the amount of his tip to the chief -witch doctor) old Mum rebuilds it himself by -magic. You don’t see him do it. The pagoda just -sits up and paws the air, so to speak. If Mumbo -does not approve, the proposed king gets a knock -on the head with a cocoa-nut, and some more liberal -Golliwogg is crowned instead.</p> - -<p>“I naturally wanted to know how the miracle -was worked; and I managed to buy the secret from -one of the witch doctors. He sold it to me for a -pair of sixpenny-half penny sock suspenders. He -didn’t wear socks, but that didn’t matter. He put -the suspenders on at once and strutted about, as -proud as a dog with three tails.</p> - -<p>“Now, I am going to tell you the secret. Scientists<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[128]</a></span> -tell us that the sun throws out three sorts -of rays; light-rays, heat-rays, and force-rays. -The artful witch doctors have found out a way of -bottling off the force rays. They are mild at first, -but when they get old in the bottle, so to speak, they -become so strong that if you know how to do it you -can lift the heaviest weights with them.</p> - -<p>“I managed to get hold of a small bottle of the -rays” (show bottle) “and I will show you, on a -very small scale, how the thing is done.</p> - -<p>“First, we will take the pagoda to pieces.”</p> - -<p>Standing behind the table, the performer moves -the pagoda to the corner of the tray nearest his -own left hand; so as to leave space for the different -portions when separated. He then picks up all the -parts save the base, holding them carefully -together, and drawing away with them a length -of the thread about equal to the diagonal of the -tray. Passing the undermost section downwards -along the thread, he lays it down beside the base, -afterwards treating the other portions in the same -way, the several portions finally resting on the tray -somewhat as shown in Fig. 23.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px;"> -<img src="images/figure23.jpg" width="400" height="150" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 23</span></p> -</div> - -<p>If the length of the thread has been properly -gauged (this is a matter to be determined by -experiment beforehand), there should be some -twelve or fourteen inches of “slack.” Slipping -the ring at the end over the little hook before -mentioned, the performer moves a little away -from the table, so as to draw this portion<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[129]</a></span> -of the thread all but taut, between his own body -and the tray.</p> - -<p>“And now to utilise our force rays.” Holding -up the bottle-shaped torch in his right hand, he -turns its light onto the tray, at the same time edging -away farther from the table and moving about -behind it so as to cause a gradual pull upon the -thread; the effect being that the severed parts of -the pagoda mount gradually one upon another in -due order. It is probable that they will not rest -exactly one upon the other. In any case the performer -affects to notice that they do not. Making -a remark to that effect he steps close to the table -to straighten them up, and under cover of so doing -draws with the finger nail the pin in the uppermost -portion, thereby releasing the thread. Stepping -back again, as though the better to judge whether -the pagoda is now “plumb,” he thereby draws<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[130]</a></span> -away the line, and detaching the ring from the -hook, lets it fall to the ground. This done, he -returns to the table, and shifting the restored -pagoda to the centre of the tray, brings all forward, -inviting anyone who cares to do so, to satisfy -himself that there has been “no deception.”</p> - -<h3>THE STORY OF THE ALKAHEST</h3> - -<p>The requirements for this trick are as follows:</p> - -<p>(1) Two wands, exactly alike in appearance. -One of them to be that just used in some previous -trick or tricks (which we will call No. 2), and the -other, prepared as to be presently explained, to -be secretly substituted for it immediately before -the presentation of the present trick. This can be -easily done by the aid of a couple of pairs of cup-hooks -fixed behind the table or a chair after the -manner described in “Later Magic,” p. 126; or -the wands may be exchanged during journey to -the table at an early stage of the trick; by means -of a pocket of suitable shape within the left breast -of the coat. This is a matter as to which the performer -will please himself, but the exhibition in -the first instance of an obviously unprepared wand -is essential to the artistic finish of the trick.<a name="FNanchor_14" id="FNanchor_14"></a><a href="#Footnote_14" class="fnanchor">[14]</a></p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[131]</a></span></p> - -<p>(2) Two pieces of ribbon, three-quarters to one -inch wide, alike in colour. Of these, one piece is -to be wound round the end of wand No. 2 at about -three inches from the end, and secured by a rubber -ring, of the solid kind used for holding together -the ribs of an umbrella. This wand, after being -“switched” for the unprepared one, must be so -placed upon the table that the end on which the -ribbon is wound shall be masked from view by the -second piece of ribbon, lying in a loose heap in -front of it.</p> - -<p>(3) A stoppered bottle of clear glass, preferably -of some ornamental or quaint design. This bears -a label, of discoloured and time-worn appearance, -with the letter <i>H R</i> written on it in crabbed but -distinct characters, and is about half-filled with -<i>Eau de Cologne</i> or lavender water, to which a few -grains of cochineal have been added, giving it a -rich ruby colour. So far as the working of the -trick is concerned plain water might be used, but a -coloured and scented liquid is preferable for the -sake of effect.</p> - -<p>(4) A spare rubber ring, of the kind above -described, placed in left-hand vest-pocket.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[132]</a></span></p> - -<p>The trick may be introduced as follows:</p> - -<p>“For the next surprise I have to show you we -are indebted to the ancient alchemists. People -regard them as back numbers nowadays, because -they didn’t know anything about aeroplanes, or -appendicitis, or income tax and such-like up-to-date -luxuries; but they had a good many useful -little secrets of their own. One of them was the -recipe for what was called the Alkahest, a liquid -which immediately dissolved anything it touched; -from a gold watch to a set of fire-irons. The secret -of making it has long been lost, and all that still -exists of the liquid itself I have here in this -bottle.”</p> - -<p>The bottle is here brought forward and offered -for inspection.</p> - -<p>“Pretty colour, isn’t it? And it has a very -delightful perfume.” (Takes out stopper.) -“You are welcome to smell it but I don’t advise -you to taste it. If you did you would probably -never taste anything again. I want you to notice, -by the way, those two letters <i>H R</i> on the label. -There is a dead secret attached to those letters. -They mean something, of course; but nobody -knows what it is.”</p> - -<p>The bottle is replaced on the table.</p> - -<p>“This bottle came into my hands by inheritance. -An ancestor of mine, in the reign of James the -First, was an alchemist in a small way. He is -reputed to have made a handsome income by selling<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[133]</a></span> -ladies something to put in their husbands’ tea. -History doesn’t say what. Let us hope it was only -sugar. Well, this old gentleman managed to get -hold of the recipe for making the Alkahest. -Whether he found it out himself, or whether he -cribbed it from the cookery-book of some other -alchemist, I can’t say. Anyhow, he got it; and -he made up some of the stuff and put it in that -bottle.</p> - -<p>“When he was just going to be burnt as a wizard, -which was the regular thing with scientific -men in those days, he handed the bottle to his eldest -son, my great-great-grandfather seventeen -times removed, saying, ‘Take it, my son, and may -it do you more good than it has done me.’</p> - -<p>“My great-great-grandfather took the bottle; -but he had no idea what it contained. He was just -going to ask his father what the letters on it meant, -but just at that moment the old gentleman flared -up, and it was too late. For the rest of his life my -great-great-grandfather puzzled his head as to -what those two letters <i>H R</i> stood for, but all he -could think of was ‘horse-radish,’ and he knew -it couldn’t be that.</p> - -<p>“Since that the bottle has been handed down in -our family for sixteen generations, till at last it -came to the hands of my Uncle James, and he puzzled -over those letters like the rest. Uncle James -was a bit of a ‘nut,’ and prided himself on his fine -head of hair, but in course of time he found he was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[134]</a></span> -getting a bit thin on the top, and it worried him. -One day, thinking over the mysterious letters, an -idea struck him. ‘H R!’ he exclaimed, ‘H R! -why “Hair Restorer” of course, not a doubt of it! -I’ll try it this very night.’ He did. He rubbed -it in, and went to sleep quite happy, but when he -tried to brush his hair in the morning there wasn’t -any left to brush. The Alkahest had taken it all -off, and left him as bald as a baby.</p> - -<p>“He went to bed again, and ordered a wig, but -before it could be sent home he caught such a -cold in his head that he died. Just-sneezed-himself-away.”</p> - -<p>(The last words to be spoken slowly and sadly.)</p> - -<p>“I notice that some of you ladies are weeping. -It <i>is</i> an affecting story, no doubt, and I used to -shed a tear over it myself. But after all, you -didn’t know my Uncle James. Neither did I, for -the matter of that, and if we had known him we -might not have liked him. So we won’t stop to -grieve about him.<a name="FNanchor_15" id="FNanchor_15"></a><a href="#Footnote_15" class="fnanchor">[15]</a></p> - -<p>“One of the most striking experiments with the -Alkahest is the dissolving of a paving stone, particularly -if you lay a bunch of violets on it and -dissolve them both together, when you get a scuttleful -of best Violet Powder. Unfortunately I -haven’t a paving stone handy, and I don’t suppose -any gentleman present is likely to have one about<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[135]</a></span> -him. No? I feared not! Another pretty experiment -is the dissolving of a diamond ring, -but I have no diamond rings myself, and I find -that if I borrow other people’s and don’t return -them I get myself disliked. So I must try to show -the power of the Alkahest in a less expensive way.”</p> - -<p>Returning to his table, the performer with his -right hand picks up the prepared wand (holding -it so as to conceal the ribbon coiled upon it), and -with the left hand the mass of loose ribbon.</p> - -<p>“I have here a piece of ribbon: just ordinary -ribbon. Will some lady oblige me by tying a knot -in it, about three inches from the end. Thank you! -Now will some other lady tie another knot about -three inches from the first one.”</p> - -<p>This is repeated till five or six knots have been -tied, taking up about half the ribbon.</p> - -<p>“I am not sure how many knots have been tied. -Please count them for me as I roll the ribbon round -my wand.”</p> - -<p>So saying, he winds the ribbon, beginning with -the knotted end, on to the free portion of the wand, -counting the knots as he does so, and continuing -the winding till the whole has been taken up. In -so doing he takes care to cover up the knots, and -to make the appearance of the rolled ribbon correspond -as nearly as possible with the hidden coil -upon the other end, finally securing it with the rubber -ring from his pocket.</p> - -<p>We will suppose that five knots are found to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[136]</a></span> -have been tied. The performer returns to the -table to fetch the bottle; and during the transit -passes the wand to the opposite hand, in so doing -drawing off the knotted ribbon (to be dropped a -moment later into the profonde), and exposes the -opposite end. He removes stopper from bottle, -leaving it on the table.</p> - -<p>“Now comes the most critical part of the operation. -I am going by means of the Alkahest to -dissolve these knots. How many did we say there -were? Five? Then I must use five drops and -no more. If I were to overdo it in the smallest -degree the consequences would be serious. I -should destroy the ribbon altogether, and in these -hard times ribbon is ribbon, even if it is only six-three -a yard.”</p> - -<p>He brings forward the bottle, and with great -pretence of accuracy lets fall on the ribbon the -suggested number of drops. Then slipping off the -rubber ring he offers the end of the ribbon to some -member of the company to unwind, when the knots -are naturally found to have disappeared.</p> - -<p>“The Alkahest retains its virtue, you see, even -after so many years. Every knot is completely -dissolved. I will conclude by asking you an -impromptu riddle. Just one of those bright -thoughts that strike me sometimes when I least -expect it—</p> - -<p>“When is a knot not a knot?”</p> - -<p>“When it’s <i>not</i> there.”</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_14" id="Footnote_14"></a><a href="#FNanchor_14"><span class="label">[14]</span></a> I am indebted to a clever amateur, Mr. Gordon Powell, for the -knowledge of a very simple but effective method of “changing” a wand. -The prepared article lies just within the forward rim of an oblong -Japanese tray, and at a convenient moment the unprepared wand just -used is laid behind and parallel with it. A little later this is professedly -picked up again, but as a matter of fact is pushed forward by -the tips of the fingers, and takes the place of the prepared wand, which -is picked up in its stead.</p> - -<p>A pack of cards may be “changed” for another after a similar fashion, -the first finger and thumb picking up the faked pack, while the -unprepared pack is pushed forward by the second and third fingers into -the place it occupied.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_15" id="Footnote_15"></a><a href="#FNanchor_15"><span class="label">[15]</span></a> If it is desired to shorten the patter the “Uncle James” episode -may be omitted without serious detriment to the trick.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[137]</a></span></p> - -<h3>THE ORACLE OF MEMPHIS</h3> - -<p>This is of the nature of a magical toy rather -than a conjuring trick proper, but its exhibition -may form a pleasant interlude in the course of a -social entertainment. I invented it at an early -stage of my magical career, and exhibited it on -various occasions for the amusement of friends, -but made no further use of it. The apparatus has -been put aside, and has been out of sight, out of -mind, for many years past. Coming across it accidentally -some short time ago, I was agreeably surprised -to find that it would still answer questions -as promptly, and doubtless as truthfully, as of -yore.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 235px;"> -<img src="images/figure24.jpg" width="235" height="300" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 24</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[138]</a></span></p> - -<p>The general appearance of the apparatus, which -is eight inches high by seven in outside diameter, -is as depicted in Fig. 24. It consists of a circular -mahogany stand or base, resting on three small -feet, and surmounted by a glass dome <i>b</i>. This last -is in fact a bell-glass, as used by gardeners, and -has at top the usual knob, whereby to lift it. To -this is attached a short loop of narrow ribbon. -The glass dome does not rest directly on the stand, -its lower edge being encased in a mahogany mount. -From the centre of the stand rises a vertical pin, -a quarter of an inch in height, serving as pivot for -a metal pointer (Fig. 25), which, by means of a -little cup, or socket, at its centre, can be lifted on -and off, and revolves freely upon it, after the manner -of a compass. A further item of the apparatus -is a reversible cardboard dial, whose two sides, -front and back, are depicted in Figs. 26 and 27. It -will be seen that the circumference of this dial is -divided on the one side (Fig. 26) into four equal -sections, each bearing a pip of one of the four suits. -The other side (Fig. 27) is divided into eight sections, -marked with the numerals, from seven to ten -inclusive, and the letters A, K, Q, and J, answering -to Ace, King, Queen and Jack.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 500px;"> -<img src="images/figure25-27.jpg" width="500" height="285" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 26</span> <span class="smcap spacer">Fig. 25</span> <span class="smcap">Fig. 27</span></p> -</div> - -<p>With the Oracle is used a set of eight questions, -and a piquet pack of cards, on the backs of which -are written or printed thirty-two answers appropriate -to such questions, one of each suit to each -question. The person consulting the Oracle having<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[139]</a></span> -selected the question he or she desires to have -answered, the dial is laid on the stand with the -“suit” or Fig. 26 side uppermost, and the pointer -is placed in position on its pivot. The querist is -invited to breathe into the glass, which is then -lowered on to the stand. The pointer begins to -move, and after a moment or two of indecision, -comes to rest opposite one or other of the four suit-pips; -we will suppose, for the sake of illustration, -the diamond. The glass is then lifted off, the dial -reversed, the pointer replaced, and the glass once -more lowered on to the stand. Again the pointer -moves, and stops this time, we will say, at the number -“seven.” The seven of diamonds is sought<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[140]</a></span> -for in the pack, and is found to bear a more or less -appropriate answer to the question asked.</p> - -<p>The movements of the pointer are governed by -the fact that, imbedded in the mahogany mount -surrounding the base of the bell glass, is a piece -of thick steel wire, strongly magnetised, and -extending half way round the circle. The pointer, -though so coloured as to have the appearance of -brass, is in reality a magnetic steel needle, and -therefore when resting on the pivot and covered -by the glass, will automatically move round till -it comes to rest between the two magnetic poles -formed to the opposite ends of the hidden wire. -The operator can therefore, by placing the glass -cover accordingly, cause the indicator to stop at -any part of the dial that he pleases.</p> - -<p>It remains to be explained what guides him in -the manipulation of the glass, so as to cause the -needle to stop at the point he desires. It will be -remembered that, attached to the knob at the top -of the glass, is a loop of ribbon, serving to suspend -the glass in use from the forefinger, as shown in -Fig. 28. But the loop has in truth a much more -important function than this. Before the loop is -formed, the ribbon is tied tightly round the neck -of the knob, previously waxed to prevent its slipping -round, and the knot is so placed that it shall -exactly correspond with that pole of the magnet -to which the point of the needle is intended to be -in use attracted. This done, a loop is formed with<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[141]</a></span> -the two ends of the ribbon, and so arranged in -point of length that when the glass is suspended -from the forefinger, as in the diagram, the thumb -and second finger of the operator shall be just right -for moving it round in either direction, the little -knot guiding him by feel to bring it to the desired -point.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> -<img src="images/figure28.jpg" width="300" height="400" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 28</span></p> -</div> - -<p>The exhibitor is not limited to any particular -set of questions and answers. At the cost of a -fresh pack of cards and a little ingenuity, he can<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[142]</a></span> -please himself in this particular. The selection of -suitable questions and answers is however a somewhat -delicate matter. The answers must on the -one hand be smart enough to afford amusement -to the company generally; and on the other hand -must not be so pungent as to be likely to cause -offence to a person putting the question.</p> - -<p>The questions and answers I devised for my own -use ran somewhat as follows:</p> - -<table summary="Questions and answers"> - <tr> - <th colspan="2">1. What does my husband (or wife, as the case may be) most - think about?</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <th></th> - <th>ANSWERS</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><i>Seven</i> of <i>Diamonds</i>.</td> - <td>Yourself.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Hearts</i>.</td> - <td>Money.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Spades</i>.</td> - <td>Dinnertime.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Clubs</i>.</td> - <td>Golf.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <th colspan="2">2. Shall I live to grow old?</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><i>Eight</i> of <i>Diamonds</i>.</td> - <td>Yes, if you don’t worry about it.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Hearts</i>.</td> - <td>A well-spent youth will be followed<br />by a happy old age.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Spades</i>.</td> - <td>As old as you care to be.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Clubs</i>.</td> - <td>Yes, old, and fat.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <th colspan="2">3. What is my chief fault?</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><i>Nine</i> of <i>Diamonds</i>.</td> - <td>You haven’t any.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Hearts</i>.</td> - <td>Excessive modesty.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Spades</i>.</td> - <td>Flirting.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Clubs</i>.</td> - <td>Swank.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <th colspan="2">4. Shall I have what I am wishing for?</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><i>Ten</i> of <i>Diamonds</i>.</td> - <td>Yes, if you deserve it.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[143]</a></span><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Hearts</i>.</td> - <td>If you go the right way to get it.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Spades</i>.</td> - <td>Not likely.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Clubs</i>.</td> - <td>It is like your cheek to wish for it.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <th colspan="2">5. What am I thinking about at this moment?</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><i>Jack</i> of <i>Diamonds</i>.</td> - <td>A new hat.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Hearts</i>.</td> - <td>Servants.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Spades</i>.</td> - <td>You wouldn’t like me to tell.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Clubs</i>.</td> - <td>That it is a long time between drinks.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <th colspan="2">6. What shall I do to get health?</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><i>Queen</i> of <i>Diamonds</i>.</td> - <td>Don’t think about it.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Hearts</i>.</td> - <td>Keep smiling.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Spades</i>.</td> - <td>Take Podger’s Purple Pills.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Clubs</i>.</td> - <td>Eat less.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <th colspan="2">7. How old am I?</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><i>King</i> of <i>Diamonds</i>.</td> - <td>Just right, don’t get any older.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Hearts</i>.</td> - <td>Whatever you are, you don’t look it.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Spades</i>.</td> - <td>You never tell, so I won’t.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Clubs</i>.</td> - <td>Old enough to know better.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <th colspan="2">8. What shall I be this time next year?</th> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><i>Ace</i> of <i>Diamonds</i>.</td> - <td>A year older.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Hearts</i>.</td> - <td>A trifle stouter.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Spades</i>.</td> - <td>A year wiser.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="sub"><span class="ditto2em">”</span> <i>Clubs</i>.</td> - <td>Bald as a baby.</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<p>It will be found on comparing them that the -answers are arranged on a regular system, those on -the red cards being of a more or less complimentary -nature, or otherwise favourable; the black -suits less so, particularly the clubs, which are<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[144]</a></span> -rather the reverse, and are intended to be used as -replies to gentlemen only. Bearing this arrangement -in mind, it is a comparatively easy matter to -suit the answer to the querist.</p> - -<p>The questions must be memorised in proper -order, and it is desirable to do the same with the -answers also, though there should be no difficulty, -remembering the principle of arrangement, in giving -a fairly appropriate answer, even though the -memory be for the moment at fault as to its exact -terms. To avoid the necessity of giving the same -answer more than once, it is well to make a rule -that the same question shall not be asked more than -three times.</p> - -<p>The Oracle may be introduced as follows:</p> - -<p>“Allow me to introduce to your notice a curio of -an exceptionally interesting kind. This elegant -little affair is said to have been the private Oracle -of Rameses the Second, a gentleman who flourished -in Egypt about four thousand years ago. I can’t -be sure to a year or two, because it was before my -time, but I believe that is about right. People -sometimes express surprise that, being so ancient, -the Oracle should be in such good condition, but -that is accounted for by its having been preserved -in the same case as Rammy’s mummy. I don’t -mean his mamma, but the gentleman himself, in -the cold storage of the period. The story may or -may not be true. I can’t take any responsibility -for it. Others declare that the Oracle was the favourite<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[145]</a></span> -plaything of Helen of Troy. Historians do -tell such tarradiddles that one doesn’t know what -to believe.</p> - -<p>“The powers of the Oracle are limited, for it will -only answer eight questions, and in its own way, -but its answers are quite trustworthy—well, perhaps -not <i>quite</i>. Let us say as trustworthy as those -of Bond Street fortune-tellers at a guinea a guess. -Who will be the first to test its veracity?</p> - -<p>“I should mention, by the way, that, as each -answer exhausts a certain amount of power, the -same question must not be asked more than three -times. You would like to consult the Oracle, -Madam? Then please select one of the questions -on this card, and read it out for the information of -the Company.</p> - -<p>“You wish to know” (repeating question). -“Good. The answer to your question will be found -on one or other of the cards in this pack, and the -Oracle will tell us which one to look for. First, -however, I must ask you to breathe into this glass. -That supplies the missing link, so to speak, and -makes it a sort of personal affair between you and -the Oracle.” (This is done.)</p> - -<p>“Thank you. Now I shall place the glass on its -stand, and this little pointer” (holding it up and -placing it on its pivot) “will reveal the correct -answer, first indicating the suit among which the -answer is to be found. You may notice that it -wobbles a bit at first. That is because it is thinking<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[146]</a></span> -over the question. Now it has come to rest, -and it says the answer will be found in the”—(name -suit.) “And now to find out which is the -right card of that suit. I take off the glass and -turn the dial over. Please concentrate your mind -on your question. I put the glass and the pointer -on again. Again the pointer thinks it over, and -finally decides as you see, for the—” (naming -number of card.) “Now all we have to do is to -look out that card” (does so) “and here we have -the answer to your question.”</p> - -<p>Before inviting a fresh querist to breathe into -the glass, it is well to wipe it out carefully with a -silk pocket handkerchief, professedly to dispel the -personal magnetism of the last enquirer, any -remains of which, left within the glass, might -imperil the correctness of the anticipated answer.</p> - -<h3>THE MYSTERY OF MAHOMET<a name="FNanchor_16" id="FNanchor_16"></a><a href="#Footnote_16" class="fnanchor">[16]</a></h3> - -<p>The reader is probably familiar with the trick -known as “The Silver Tube and Ball.” If not, -it may be stated that the “tube” is of metal, nickelled, -and about eight inches long by one and a -half in diameter. With it is used an ebony ball, -which is made to pass into and out of the tube in a -very surprising way.</p> - -<p>The secret lies partly in the fact that half way<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[147]</a></span> -down, the internal diameter of the tube is very -slightly narrowed, forming a sort of “choke,” so -that a ball dropped into it at the upper end does -not fall right through, as one would naturally -expect, but stops at that point, wedging itself -lightly, so that the tube can be reversed without -any fear of the ball falling out, though it can be -instantly driven out by bringing down the tube -smartly on the table, or by very slight pressure -behind it.</p> - -<p>The other part of the secret lies in the fact that -<i>two</i> balls are in reality used, the existence of the -second being of course unknown to the spectator. -The tube being loaded as above mentioned, <i>i.e.</i> having -the one ball wedged in it just below the choke, -if the duplicate is dropped in from above it will -apparently fall through, though as a matter of fact -this ball comes to a standstill in the tube above the -choke, while the other is driven out at the bottom. -The secret use of this second ball enables the performer -to produce sundry surprising results in the -way of appearances and disappearances.</p> - -<p>The possibilities of the trick in this form are -however speedily exhausted, and it has a serious -drawback in the fact that it is necessary to invert -the tube afresh before each production, as it is -obvious that a ball contained in it must be brought -below the choke before it can be produced. I had -at one time rather a fancy for the trick, but it -seemed to me that it was capable of a good deal of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[148]</a></span> -improvement, and after some cogitation I succeeded -in producing a new trick on somewhat similar -lines; but free from the defect mentioned above -and capable withal of producing a far wider variety -of effects.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 175px;"> -<img src="images/figure29.jpg" width="175" height="250" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 29</span></p> -</div> - -<p>I use two tubes of stiff cardboard, each about -four inches long by one and a half in diameter. -One of these is just a plain tube with no speciality -about it. The other has a piece of fine wire crossing -it midway from side to side, and taking the -form of a half hoop, as shown in Fig. 29, the ends -serving as pivots on which it moves freely. On the -outside, one of its ends is turned down vertically, -forming a tiny switch or handle. The normal -tendency of the halfhoop is to hang downward -across the tube (thereby closing it to the passage of -a ball) but a touch of the finger, moving the little<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[149]</a></span> -switch to right or left, raises the loop to a horizontal -position against one or other of the sides -of the tube, when it no longer offers any obstacle -to the passing of the ball. The wire used is so thin -that with the halfhoop lying against its side a spectator -may safely be allowed to look through the -tube even at a very short distance, without fear of -his perceiving the presence of the wire.</p> - -<p>The requirements for the trick, all told, are as -follows:</p> - -<ul> -<li>(1) The wand.</li> -<li>(2) The plain tube.</li> -<li>(3) The trick tube.</li> -<li>(4) Two white balls.</li> -<li>(5) A red ball.</li> -<li>(6) A lighted candle.</li> -<li>(7) A small red silk handkerchief.</li> -</ul> - -<p>One of the white balls must be vested or otherwise -so placed as to be ready for production from -the wand. The second white ball and the red ball -are stowed in the pochettes, one on each side. The -faked tube may be vested and exchanged for the -plain one during the journey back to the table -after the dummy has been tendered for inspection; -the latter being dropped into the profonde. -These however are matters which the expert will -arrange after his own fashion. If the performer, -not being an expert, doubts his ability to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[150]</a></span> -“change” the tubes neatly during the transit, he -may suppress the plain tube altogether and commence -at once with the exhibition of the faked tube -from the platform, but the omission makes the -trick less convincing.</p> - -<p>We will suppose that the performer goes for -the maximum effect and advances offering the -dummy tube for inspection. The patter I suggest -for the trick in this form runs as follows:</p> - -<p>“I have here, ladies and gentlemen, a hollow tube. -It is not uncommon for tubes to be hollow, but this -one is, if anything, even hollower than usual. I -should like some lady or gentleman to examine it -carefully and testify that it is just a plain ordinary -tube with absolutely no deception of any sort about -it. If it was not so, you may be sure I should -hardly venture to let you examine it. You can see -through it, hear through it, or blow through it. -You are satisfied? Then I will show you a curious -little experiment with it.”</p> - -<p>During the return to the table the dummy is -exchanged for the trick tube.</p> - -<p>“I call the experiment I am about to show you -‘The Mystery of Mahomet.’ I gave it that name -because it was Mahomet who suggested the idea to -me. I don’t mean personally. I didn’t know -him. In point of fact he did not give me the idea -till after he had been dead for some years. This -sounds peculiar, but I will explain.</p> - -<p>“When Mahomet died he wasn’t buried like<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[151]</a></span> -other people. His coffin was placed in a mosque, -where it hangs in the air like a captive balloon, -about twenty feet up, resting on nothing at all. I -am not certain as to the exact height from the -ground, but that is what the Moslems say, and they -would hardly tell a story about a little thing like -that. It has always been a mystery what keeps -the prophet up aloft. Some say it is done by mesmerism, -some say by magnetism, and one old gentleman -declared it was done by mormonism. No -doubt, when you come to think of it Mahomet was -a bit of a Mormon. But they are all wide of the -mark. As a matter of fact the coffin rests on a -slab of compressed air. It’s quite simple, when -you know it. I haven’t a coffin handy, but by -means of this little tube I can show you the effect -of the same principle on a smaller scale.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 100px;"> -<img src="images/figure30.jpg" width="100" height="250" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 30</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[152]</a></span></p> - -<p>“As some of you have not had the opportunity -of personally examining the tube I should like to -prove to you in the first place that it is really what -it appears to be, a simple cardboard cylinder, open -from end to end, and as free from deception as I -am myself.</p> - -<p>“Proof 1.” (Wand dropped through tube on -to table.)</p> - -<p>“Proof 2.” (Tube held in front of candle showing -flame through it.“)</p> - -<p>“Proof 3.” (Tube dropped over candle as in -Fig. 30, or spun on wand, held horizontally as in -Fig. 31; the halfhoop in each case being made to -lie against the side of the tube.)</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> -<img src="images/figure31.jpg" width="300" height="100" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 31</span></p> -</div> - -<p>“I have here a little ball, of such a size that it -passes easily through the tube.”<a name="FNanchor_17" id="FNanchor_17"></a><a href="#Footnote_17" class="fnanchor">[17]</a> The ball is -allowed to fall through, from the one hand to the -other.</p> - -<p>“Now I will place the tube upright on the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[153]</a></span> -table and drop the ball in once more. Where is it -now? On the table, you say. Quite right: here -it is.” (Lift tube, closing it, and placing it on -end beside ball.) “But now I take a few handfuls -of air and press them well down into the tube” -(makes believe to do so), “and I drop the ball in -again. This time you see it does not fall through. -As a matter of fact it has stopped halfway, resting -on the compressed air in the tube.” (Lift tube, -showing that the ball has not passed through. -After replacing the tube switch the wire loop to -the horizontal position, allowing the ball to drop -inside the tube.) “I think there can be no doubt -that this is the way Mr. Home, the medium, managed -to float about with his head in the air and his -feet on the mantelpiece. All that was needed was -a few pints of compressed air in his tail-pockets. -It’s quite simple, when you know how it’s done.</p> - -<p>“Of course, as the tube is open at the top, the -effect doesn’t last very long. The compressed air -gradually expands again and becomes too thin to -support the ball any longer. I dare say by this -time it has done so.” (Lift tube, exposing ball, -and re-closing tube). “Yes, here it is.”</p> - -<p>“I can keep the air from escaping to a certain -extent, because I happen to have a very strong -won’t. A strong will is a good thing to have, but -sometimes a strong won’t is even more useful. -Once again I will fill the tube with compressed air.” -(Make believe to do so, then pick up the closed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[154]</a></span> -tube.) “I drop the ball in again, and this time it -will remain suspended till I permit the compressed -air to escape.” (Pick up tube, holding it vertically -a few inches above the table.) “Say when you -would like the ball to fall. Now? Good! I withdraw -my strong won’t and the ball falls at once.” -(Switch loop, allowing it to do so, then pass tube, -closing it, to opposite hand and load into it duplicate -ball at top; then replacing tube on table.)</p> - -<p>“Now, by way of variety, we will try compressing -the ball instead of the air.” (Pick up ball left -on table and make believe to transfer it to the opposite -hand. Then, with the left hand empty, make -pretence of crushing it into the hand.) “The ball -is now resolved into its component atoms. You -didn’t see them go? No, of course you didn’t. -For the time being they are dematerialised: but the -compressed air in the tube will soon solidify them -again.” (Lift tube, keeping ball suspended.) -“It has not got solid yet, but we shall not have long -to wait.” (After a few moments again lift tube, -opening it and allowing ball to pass through.) -“Here is the ball, now as solid as before.”</p> - -<p>Transfer tube closed to opposite hand and in so -doing load in red ball at top. In replacing tube -on table open and close it again, so that the ball -shall fall, but shall rest within the tube on the -table.</p> - -<p>“Now I will show you another curious effect. A -ball which has been dematerialised in that way<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[155]</a></span> -becomes very sensitive to colour. I will just give -the ball a rub with this red silk handkerchief and -drop it into the tube again.” Drop in white ball -after rubbing, keeping tube closed; then raise it -and show red ball at bottom.</p> - -<p>“Here it is again, you see, but it has taken the -colour of the handkerchief and is now a rosy red, -a sort of maiden’s blush; the blush of a very shy -maiden. Unfortunately maiden’s blush is not a -fast colour, unless it’s the wrong kind; the kind -that’s rubbed in with a powder puff. This kind -soon gets pale again. I rub the ball again, this -time with a white handkerchief, and again drop -it into the tube.”</p> - -<p>Drop in red ball, tube closed, lift and show white -ball, under cover of its appearance transferring -tube to opposite hand and allowing red ball to -run back into palm to be got rid of a moment -later.</p> - -<p>“I think I heard a lady say, ‘Where is the red -ball?’ This is the red ball, at least it was the red -ball a moment ago. There is no other, for, as you -see, the tube is empty.”</p> - -<p>Again drop tube over candle as in Fig. 30. Pass -ball from hand to hand and finally make believe to -swallow it, meanwhile dropping it into the profonde.</p> - -<p>“After being treated like this the ball becomes so -volatile that I used to be always losing it. But I -never lose it now. I just swallow it and then I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[156]</a></span> -know just where it is when I want it. It saves a -lot of trouble.”</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_16" id="Footnote_16"></a><a href="#FNanchor_16"><span class="label">[16]</span></a> A description of this trick will be found in <i>The Magician</i> for March, -1914.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_17" id="Footnote_17"></a><a href="#FNanchor_17"><span class="label">[17]</span></a> If preferred the ball instead of being taken openly from the table, -may be produced from the wand after the fashion familiar in the Cup -and Ball trick, but on the whole I think this is best omitted.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<h3>THE BEWILDERING BLOCKS</h3> - -<p>The blocks which give its title to this trick are -inch-square wooden cubes, three in number, as -illustrated in Fig. 32. Each is coloured black on -two of its opposite sides; these in use being made -top and bottom. The four remaining sides are in -the case of one block red, of another white, and of -a third blue. The only other item of apparatus -known to the spectators is a square cardboard tube, -as depicted in Fig. 33. This is about five inches -long, and of such dimensions laterally as to let -either block slide by its own weight easily through -it, but no more. All four items may be freely submitted -to inspection, for in this case appearances -are not deceitful. Both the blocks and the tube are -no more and no less than they seem to be.</p> - -<p>In exhibiting the trick, the tube is placed upright -on the table, and the three blocks are dropped into -it one after another, the company being requested -to note particularly the order in which they are -inserted, which we will suppose to be in the first -instance blue, then white, and lastly red, as shown -without the tube in Fig. 32. It is clear that, once -inserted, they cannot by any natural means alter -their relative positions, but, strange to say, when -they are again uncovered, the red block just<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[157]</a></span> -inserted at the top is found to have passed to the -bottom, the other two moving up accordingly.</p> - -<p>This surprising effect is produced by the secret -introduction into the tube of a fourth block of -which the spectators know nothing. This, which -we will call the “trick” block, is, like the rest, coloured -black at the top and bottom; but of the -remaining four sides two, contiguous to each other, -are red, and the other two blue.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px;"> -<img src="images/figure32-34.jpg" width="400" height="275" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 32</span> <span class="smcap spacer">Fig. 33</span> <span class="smcap">Fig. 34</span></p> -</div> - -<p>When the tube is handed back to the performer<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[158]</a></span> -after inspection, before placing it on the table he -secretly introduces the trick block into its lower -end, privately noting against which sides of the -tube the two <i>red</i> faces will lie, and taking care in -placing the tube upon the table that the angle -formed by these two sides shall be to the front. -The other three blocks are then, in accordance with -the patter, dropped in from above, in the order -shown in Fig. 32, resting, unknown to the spectators, -on top of the trick block. When the performer -lifts off the tube, which he does grasping it diagonally -between thumb and finger at about an inch -from the top, he does so with gentle pressure, -thereby holding back the uppermost block within -the tube, and exposing the two others with the trick -block at the bottom, as indicated by Fig. 34.</p> - -<p>I gave a description of this trick in the <i>Magician</i> -of February, 1914. The patter for its exhibition -was based on a popular nursery legend, and as this -mode of presentation won general approval from -the juveniles I cannot do better than repeat it practically -as there given. The needful working -instructions will be found interspersed with the -patter.</p> - -<p>“What I am going to show you now is not a trick, -or, if you can call it a trick, it is one that works -itself, for you will see for yourselves that I have -really nothing to do with it. It is just an illustration -of the force of bad example.</p> - -<p>“No doubt you have all heard of a young gentleman<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[159]</a></span> -called Fidgety Phil. There is a little poem -about him. It says:</p> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">‘Fidgety Phil</div> -<div class="verse indent1">Couldn’t keep still,</div> -<div class="verse">Made his mother and father ill.’</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<p>“There are a lot more verses but I am sorry to -say I don’t know them. However, these few lines -are enough to show you what sort of a boy Fidgety -Phil was. He was the kind of boy that wherever -he is, he wants to be somewhere else. When he -was standing up he wanted to sit down, and when -he was sitting down he wriggled about on his chair -till he was allowed to stand up again.</p> - -<p>“These little blocks are all that are left of a -box of bricks which are said to have belonged to -Fidgety Phil and they show what even a box of -bricks may come to if a bad example is constantly -set before them. These three little bricks have got -to be just as fidgety as Phil was himself. Anyhow, -that is the only way in which I can account -for their queer behaviour.</p> - -<p>“Please have a good look at them, and see if you -can discover anything peculiar about them. I -can’t, myself.” (The blocks are handed for examination.) -“They seem to me to be just ordinary -bits of coloured wood, and this square tube is -believed to have been a chimney pot belonging to -the same set. I want you to notice particularly -that the bricks are just the right size to fit closely<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[160]</a></span> -in the chimney. They go in quite easily; but when -they are once inside they can’t turn round, or turn -over, or change places. But the curious thing is -that though they can’t they <i>do</i>, as you will see -presently.</p> - -<p>“I place the chimney-pot here on the table, -where you can see all round it, and I drop the -three bricks into it one by one. Notice particularly -the order in which I put them in. First, the -blue. You heard it go down. Next, the white, -and now, the red. Don’t forget. Blue at the bottom, -white in the middle, and red at the top.</p> - -<p>“Now, without my saying or doing anything, -they will at once begin to shift about. They can’t -keep still for more than a few seconds. When I -lift off the chimney pot, you will find that they have -changed places.” (It is lifted accordingly, performer -holding back the uppermost block within it -by gentle pressure on opposite angles of the tube, -and exhibiting only the three lower blocks now as -in Fig. 34.)</p> - -<p>“There, as I told you, like Fidgety Phil, they -couldn’t keep still. The white brick has climbed -to the top, the red one has gone down to the bottom, -and the blue one is now in the middle.</p> - -<p>“We will try again. I will put the bricks in in -just the same order, to make it easier for you to -remember them.”</p> - -<p>Performer has meanwhile allowed the red block, -left in the upper part of the tube, to sink to the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[161]</a></span> -bottom, checked by the third finger, and replaces -tube upright on table.</p> - -<p>“As before, I drop in first the blue, then the -white, then the red.” (This last being the trick -block, care must be taken to keep its <i>red</i> sides well -to the front.)</p> - -<p>“Again I lift off the chimney pot, and again -you see, the bricks have changed places. White -has come to the top, and red has gone to the bottom -again.”</p> - -<p>The trick block, which this time remained at -the top, is now allowed to slide down to the bottom. -The tube is again placed on the table, but so turned -that the <i>blue</i> sides of the block within it are brought -to the front.</p> - -<p>“I can’t tell you why the bricks behave in this -way, but you can see for yourselves that <i>I</i> have -nothing to do with it. We will try it once more, -and for a change I will put the red block in first, -then the white and then the blue. That order will -be easy to remember. Red, white and blue reckoning -from the bottom upwards. Again I remove the -cover. The same thing has happened again, but -with a little difference. White has come to the -top again, but blue has this time gone to the bottom.”</p> - -<p>While attention is drawn to the new order of -the blocks, the performer allows the ordinary blue -one, now left in the tube, to slide out into his hand, -and in picking up the others secretly substitutes<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[162]</a></span> -this for the trick block, which is now at the bottom -of the tube.</p> - -<p>“Once more, ladies and gentlemen, here is the -chimney pot, and here are the three bricks, for -inspection by any one who cares to look at them. -Perhaps some of you may be able to account for -their remarkable behaviour. It’s a puzzle to me; -but I never was good at guessing. My own idea is -that they are haunted by the ghost of Fidgety -Phil. If not, I give it up.”</p> - -<h3>AN “OD” FORCE</h3> - -<p>To avoid misconception, it may be well to state -at once that the peculiar spelling of the word “od” -in the above title is not a printer’s error. The -explanation will be found in the patter, which is -founded on a discovery claimed to have been made -by a scientist at one time of world-wide renown, -and the responsibility for so spelling the word rests -with him. For programme purposes the reader -is at liberty to re-name the trick according to his -own fancy. “Mysterious Motion,” or “Moved by -Magic” would fairly represent the effect produced, -which consists in causing a borrowed coin to move -automatically at the will of the operator, in various -directions.</p> - -<p>The requirements for the trick are as follows:</p> - -<p>(1) The “tramway” whereon the coin is to be -made to travel. This consists of a slab of wood<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[163]</a></span> -thirteen inches long by four wide, and three-eighths -of an inch thick and covered as to its upper -side with fine black cloth. To the cloth-covered -side of this is attached, by means of a screw at -each corner, a parallelogram of brass or copper -wire enclosing a space two inches wide. The four -screws, which are likewise of brass, and which are -of the round-headed kind, are within the parallelogram -and serve to keep the wire extended. Midway -at each end is another screw, driven in <i>outside</i> -the wire, in such manner as to make all taut. -These last two screws, for a reason connected with -the working of the trick, stand up a shade higher -than the other four, but the difference is not great -enough to be noticeable. See Fig. 35.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px;"> -<img src="images/figure35.jpg" width="400" height="225" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 35</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[164]</a></span></p> - -<p>(2) A special “pull” carried on the person of -the performer. This consists of a fine black -thread, to one end of which is attached a weight -travelling up and down the trouser leg, after the -manner described (in connection with a self-suspending -wand) at page 111 of “Later Magic.” In -the present case, however, the weight is much -smaller, being in fact just large enough to rather -more than counterbalance the coin used in the -trick, <i>plus</i> the friction to be overcome by the thread -in the working of the trick. The degree of such -friction is an uncertain quantity, as it will largely -depend on the nature of the operator’s underwear -and its closeness to his own body. The precise -weight most effective must be ascertained by previous -experiment, and regulated accordingly.</p> - -<p>It will be found convenient to use by way of -weight a glass tube, closed at the bottom like a -test-tube and loaded with buckshot, more or less -in quantity according to the weight required. -The mouth of the tube is closed by a cork, through -which one end of the thread is passed, and secured -on the under side by a knot and a spot of gum. -When the minimum weight that will effectually -serve the desired purpose has been ascertained, any -vacant space above the leaden pellets should be -filled with cotton wool (to prevent rattling) and the -cork should then be cemented into the tube. If -preferred, the wool may be interspersed among the -buckshot.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[165]</a></span></p> - -<p>The opposite end of the thread, which will be -somewhere about thirty inches in length (this again -being a point to be determined by experiment), -is passed through the curled end of a good-sized -safety pin. This, for use in the trick, is attached -to the inside of the performer’s vest, just within -the lowest part of the opening. To the free-end -of the thread, after passing through the loop of -the pin, is attached a disc of copper or zinc, three-quarters -of an inch in diameter, against which, on -one side, is pressed and flattened out a pellet of -conjurer’s wax, in good adhesive condition. If the -length of the thread has been duly regulated, the -little disc will rest normally just within the vest, -but can be drawn out the extent of a couple of feet -or so, returning swiftly to its hiding place the -moment it is released.</p> - -<p>(3) A glass ball—professedly crystal.</p> - -<p>(4) An ordinary match-box, empty.</p> - -<p>Instructions for the working of the trick will -be most conveniently given step by step with the -patter, which may run as follows:</p> - -<p>“In the early days of Queen Victoria’s reign, -when the oldest of us here present were good little -boys or girls, and the rest were not born or thought -of, there lived a celebrated scientific gentleman, -called the Baron von Reichenbach. I am sorry to -say he was a German, but he couldn’t help it. As -his father and mother were Germans, he had to be -one too. It shows how careful children ought to be<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[166]</a></span> -in the choice of their parents. He invented a lot of -useful things, among them creosote and paraffin. -Neither of them smells very nice, but they don’t -trouble about that in Germany.</p> - -<p>“Besides being a great chemist, Von Thingany -dabbled in what are called the occult sciences, and -he claimed to have discovered a new force (a sort -of magnetism, only different) and which, he -declared, pervaded every thing in nature, especially -crystal. Directed by a strong will, like his -own, or mine, it would do all sorts of wonderful -things. It seemed to me that such a force would -come in very handy for magical purposes, and I -set to work to invent it over again, and I have at -any rate produced something very like it. The -Baron called his force ‘odd,’ but he spelt it ‘od,’ -which is odd too. You must judge for yourselves -whether my force is the same as his, and you can -spell it which way you like.</p> - -<p>“I have only been able so far to work up a very -small amount of the force, say about six mouse-power, -so it won’t turn tables, or lift pianos. I can -only get it, so far, to move a small weight like a -florin or a half-dollar, and that only for a very short -distance. For greater conveniences I have made -this little tramway for the coin to perform upon. -These wires which you see are not for it to travel -on, but merely to get more equal distribution of -the force. There is nothing out of the way about<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[167]</a></span> -it, nor with this ball, except that it is crystal. -Examine both as much as you please.”</p> - -<p>The two articles are accordingly offered for -inspection. The performer takes back the tramway -in the left hand, holding it by one end in such -manner that it is gripped in the fork of the thumb, -leaving the thumb itself comparatively free. Taking -back the ball with the right hand and remarking -“Now to develop the force,” he rubs it on his -left coat-sleeve, and strokes the surface of the tramway -two or three times with it.</p> - -<p>“Having now established a proper degree of -‘oddity’ between the tram and the crystal, I will -ask for the loan of a half-dollar (or florin as the -case may be) marked in any way the owner -pleases.”</p> - -<p>He replaces the ball on the table, and in the act -of again turning to the audience gets hold of the -waxed disc and draws it away from the body, holding -it clipped between the ends of the first and second -fingers, the left thumb pressing the thread -against the cloth top of the tramway, and acting for -the time being (and indeed throughout the trick) -as a brake neutralising at pleasure the pull of the -weight.</p> - -<p>He receives the coin on the tramway; then picking -it up with the right hand, makes some observation -as to the mark, meanwhile pressing the -waxed side of the disc against it, then replacing it, -disc down, in the middle of the tramway.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[168]</a></span></p> - -<p>“I shall now, by means of the ‘od’ force, compel -the coin to move towards me.” This he does -accordingly, by relaxing the pressure of the thumb -upon the thread and merely bringing the pull of -the weight into operation. When the coin has all -but reached the nearer end of the tramway, he says, -“We will now see if we can make it travel a little -longer distance.” So saying he draws the thread -out again and lays the coin on the farther end of -the tram, and again makes it travel slowly back. -A good effect may be here produced by making it -stop halfway, and (after remarking in a casual -way that the power is hardly strong enough) picking -up the ball, again rubbing it upon the sleeve -and moving it, a few inches distance, in the direction -in which the coin is to travel, when it resumes -its journey accordingly.</p> - -<p>Once more picking up the coin, he replaces it at -the farther end of the tramway, but in so doing -passes the thread outside and around the screw at -that end. He then remarks, as if bethinking himself: -“By the way, a lady suggested the other -night that the coin was attracted towards me by -my personal magnetism. I know I am an attractive -man: I have been told so frequently but that -is not the explanation in this case, as I will prove -to you by making the coin travel <i>away</i> from me.” -So saying, he draws the coin towards him, easing -off the pressure on the thread to enable him to do -so, and leaves it at the inner end. The ball is<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[169]</a></span> -now moved away from himself, and the pressure -of the brake being relaxed, the coin is now drawn -in the same direction.</p> - -<p>“‘<i>Quod erat demonstrandum</i>,’ as our old friend -Shakespeare (or was it Euclid) used to say.” (To -the lender of the coin.) “You must take care of -this coin, Sir; it is now charged with a minute -quantity of the ‘od’ force, and so long as you -keep it you can never be ‘stony-broke.’ I will show -you just one more effect with it before I return it to -you.”</p> - -<p>While speaking, he has carelessly picked up the -coin, and replaced it on the <i>inner</i> side of the screw -so that this shall be no longer encircled by the -thread. Picking up the match box from the table, -he pushes out the “tray” portion with the forefinger; -then throwing aside the outer case, he picks -up the tray, and inverts it over the coin.</p> - -<p>“I will now show you that the ‘od’ force still -operates even though it is cut off from any direct -connection with the subject of the experiment: but -in this case a little more power is required.” So -saying he rubs the glass ball again on his coat-sleeve, -and, moving the ball accordingly, causes the -coin to travel towards him, the match-box naturally -moving with it. In again picking up the coin, -to return it to the owner, he detaches it from the -disc, which flies back to its original resting-place.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[170]</a></span></p> - -<h3>THE MYSTERY OF THE THREE SEALS</h3> - -<p>This is a trick involving some little trouble in -the way of preparation, and perhaps a little more -than average address on the part of the performer, -but on the other hand it costs little; for all the -needful appliances may be homemade, and in the -hands of an expert the trick will amply repay the -time and trouble expended upon it. Baldly stated, -its effect consists in the magical introduction of a -marked coin into the innermost of a nest of three -envelopes, each securely sealed.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 135px;"> -<img src="images/figure36.jpg" width="135" height="200" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 36</span></p> -</div> - -<p>The requirements for the trick are as under:</p> - -<p>1. Two nests of envelopes. The innermost of -each is one of the little square kind used in shops -to contain copper “change,” or to hold the weekly -wage of an employee. It should be of cartridge or -stout manila paper, and about two inches square. -The next larger is of the ordinary square or so-called -square-note size, and the third a little larger -still. Envelopes of the two last mentioned sizes -are not always to be obtained made of cartridge -or manila, but this condition is not in their case -absolutely essential. The flap of each envelope -must be stuck down and sealed with red wax.<a name="FNanchor_18" id="FNanchor_18"></a><a href="#Footnote_18" class="fnanchor">[18]</a></p> - -<p>2. A special envelope, which we will call the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[171]</a></span> -“trick” envelope. This is of the same size and -kind as the innermost of the nested envelopes but -has undergone special preparation as follows: -Taking two ordinary envelopes, cut round the -edges of one of them with a penknife, completely -dividing back from front. Take the plain or non-flap -side of the one so treated, lay it squarely under -the flap of the other, and stick the flap down upon -it in the ordinary way: then add a seal of red -wax, as closely as possible corresponding in appearance -with the two seals of the innermost of the -nested envelopes. Lastly, cut away the superfluous -paper round the seal and the edges of the -flap. The envelope will now be shown as in Fig. -36, and when closed will have the appearance of -an envelope sealed in the ordinary way, though it<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[172]</a></span> -as yet lacks the connecting medium for actually -securing it.</p> - -<p>3. The “coin mat” (<a href="#Page_4">page 4</a>) freshly treated -with the usual adhesive. The side so treated is to -be turned downwards on the table with a shilling -pressed against the adhesive portion.</p> - -<p>4. A penknife, to be used as envelope opener.</p> - -<p>As shortly as possible before the presentation of -the trick, the trick envelope must be further prepared -by spreading a thin layer of seccotine on that -portion of the underside of the flap immediately -under the seal.</p> - -<p>N. B. This must not be done too long beforehand, -as it is essential to the success of the trick -that the envelope be used while the seccotine is still -in a “tacky” condition.</p> - -<p>The envelope prepared as above, to be laid on the -table, behind some small object, or preferably just -inside the foremost rim of a Japanese tray; at one -corner, mouth uppermost, and flap to the rear. -Under these conditions, the butting of the opposite -edge of the envelope against the forward wall of -the tray will be found greatly to facilitate the subsequent -introduction of the borrowed coin. Before -so placing the envelope, its edges on each side -should be pressed slightly inwards, so as to make -it expand a little at the opening.</p> - -<p>These arrangements duly made, the performer -may introduce the trick as follows:</p> - -<p>“I don’t know whether anybody here remembers<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[173]</a></span> -George the Third, I can’t say I do myself. He -was before my time, but there is a funny little story -told about him. One day when out for a walk, he -went into a farmhouse where he found the family -having their dinner. One dish consisted of apple-dumplings, -and the question crossed the King’s -mind, ‘How on earth did the apples get into the -dumplings?’ He didn’t like to ask, but he -couldn’t get the puzzle out of his head. He -thought about it so much and it worried him so -that at last he went clean out of his mind. He -became <i>non compos mentis</i>, which is the doctors’ -polite way of saying dotty.</p> - -<p>“I mention this story by way of a caution. What -I am going to show you is ever so much more incomprehensible -than any number of apple-dumplings; -in fact, so extra-extraordinary that if anybody here -was the least bit excitable and I sprung it upon -him unawares he might go dotty like old Georgie. -So if any of you feel at all nervous, don’t hesitate -to go home, or you can go and sit on the stairs -till this particular experiment is over. Nobody -moves! I am pleased to find that you are all so -strong-minded, but if anything happens don’t -blame me.</p> - -<p>“I have known strong men; men of massive intellect, -like myself, come here with a smile on their -faces, but when they left the smile was replaced by -an air of grim determination. You could see at -a glance that they had made up their minds to find<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[174]</a></span> -out how it was done, or <i>die</i>. They haven’t come -again: so I suppose they died.<a name="FNanchor_19" id="FNanchor_19"></a><a href="#Footnote_19" class="fnanchor">[19]</a></p> - -<p>“As you are prepared to run the risk I will ask -some gentleman to oblige me with the loan of a -shilling, marked, in some unmistakable way. -Thank you, Sir. You have marked the coin? -Then please place it here, on this little tray. I -won’t touch it myself at present. All please keep -one eye upon it, the other eye you had better keep -on me.”</p> - -<p>Receive the coin on the mat, held in right hand. -After showing the left hand empty, transfer the -mat to that hand and show the right empty. -Return the mat to right hand, but before doing so -turn that hand over so as to receive the mat with -thumb undermost. Just as you reach the table -to place the mat upon it bring the second and third -fingers over the borrowed coin, and under cover -of your own body turn the mat over. In putting it -down on the table draw away the borrowed coin -into the hand and palm it. To the eye of the spectator -the state of things will be unaltered, your -own coin, now uppermost on the mat, being taken -for the borrowed one.</p> - -<p>You continue, standing behind your table, and -resting the right hand, with the palmed coin, close -to the trick envelope, and holding up the two nests<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[175]</a></span> -in the other hand: “I have here two envelopes, -or, to be exact, six envelopes, for each of those you -see contains two more, one within the other: all -carefully sealed. I am going to pass the coin this -gentleman has lent me into the innermost of one -or other of them, I don’t care which, for they are -exactly alike, so I shall leave the choice to yourselves.”</p> - -<p>While you are speaking as above the disengaged -hand slips the genuine coin into the trick envelope, -closes it, pressing the flap well down, and palms it, -dropping it a moment or two later into a pochette -till needed.</p> - -<p>“You decide for this envelope? Just as you -please. As the other will not be needed I will ask -somebody to open it, and bear witness that things -are exactly as I have stated.”</p> - -<p>Leaving the chosen envelope on the table in full -view and bringing forward the other, have the latter -opened by some member of the company with -the penknife. Hand the envelope produced from -it, with the knife, to a second spectator, to be dealt -with in like manner. When the innermost is -reached, have this opened by the lender of the -marked coin: this apparent proof of good faith -tending to make him less critical when, at a later -stage, he is invited to do the same with the trick -envelope.</p> - -<p>“Nothing could be fairer, could it? You will all -agree that it would have been impossible to introduce<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[176]</a></span> -anything into the innermost of those three -envelopes without breaking all three seals. When -I say impossible, of course I mean impossible to a -mere man. To a magician there is no such word as -impossible, except in the dictionary. In fact, the -more impossible a thing is, the more any respectable -magician makes up his mind to do it. Watch -me carefully, please. I want you to be quite sure -all through that there is no deception.</p> - -<p>“Now then, to pass the coin into this other envelope.” -As you say this, you pick up the coin mat, -depress it enough for all present to see the coin -upon it, and make the motion of sliding it off into -the left hand. This should be done while standing -a little in front of your table. In turning to -replace the mat, reverse it and lay it with the side -to which the coin adheres downwards. If deftly -executed, this reversal of the mat will be imperceptible, -as it is covered by the turn to the table. -Even if it were noticed it would have practically no -significance for the spectators, who naturally take -it for granted that the coin has passed from the -mat into your hand. The moment you have laid -down the mat, the now disengaged hand picks up -the nest of envelopes, and you make believe to rub -the coin (supposedly in left hand) into it. This -done, you hold the envelope aloft in each hand -alternately, allowing it to be seen that the hands -are otherwise empty.</p> - -<p>“So far, so good! The coin has passed from my<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[177]</a></span> -hands into the innermost envelope. But I don’t -expect you to take my word for it. Will you, sir” -(any given spectator) “open the outermost envelope, -first, however, satisfying yourself that it is still -securely sealed?”</p> - -<p>It is just possible, though not very likely, that -the person to whom the envelope and penknife have -been handed may notice, and remark audibly, that -he cannot feel any coin in the envelope. If such a -remark is made, you reply that the coin naturally -had to be dematerialised before it could pass into -the envelope, and it will take a few minutes for it -to re-materialise, but it will become gradually more -solid, and will then be distinctly perceptible.</p> - -<p>The outer envelope having been opened you take -back its contents, and under pretext of getting as -many witnesses as possible to fair play, have the -next envelope opened by a second person, seated -at some little distance from the lender of the shilling. -The last named gentleman is invited himself -to open the last envelope, or rather, the trick envelope, -which you in transit substitute for it. Having -already opened a precisely similar envelope, and -found it securely fastened, he is not likely to anticipate -anything different about this one. If he uses -the penknife and cuts it open along the edge of -the flap in the usual way he will naturally hold it -with the thumb upon the seal and all will be well. -As a rule, he will be more concerned to identify the -coin as the one he lent than to seek for any suspicious<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[178]</a></span> -feature about the envelope. Even in the -unlikely case of his tearing open the envelope, -instead of cutting it, it is doubtful whether he -would detect the use of the seccotine, which should -by this time be practically dry; and by the rest of -the spectators it would still be taken for granted -that this envelope, like the rest, was sealed in the -ordinary way.</p> - -<p>It will be obvious to the expert reader that the -central idea, viz., the transformation by the use -of seccotine of an open envelope into one apparently -sealed in the regular way, is one that admits -of a wide variety of detail as to the mode of presentation. -For instance: The procedure suggested -for getting rid of the duplicate coin, and -apparently rubbing it into the envelope, is but one -of many alternatives. The coin might be -“passed” by the agency of fire, <i>i.e.</i>, wrapped in a -piece of flash paper with open fold at bottom and -flared off at the psychological moment over a candle -flame, or it might be got rid of by vanishing it into -the pocket of a black art mat, or by the use of a -black art patch, as described at <a href="#Page_20">page 20</a>.</p> - -<p>The critical part of the trick is the “switching” -of the two envelopes at the final stage, but in view -of their small size this is a matter of very little -difficulty. The expert will probably do this after -some fashion of his own. The less instructed -reader may use the following plan, which he will<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[179]</a></span> -find by no means difficult of execution, though it -will need some little practice to work it neatly.</p> - -<p>While the second envelope is being opened, get -the trick envelope from the pochette into the right -hand, clipping it against the second and third joints -of the second and third fingers, with the “seal” -side turned away from them. When the genuine -envelope is handed to you receive it with the left -hand, and immediately transfer it to the right, -pushing it between the fingers and the palmed one, -with the seal facing in the same direction. The -moment it is masked by the fingers push the trick -envelope outward with the thumb, bringing this -into view in its place. Smartly executed the -change is instantaneous and cannot possibly be -detected. The apparent object of passing it from -hand to hand is to have the left hand empty and -so free to take back the penknife from the last -holder. From this point all will be easy, as it -is the trick envelope which is now alone in view, -and all you have to guard against is any accidental -exposure of the one now hidden in the hand.</p> - -<p>This description may justly appear somewhat -long-winded, but its length is occasioned by the -number of small details demanding notice. In -performance, the trick should not take, at most, -more than ten minutes. The introductory patter -may of course be shortened at pleasure.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_18" id="Footnote_18"></a><a href="#FNanchor_18"><span class="label">[18]</span></a> If the performer does not object to the slight additional trouble, -he will find an easy method of obtaining envelopes exactly square and -of any desired description of paper, indicated in the chapter entitled -“A Few Wrinkles,” <i>post.</i></p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_19" id="Footnote_19"></a><a href="#FNanchor_19"><span class="label">[19]</span></a> This rigmarole may equally well be used by way of introduction to -any other trick of sufficient importance. King George’s puzzlement -about the dumplings is said to be a matter of history, but, I do not -guarantee it as a fact.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[180]</a></span></p> - -<h3>THE WIZARD’S POCKETBOOK</h3> - -<p>This is an extremely small volume, consisting -in fact of six pages only, and no letterpress, the -instructions for its use being embodied in a separate -leaflet. On each of its pages are miniature -reproductions of thirty-six playing cards, six in a -row; every card of the pack being represented once -at least among the whole number. The object of -the book is to enable the owner to discover the -name of a card drawn (or merely thought of) by -some member of the company. The chooser is -only asked to look at the book, and state on which -one or more of its pages the card in question -appears, when the performer, without seeing or -handling the book himself, can instantly name the -card. The six pages of the book are reproduced -in the diagrams which follow. Figs. 37-42.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[181]</a></span></p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 500px;"> -<img src="images/figure37.jpg" width="500" height="500" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 37</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 500px;"> -<img src="images/figure38.jpg" width="500" height="500" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 38</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[182]</a></span></p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 500px;"> -<img src="images/figure39.jpg" width="500" height="500" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 39</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 500px;"> -<img src="images/figure40.jpg" width="500" height="500" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 40</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[183]</a></span></p> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 500px;"> -<img src="images/figure41.jpg" width="500" height="500" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 41</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 500px;"> -<img src="images/figure42.jpg" width="500" height="500" alt="" /> -<p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 42</span></p> -</div> - -<p>To be in a position to work the trick, it is necessary -in the first place to memorise each of the fifty-two -cards of the pack in connection with a particular -number. This may at first sight appear a formidable -undertaking, but it is not so in reality.</p> - -<p>All that really needs to be memorised is the order -of the suits; which is as under:</p> - -<ul> -<li>1. Clubs.</li> -<li>2. Hearts.</li> -<li>3. Spades.</li> -<li>4. Diamonds.</li> -</ul> - -<p>This order may be instantly recalled by using as<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[184]</a></span> -a memory-peg the word <i>CH</i>a<i>S</i>e<i>D</i>, which contains -the initials of the four suits in the proper order, or -the reader may if he prefers it recall them by -reflecting that <i>Cool Heads Soon Decide</i>.</p> - -<p>The arrangement of each suit follows the natural -order, the ace of clubs being No. 1; the deuce 2; -and the trey 3; knave 11; queen 12 and king 13. -The card next following, viz., the ace of hearts, will -be 14; the deuce of hearts 15, and so on, the complete -arrangement being as shown below:</p> - -<ul> -<li>1. Ace of clubs.</li> -<li>2. Deuce of clubs.</li> -<li>3. Trey of clubs.</li> -<li>4. Four of clubs.</li> -<li>5. Five of clubs.</li> -<li>6. Six of clubs.</li> -<li>7. Seven of clubs.</li> -<li>8. Eight of clubs.</li> -<li>9. Nine of clubs.</li> -<li>10. Ten of clubs.</li> -<li>11. Knave of clubs.</li> -<li>12. Queen of clubs.</li> -<li>13. King of clubs.</li> -<li>14. Ace of hearts.</li> -<li>15. Deuce of hearts.</li> -<li>16. Trey of hearts.</li> -<li>17. Four of hearts.</li> -<li>18. Five of hearts.</li> -<li>19. Six of hearts.</li> -<li>20. Seven of hearts.</li> -<li>21. Eight of hearts.</li> -<li>22. Nine of hearts.</li> -<li>23. Ten of hearts.</li> -<li>24. Knave of hearts.</li> -<li>25. Queen of hearts.</li> -<li>26. King of hearts.</li> -<li>27. Ace of spades.</li> -<li>28. Deuce of spades.</li> -<li>29. Trey of spades.</li> -<li>30. Four of spades.</li> -<li>31. Five of spades.</li> -<li>32. Six of spades.</li> -<li>33. Seven of spades.</li> -<li>34. Eight of spades.</li> -<li>35. Nine of spades.</li> -<li>36. Ten of spades.</li> -<li>37. Knave of spades.</li> -<li>38. Queen of spades.</li> -<li>39. King of spades.</li> -<li>40. Ace of diamonds.</li> -<li>41. Deuce of diamonds.</li> -<li><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[185]</a></span>42. Trey of diamonds.</li> -<li>43. Four of diamonds.</li> -<li>44. Five of diamonds.</li> -<li>45. Six of diamonds.</li> -<li>46. Seven of diamonds.</li> -<li>47. Eight of diamonds.</li> -<li>48. Nine of diamonds.</li> -<li>49. Ten of diamonds.</li> -<li>50. Knave of diamonds,</li> -<li>51. Queen of diamonds.</li> -<li>52. King of diamonds.</li> -</ul> - -<p>The arrangement of the table being once understood, -the number associated with any given card -in the club suit suggests itself automatically, <i>e.g.</i>, -the seven of clubs is likewise No. 7 in the list. To -ascertain the name of the card corresponding to -any of the higher numbers, all that is needed is to -subtract from that number 13, or such higher multiple -of thirteen as the case will admit, and the -difference will represent its position in its own -suit.</p> - -<p>Suppose, for instance, that the performer desires -to know what card answers to the number 20. -Deducting thirteen from 20, the remainder, 7, tells -him that the card is the seventh (<i>i.e.</i> the seven) -of the second suit, viz., hearts. If he wants to -know the name of No. 29, he deducts 26, when the -remainder, 3, tells him that the card is the three of -the third suit, spades. If the card be No. 40, the -number to be deducted will be 39, and the -remainder, 1, tells him that the card is the first -of the fourth suit, viz., the ace of diamonds. After -a very few trials, this little exercise in mental -arithmetic becomes so familiar that the calculation -becomes practically instantaneous.</p> - -<p>Going a step further; with each of the six pages<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[186]</a></span> -of the pocket-book is associated a special number, -known as its “key” number. These are as under:</p> - -<table summary="The key numbers"> - <tr> - <td>Page 1</td> - <td>Key Number</td> - <td class="tdr">1</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="ditto1em">”</span> 2</td> - <td><span class="ditto1em">”</span> <span class="ditto1em">”</span></td> - <td class="tdr">2</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="ditto1em">”</span> 3</td> - <td><span class="ditto1em">”</span> <span class="ditto1em">”</span></td> - <td class="tdr">4</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="ditto1em">”</span> 4</td> - <td><span class="ditto1em">”</span> <span class="ditto1em">”</span></td> - <td class="tdr">8</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="ditto1em">”</span> 5</td> - <td><span class="ditto1em">”</span> <span class="ditto1em">”</span></td> - <td class="tdr">16</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="ditto1em">”</span> 6</td> - <td><span class="ditto1em">”</span> <span class="ditto1em">”</span></td> - <td class="tdr">32</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<p>The memorising of these is also a very simple -matter, for it will be noted that the key numbers -are the first six factors of the familiar geometrical -progression, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32. Printed as below:</p> - -<table summary="Memorising the key numbers"> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">1,</td> - <td class="tdr">2,</td> - <td class="tdr">3,</td> - <td class="tdr">4,</td> - <td class="tdr">5,</td> - <td class="tdr">6</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdb">1,</td> - <td class="tdb">2,</td> - <td class="tdb">4,</td> - <td class="tdb">8,</td> - <td class="tdb">16,</td> - <td class="tdb">32</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<p class="noindent">the upper figures, in ordinary type, expressing the -numbers of the pages, and the lower, in black type, -the corresponding key numbers, a very small -amount of study will associate them so closely in -the mind as to fix them firmly in the memory.</p> - -<p>Having mastered these two simple lessons, the -learner is in a position to use the pocket-book. To -ascertain the card chosen, he has only to add -together the key numbers of the pages in which -he is told that such card appears. The total will -be the number at which that card stands in the list -given on <a href="#Page_185">page 185</a>, and, this being known, it becomes -an easy matter to name the card itself.</p> - -<p>We will suppose, for instance, that performer<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[187]</a></span> -is told that the chosen card appears on the second -page, and no other. The key number of this page -being 2, the card must be the second in the list, viz., -the deuce of clubs. If he is told that the chosen -card is to be found on pages 1, 3 and 6: the key number -of these three pages being 1, 4 and 32: together -making 37, and thirty-seven less twenty-six being -eleven, he knows that the card must be the eleventh -of the third suit, otherwise the knave of spades. -If he is told that the card is on the third, fifth and -sixth pages, the key numbers of which are 4, 16 and -32, total 52, it is clear that the card must be the -last in the list, viz., the king of diamonds.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>So much for the working of the trick. But the -reader, if of an enquiring mind, will naturally ask, -“How is this result obtained?” The answer rests -upon a special property of the geometrical progression -which forms the six key numbers. It is -a curious fact that by the use of these six numbers, -either singly or in combination with others of the -series, any number, from unity up to 63, can be -expressed. Thus, the numbers, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 and -32 we already have, these being numbers of the -series. As to other numbers:</p> - -<ul> -<li>1 + 2 = 3</li> -<li>4 + 1 = 5</li> -<li>4 + 2 = 6</li> -<li>4 + 2 + 1 = 7</li> -<li>8 + 1 = 9</li> -<li>8 + 2 = 10</li> -<li>8 + 2 + 1 = 11</li> -<li>8 + 4 = 12</li> -<li>8 + 4 + 1 = 13</li> -</ul> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[188]</a></span></p> - -<p class="noindent">and so on throughout up to 52, which being the -limit of the pack, is the highest number with which -we need concern ourselves.</p> - -<p>In making up the pages of the pocket-book, -advantage has been taken of this principle. A -given card is inserted on that page or pages (and -those only) whose key numbers, alone or added -together, correspond with the position which the -card holds in the list. Thus the ace of clubs -will appear on the first page (not because it is the -first card, but because the key number of that page -is 1) and on no other. The deuce of clubs, in like -manner, on page 2, the key number of that card -being two. The next card, the three of clubs, must -appear on page 1 and page 2, their key numbers -together amounting to 3. The process as to cards -standing at higher numbers is the same. Thus, the -ace of spades, being the twenty-seventh card, and -twenty-seven being the aggregate of 16, 8, 2 and 1, -will appear on the first, second, fourth and fifth -pages. Conversely, if the performer is told that -the card appears on the four pages last named, he -knows that it is the twenty-seventh card, <i>i.e.</i>, the -ace of spades. Any spaces remaining vacant on -the page after the whole pack has been dealt with, -are filled up by duplicates of cards already figuring<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[189]</a></span> -<i>on the same page</i>, their appearing under these -conditions making no difference to the calculation.</p> - -<p>I am indebted to an ingenious amateur, Mr. -Victor Farrelly, for the idea of a novel method of -using the pocket-book. Mr. Farrelly does not -offer of his own accord to show what can be done -with it, but keeps it in reserve, for use in a special -emergency. Every conjurer meets now and then -with the pig-headed person who absolutely declines -to have a given card forced upon him, and persists -in endeavouring to extract one from some other -part of the pack. Armed with the pocket-book, the -performer can set such a person at defiance, and -indeed get additional <i>kudos</i> from his objectionable -behaviour.</p> - -<p>He cheerfully gives up the struggle, saying “You -seem to think, sir, that I wish to influence your -choice in some way. To prove the contrary, I give -the pack into your own hands. Shuffle it well. -Thank you. Now take from it any card you please. -Look at it, and put it in your pocket. You are -satisfied, I presume, that I do not know that card? -You are quite right. I have not the smallest idea -of it, but I shall discover it without the smallest -difficulty by a process of mathematical magic. I -have here” (producing pocket-book) “a little book -of six pages, on each of which thirty-six cards are -illustrated. Will you kindly see whether the card -you chose is represented among those on the first -page? Meanwhile I will divide the pack, which<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[190]</a></span> -please remember I have not touched since you -shuffled it yourself, into six portions, one for each -page of the book.” This is done, the six packets -being turned face down on the table.</p> - -<p>We will suppose that the chosen card is not found -on the first page. “Then,” says the performer, -“this first packet will tell me nothing, and may be -disregarded. Now, for the second page, is your -card upon that? It is? Then I draw two cards -from the second heap, and turn up one of them. -And now for the third page. Do you find your -card there? You do? Then I take up three cards -from the third packet, and again turn up the last -one.”</p> - -<p>We will suppose that the chosen card is not found -in either the fourth or the fifth page, but re-appears -on the sixth, whereupon six cards are counted off -from the corresponding packet, and the last of -them turned up. The performer has by this time -mentally added up the key numbers of the second, -third and sixth pages: viz., 2, 4 and 32, together -making 38, and knows therefrom that the card is -the thirty-eighth in the list, viz., the queen of -spades. He does not however at once display his -knowledge, but pretends to make a mental calculation -from the cards exposed upon the table, giving, -if he so pleases, and the cards lend themselves to -it, some fanciful explanation of his method. It -seems to me, however, that this last is a needless -elaboration. Personally, I should prefer merely<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[191]</a></span> -to call attention by name to the cards exposed, and -say, “When these three cards appear in conjunction, -it is clear that the card drawn was the queen -of spades” (or whatever it may happen to be). -Any one deluded, as the majority will probably be, -into believing that you really infer the name of the -drawn card from those on the table, will be farther -from the real solution than ever.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[192]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="CONCERNING_PATTER">CONCERNING PATTER</h2> - -<p>It will doubtless have been observed that I have -in the foregoing pages been somewhat lavish in -respect of patter. I have done so for two or three -reasons.</p> - -<p>First, in order to enable the reader to form a -better estimate of the effect of the trick presented, -duly clothed and coloured, to the mind of the spectator. -A trick described, however minutely, from -the mere mechanical or technical point of view, -gives scarcely more idea of its actual effect than -the rough charcoal sketch of the artist does of the -finished painting. Secondly, because ready-made -patter, if the reader cares to use it, will save him a -considerable amount of trouble. My third reason -is more personal, namely, that it has been a labour -of love to do so. To my mind the devising of some -little bit of appropriate fiction to serve as introduction -to a trick is the pleasantest part of the -inventor’s work.</p> - -<p>It may perhaps be thought that I have, in some -of the more ambitious tricks, been overliberal in -this particular. I remember thinking, after witnessing -a “show” by Dr. Lynn, a popular performer -of the last generation, that he had talked a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[193]</a></span> -great deal, and done very little, and that I had had -very little real magic for my money. On the other -hand, the loquacious doctor was always amusing, -and it must not be forgotten that to amuse, even -more than to puzzle, is the <i>raison d’être</i> of the modern -magician. It seems to me therefore quite -legitimate to use, to a reasonable extent, the art -of the <i>raconteur</i> to supplement that of the -magician.</p> - -<p>If my own patter is in some cases found superabundant, -I have at any rate done my best to make -it amusing, and if the reader opines that I have not -paid sufficient regard to the late Mr. Ducrow’s celebrated -maxim, “Cut the cackle, and come to the -’osses,” he is quite at liberty to cut my cackle to -what he may consider more reasonable proportions. -No doubt, time would be saved thereby. If, for -instance, he were to cut out the little romantic -fictions with which I have introduced “The Miracle -of Mumbo Jumbo” and “The Story of the Alkahest,” -and start “right away” with the bare performance -of the trick, both could be exhibited in -little more time than I have allotted to either alone. -Which treatment is likely to give the greater satisfaction -to his audience, he must decide for himself.</p> - -<p>Where the performer has the gift (for a “gift” -it undoubtedly is) of devising effective patter for -himself I am strongly in favour of his doing so. -Borrowed patter may be likened to a borrowed -dress-coat. It is never likely to be an exact fit, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[194]</a></span> -a “giant’s robe upon a dwarfish thief,” or the -reverse, cannot be expected to be a becoming garment. -Every man has, or should have, a style of -his own, and it is rarely good policy to imitate that -of somebody else. If a low comedy man were to -essay to play Hamlet, or a tragedian, however -eminent, were to try to give an imitation of Harry -Lauder, the result would be likely to be disappointing.</p> - -<p>The reader, undertaking to write his own patter, -and desirous of making it just what patter should -be, will find counsels of perfection in “Our Magic,” -and the more nearly he can approach them the -better. As, however, all have not the good fortune -to possess that admirable work, I venture to indicate -what to my own mind seem to be the chief -points to be aimed at.</p> - -<p>It is almost a commonplace to say that the main -object of patter is misdirection. As the term is -more usually applied, this means something said or -done midway in the course of a trick to draw away -the attention of the audience at some critical -moment, and to create what the French conjurers -call a “<i>temps</i>” <i>i.e.</i>, an “opportunity” for doing, -unnoticed, some necessary act. But misdirection -may very well start at an earlier stage than this: -in fact, well in advance of the actual execution of -the trick. Each trick should have some sort of -introduction, and the patter serving this purpose -should be such as to lead the mind of the hearer<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[195]</a></span> -away from the true explanation of the marvel, and -to suggest, in a more or less plausible way, some -other, remote from the real one.</p> - -<p>The suggested explanation may be either pseudo-scientific, -where possible based on some generally -accepted truth (and it is surprising what a long -way even a few grains of truth go in such cases); or -it may be downright “spoof,” delivered however -with due appearance of seriousness. The explanations -will naturally fall a good deal short of the -George Washington standard of truthfulness, but -the most tender conscience need not in such a case -have any scruples on the score of veracity. No -sane person expects truth in a fairy tale, and a -magical entertainment, from beginning to end, is -but a fairy tale in action. To put the matter in an -epigrammatic nutshell:</p> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> -<div class="stanza"> -<div class="verse">Truth is “a gem of purest ray serene,”</div> -<div class="verse indent1">A virtue always to be cultivated,</div> -<div class="verse">But such depends,—you’ll gather what I mean,—</div> -<div class="verse indent1">On how you happen to be situated.</div> -<div class="verse">At home, abroad, wherever I may be,</div> -<div class="verse indent1">I tell the honest truth, and shame the d——.</div> -<div class="verse">But when you ask to be deceived. Good gracious!</div> -<div class="verse indent1">You can’t expect me then to be veracious.</div> -<div class="verse">In that case only do I make exception,</div> -<div class="verse indent1">And most deceive when vowing “no deception.”</div> -</div> -</div> -</div> - -<p>This function of patter, the leading away the -minds of the audience from the true explanation of -the puzzle offered them, may be materially assisted<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[196]</a></span> -by the introduction, among the “properties” used, -of some object professedly essential to the trick, -but as a matter of fact having no real concern with -the effect produced. The audience take for -granted that it must have something to do with the -effect, or it would not be used, and are thereby led -away the more effectually from the actual explanation. -Numerous illustrations of the use of this -device will be found in the foregoing pages.</p> - -<p>If, in the case of a given trick, the performer -is absolutely at a loss to produce a satisfactory -fable to introduce it, he may evade the difficulty -by stating that he is about to produce an effect for -which he cannot himself account, and inviting the -assistance of his audience in doing so.</p> - -<p>The second function of patter is the calling of -the attention of the audience to matters which you -desire them to take note of, and to give opportunity -to do so. There is small credit to be gained -by changing the ace of clubs into the ace of hearts, -or making a given article pass invisibly from one -spot to another, unless the spectators have been -first made to realise the original state of things, and -they must be allowed <i>sufficient time</i> to do so. I -have more than once seen an otherwise brilliant -show spoilt by being rushed through at railroad -speed. The mind of the spectator had not been -allowed time to receive clear impressions. The -company in such a case disperses with a consciousness -of having had a rapid succession of surprises,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[197]</a></span> -but with only a cloudy recollection as to what they -were.</p> - -<p>In devising, as is sometimes desirable, new patter -for an old trick, an endeavour should be made to -look at the effect from an entirely fresh point of -view, so as to make the trick practically a new one. -A remarkable instance of such a transformation is -furnished by an incident in the life of Robert-Houdin. -At one period of his career he was -entrusted by the French Government with a very -important mission. He was sent to Algeria, specially -charged to “astonish the natives,” and by -his greater wonders to destroy their belief in the -pretended miracles of the Aissoua.</p> - -<p>Among other surprises, he decided to make use -of his “Light and Heavy Chest,” a chest which, as -the reader is doubtless aware, became at command, -by means of an electro-magnet in the pedestal on -which it rested, so “heavy” that the strongest man -could not lift it from its base. This trick, produced -at a time when the phenomena of electricity -were but little understood, has produced an -immense sensation at his Paris performances. -But the Master instinctively felt that the trick in -that shape would produce little or no effect on the -more primitive mind of the Arab. He would simply -have taken for granted some mechanical means -of holding down the chest, beyond his own comprehension, -no doubt, but by no means to be -regarded as miraculous. Robert-Houdin decided<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[198]</a></span> -to change the mode of presentation altogether, and -to make the illusion no longer objective, but subjective. -He announced that by means of his magic -power he could take away the strength of the -strongest man, and render him weak as a little -child. The “chest” was in this case merely -brought forward in a casual way, as a convenient -object wherewith the assertion of the magician -could be tested. The strongest man in the company -was invited to come forward, and try whether -he could lift that little box. Of course he could, -and did; a child could have done the same. “You -lifted it because I permitted you to do so,” said the -magician. “But I take away your strength. Try -to lift it now!”</p> - -<p>Again the athlete tries his strength, but now he -fails. With teeth set, and every muscle tense, he -strains, and strains, but in vain, and he has to confess -that the infidel wonder-worker has, for the -time, taken away all his strength. Here was a -wizard indeed!</p> - -<p>In arranging your patter, be humorous if you -can, but if, like the gentleman we have all heard -of, you “joke with difficulty,” don’t force yourself -to be funny. That it is possible for a man lacking -humour still to be a great conjurer is proved by -the case of Hartz, who was notably deficient in this -particular, but by his excellence in other directions -won a place in the very first rank of his profession. -But if you cannot be humorous, at any rate be<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[199]</a></span> -cheerful. Geniality of manner is one of the most -valuable assets of the conjurer. Above all, don’t -be nervous. You may say “I can’t help it,” but to -a great extent you can. It is largely a matter of -<i>will</i>. Start with the idea that all will go well, and -it will probably do so. On the other hand, a low-spirited -conjurer always makes a low-spirited -audience.</p> - -<p>In any case, be sparing of puns, which have been -deservedly described as the lowest form of wit. A -single pun, if good enough (or bad enough) may -win a laugh, and score to your credit, but to pepper -an audience with verbal shrapnel in the shape -of puns is an outrage on good taste.</p> - -<p>Passing to the third function of patter, the misdirection -of attention in the course of a trick, we -will assume that you have made a start in the right -direction at the outset, by suggesting some fanciful -explanation of the effect you intend to produce, so -that your audience, starting from wrong premises, -do not know the points at which their too close -observation would be inconvenient. The best way -of diverting their attention at one of these critical -points is obviously to attract it to some other direction. -A mere sentence, particularly if accompanied -by appropriate action, will suffice. Supposing, -to take an elementary instance, that the -performer desires to drop unseen into the profonde -from his left hand some small article for which he -has just deftly substituted a duplicate, now exhibited<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[200]</a></span> -in the right hand, he has only to say, “Now I -want you particularly to keep an eye on this”—whatever -the article in the right hand may happen -to be. All eyes are for the moment, instinctively -drawn to the object in question, and in that moment -the deed is done. The artifice is ridiculously simple, -but it is effective, and it is on being fully prepared -with the right thing to say and do at the critical -moment that the success of a magical entertainment -largely depends. Careful rehearsal, preferably -before an expert friend, will furnish the -best hints as to the danger-spots in the working -of a trick, and how best to devise patter to meet -them.</p> - -<p>A final word of advice—advice that has been often -given, but cannot be too often repeated if you -really aim to carry your audience with you. Never -lose sight of the fact that you are, in the words of -Robert-Houdin, “an actor playing the part of a -magician,” and take your office seriously. In particular, -never before an audience use the word -“trick,” which at once gives away all your pretension -to magical power. An actor never tells his -audience that he is an actor or that he is playing a -part. He does not call their attention to his -make-up, however excellent, or tell them that his -wig comes from Clarkson. On the contrary, he -does his best to make his audience for the time forget -that he is Hubert de Barnstormer, or whatever -his stage name may be, and to keep up the illusion<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[201]</a></span> -that he is actually the person whom he represents. -The modern magician should do the same. If he -has enough of the true artistic spirit to imagine, -when he steps forward on the platform, that he <i>is</i> -a magician, and that his miracles are genuine, he -will go a long way towards producing a like impression -in the minds of his audience. Bearing this in -mind, describe what you propose to do as an -“effect,” a “marvel,” an “experiment,” or a -“phenomenon”; never by any chance as a “trick.”</p> - -<p>It may be objected that I have myself repeatedly -used the obnoxious word in the course of the foregoing -pages, but that is another matter. This -book is written by a conjurer for conjurers: and as -between ourselves we are forced to admit, painful -though it be to do so, that our greatest miracles are -only tricks. But we need not tell the public so. -Logically-minded, persons know it well enough, if -they are allowed to think about the matter. Our -business is to make them, for the time, forget it. -A wise old Roman said: <i>Populus vult decipi: -decipiatur</i>. Your audience wish to be deceived; in -fact they have come together for that purpose. By -all means let them be deceived to the top of their -bent; and the first step towards effectually deceiving -them, is to persuade them, if possible, that there -is “no deception.”</p> - -<p>The patter for a given trick, once composed, and -tested by a few performances in public, may -thenceforth, so far as the professional is concerned,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[202]</a></span> -be left to take care of itself. It should automatically -improve with each of its earlier repetitions -as good wine improves in bottle. Faults will -correct themselves, and being made perfect by -practice, the performer will thenceforth be able to -“speak his piece” without effort, and devote his -whole energies to the actual working of the trick.</p> - -<p>To the amateur, only performing on special occasions, -with perhaps considerable intervals between -them, I commend a plan from which I myself -derived great benefit, viz.: Write out from -memory the patter for each trick on the programme -a day or two before a coming performance. -After you have given your show, go through your -manuscript again carefully, noting and correcting -it in any point in which the patter failed to be exactly -right. The interpolation of a single sentence, -the transposition in point of sequence of two -movements, or the alteration of some trifling detail, -such as standing at a different angle to your table -at a given moment, may make all the difference between -partial failure and complete success.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[203]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="THE_USE_OF_THE_WAND">THE USE OF THE WAND</h2> - -<p>Closely connected with the subject of patter is -the use of the wand, which in my own opinion cannot -be too sedulously cultivated. To the cases in -which the wand itself forms the prominent item -of the trick, I devoted a special chapter in “Later -Magic.” To these therefore I need not further -refer. More important, however, is the part -played by the wand from the point of view of general -utility.</p> - -<p>In the first place, it is the only remnant of the -traditional outfit of the magician. Time was, -when the regulation costume of the wizard was a -sugarloaf hat, and a robe embroidered with highly -coloured mystic symbols. Such a robe is still worn -as part of their make-up, by Chung Ling Soo and -a few other Orientals, but the orthodox costume of -the latter-day wizard is ordinary evening dress. -The wand alone remains; the symbol and the professed -instrument of his mystic powers, and from -its traditional connection with magic, there is a -special prestige attached to it.</p> - -<p>For these reasons alone it would be desirable to -retain the use of the wand, but apart from them, -its practical uses are many and various. One of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[204]</a></span> -the first difficulties of the novice, as he comes forward -to introduce himself to his audience, is to -know what to do with his hands. He can hardly -advance with hand on heart, within his vest, <i>à la</i> -Pecksniff. Held open, with arms hanging down -by the sides, the hands look too stiff, and to advance -with them in his pockets would hardly be good -form. By coming forward wand in hand, he -avoids these difficulties. The hand holding it automatically -assumes an easy and natural position, -and he ceases to think about the other. With the -wand held in the right hand across the body, its -free end resting on the palm of the opposite hand, -he is in an ideal attitude for delivering his introductory -patter. Later on, by holding the wand in -the hand, he effectually disguises the fact that he -has some object, a card, a coin, or a watch concealed -therein. If he has occasion to call attention -directly to any object, the wand forms the most -natural pointer. If he finds it necessary, for some -reason connected with the trick in hand, to make -a turn or half-turn away from the spectators, the -fact that he has left his wand upon the table affords -him the needful opportunity.</p> - -<p>Lastly, if the wand is habitually used as the professed -instrument of a desired transposition or -transformation, a certain portion of an average -audience gradually becomes impressed with the -idea that there really must be some occult connection -between the touch of the wand and the effect<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[205]</a></span> -produced. There is much virtue in what may be -called a magical atmosphere, and after the wizard -has proved his magical power by performing two -or three apparent impossibilities, the mind of the -spectator (though in his calmer moments, he -knows, or should know, better), is led to adopt in a -greater or less degree the solution “forced” upon -him by the conjurer. Habitual use of the wand, -with apparent seriousness, goes far to create the -desired atmosphere.</p> - -<p>A good effect may be produced by “electrifying” -the wand now and then, by rubbing it with a handkerchief. -The main uses of electricity are so -widely known, and so little understood by the million, -that they are quite ready to give it credit for -still more marvellous possibilities.</p> - -<p>My friend Mr. Holt Schooling, mentioned in -connection with <i>The Secret of the Pyramids</i>, finds -an additional use for the wand. He uses, not one -only, but half a dozen, of different appearance, each -credited with some special magical virtue. At the -outset of his show these are arranged horizontally, -one above another on pins projecting from a small -sloping blackboard. For each fresh trick the -wand professedly appropriate to it is brought into -action, the one last used being at the same time -replaced on the stand. The spectators do not suspect -that behind each top corner of the board is a -small servante, enabling the performer, under -cover of the change of wands, to change a pack of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[206]</a></span> -cards, or to effect some other substitution necessary -for the purpose of his next item.</p> - -<p><i>Verbum sap</i>, by all means cultivate the use of the -wand, and for the sake of effect, let it be of an elegant -and distinctive character. An office-ruler or -a piece of cane would serve many of its mechanical -purposes, but would lack the prestige attached to -what is, professedly, the genuine article.</p> - -<p>One of the most striking proofs of the extensive -use and appreciation of the wand by modern -magicians is furnished by the remarkable collection -of such implements got together by Dr. Saram -R. Ellison, of New York.</p> - -<p>Dr. Ellison<a name="FNanchor_20" id="FNanchor_20"></a><a href="#Footnote_20" class="fnanchor">[20]</a> is an eminent and popular physician, -whose ruling passion is wanting to know -things, particularly things that other people don’t -know. Such being his temperament, it goes almost -without saying that at an early period of his -career he became a Freemason. Having been duly -initiated into the mysteries of the ordinary lodge, -and learnt all it had to teach him, he still yearned -for “more light,” and accordingly worked his way -up step by step through intervening degrees in -masonry till he reached what is known as the -thirty-third degree, an order even more exclusive -than that of the Garter, and claiming to possess -secrets as to which the ordinary “blue” mason,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[207]</a></span> -even though he be a Past Grand Everything, knows -no more than the veriest outsider.</p> - -<p>When in this direction there were no more mysteries -left for him to conquer, Dr. Ellison naturally -turned his attention to Magic: and in accordance -with his habitual determination to know all -that there is to be known with regard to his hobby -for the time being he began to collect books upon -the subject. At first there were but few to collect, -but the literature of magic has grown, and grown, -and side by side with its advance Dr. Ellison’s collection -has grown larger and larger till it numbers -some hundreds of volumes. Harry Kellar, the -dean of American magicians, and himself an -enthusiastic collector, yearned to possess it, and -offered the doctor for it the handsome sum of two -thousand dollars, equivalent in English money to -about four hundred pounds. But Dr. Ellison was -not to be tempted. In order that the collection -should be preserved intact, he donated it, some -years ago, to the New York Public Library, also -providing a fund for its upkeep and further development.</p> - -<p>But Dr. Ellison’s interest in, and services to -Magic did not end here. He has made a collection -of models, entirely the work of his own hands, of -the appliances for over sixty stage illusions. -Some are of full size, others quite miniature -affairs, but one and all exact to scale. Further, the -doctor has a special affection for souvenirs of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[208]</a></span> -famous magicians, past and present, especially in -the shape of wands, as being the most characteristic -possession of the wizard. Accordingly, some -years ago, he began to collect wands, and he now -possesses more than eighty such, each a wand which -has been habitually yielded by some more or less -famous magician. By the courtesy of Dr. Ellison -I am enabled to furnish particulars of some of -them; as given in a very interesting pamphlet by -Epes W. Sargent, a well-known American writer.</p> - -<p>The catalogue commences with a wand formerly -belonging to Professor Anderson, the once famous -“Wizard of the North.” Here are found also the -wands used by the two Herrmanns (Carl and -Alexander), Buatier de Kolta, Lafayette, Martin -Chapender, Carl Willmann and others who tread -the stage no more. As regards the living, there is -here a memento of nearly every English-speaking -conjurer of note: besides many others of cosmopolitan -celebrity.</p> - -<p>The wand here exhibited is not always the conventional -ebony and ivory affair, some of the specimens -being indeed of a highly original character. -For instance, the wand contributed by a Hindu -magician consists of the leg bone of a sacred monkey -from the temple of Hanuman, the monkey -god, at Benares. The wands of Madame Adelaide -Herrmann and Chung Ling Soo take the shape of -fans. Horace Goldin’s is a cut-down whip-handle, -and those of Clement de Lion and Imro Fox are<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[209]</a></span> -portions of one-while walking-sticks, promoted to -a nobler use. Mr. J. N. Maskelyne’s “wand” is -an ordinary file, which, from the inventor point of -view, he regards as the greatest of wonder-working -appliances.</p> - -<p>My own contribution may claim to be of exceptional -interest, not merely as being in itself a curio, -but as a memento of a very remarkable man, so -remarkable, indeed, that a brief notice of his career -may be interesting. It was presented to me by -Professor Palmer, a gentleman who was not, like -myself, a bogus professor, but the real thing, and -withal an exceptionally eminent man. Skill in -sleight-of-hand was the least of his accomplishments. -He had a marvellous gift of tongue, there -being scarcely a European or Oriental language -with which he was not thoroughly familiar. He -was born at Cambridge in 1840, and from his -earliest years showed indications of his peculiar -gift for acquiring languages. As a school-boy he -made friends among the gipsies, and learned to -speak their queer language so perfectly as to -deceive even those to whom it was their native -tongue. In later life it was a favourite joke of his -to saunter, in company with his equally accomplished -friend, Leland, into some gipsy encampment -where they were not known, and after paying -their footing by having their fortunes told, -to ask some of the nomads gathered round the fire, -to talk a little Rommany for their benefit. Gipsies<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[210]</a></span> -are chary of speaking Rommany except -among their own people, and the inquisitive strangers -were frequently told that there was no such -language; whereupon, one of them would turn to -the other, and in purest Rommany quietly express -an opinion that their temporary hosts were not -thorough-bred gipsies, but of some inferior stock. -This produced Rommany in plenty, and the visitors -were energetically taken to task for that, -being themselves gipsies, they should ape the dress -and manners of the Gorgio. A friendly explanation -made all end happily.</p> - -<p>Palmer made his first start in life as a clerk in -the City of London, where in his spare time he -made himself master of French and Italian. A -little later he took up the study of Persian, Arabic -and Hindustani, and speedily conquered them. -In 1867, after taking his degree at the University -of Cambridge, he was elected a Fellow by his College, -an honour conferred on him in recognition of -his mastery of the Oriental languages. During -the years 1868-1870 he was employed on behalf of -the Palestine Exploration Fund, to make a survey -of Mount Sinai, in the course of which he became -upon friendly and indeed almost brotherly terms -with many of the wild Arab tribes, among whom -he was known as the Sheikh Abdullah. As in England -he had been made free of the gipsy tent, so in -Palestine he could drop in upon many a Bedouin -encampment, and be sure of a hearty welcome.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[211]</a></span> -His skill in sleight-of-hand, which he had in the -first instance taken up merely as a pastime, proved -to be of immense service to him in his desert wanderings; -adding not only to his popularity but frequently -gaining for him the prestige of a genuine -magician, and thereby increasing his influence.</p> - -<p>In 1871 he was appointed to the professorship of -Oriental languages at Cambridge, his official title -being the Lord High Almoner’s Reader of Arabic. -In 1882, in anticipation of the Arabi trouble in -Egypt, he was entrusted by the then Government -with the difficult and dangerous task of winning -over the Sinaitic tribes, and preventing the threatened -destruction of the Suez Canal.</p> - -<p>His first trip, extending from Gaza to Suez, was -carried out successfully, but on penetrating farther -into the desert, he and his two companions, Captain -Gill, R.E., and Lieutenant Charrington, R.N., -fell into the hands of a tribe to whom Palmer was -unknown, and were barbarously put to death. -Happily, their bodies were recovered, and received -from the nation the posthumous honour of burial -in St. Paul’s Cathedral.</p> - -<p>The wand presented to me by Professor Palmer -is a curiosity in many ways. It is made of acacia -wood (the “shittim” wood of the Old Testament) -brought by Palmer himself from Mount Lebanon. -Around it, in spiral form, is inscribed an invocation -from the Koran, in Arabic characters. The -writing of the inscription is a genuine work of art,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[212]</a></span> -having been executed as a special favour to Palmer, -by Hassoun, an eminent professional -“scribe.”</p> - -<p>I am reluctantly bound to admit that the Palmer -wand, in my hands, did not exhibit any special -magical virtues, and when I ceased myself to use -it, it seemed to me that it could not find a worthier -home than in Dr. Ellison’s fine collection.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Reverting for a moment to the subject of patter, -I will conclude by quoting, for the amusement -rather than the instruction of the reader, an oration -which (with variations) now and then formed -my introductory <i>boniment</i>, and might on occasion -still serve, in default of better.</p> - -<p>“Ladies and Gentlemen, and members of the -Royal Family, if any happen to be present, I am -about to exhibit for your amusement, a few experiments -in Unnatural Philosophy, otherwise Magic.</p> - -<p>“Magic in the olden times was a very different -thing, as I daresay you know, from what it is at -present. In those days every respectable wizard -kept a familiar spirit: a sort of magical man of all -work. He cleaned the boots and knives, and -when his master gave a show, it was the familiar -who worked all his miracles for him. The -magician only did the talking, and pocketed the -takings. But the familiar did much bigger things -than that. If his master’s next-door neighbour -made himself disagreeable, the familiar would<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[213]</a></span> -hoist him up and drop him in the water-butt, or -into the Red Sea, according to order. If the -magician wanted a week at the seaside, he had no -need to pay railway fare. The familiar would just -pick him up, house and all, and land him gently in -the middle of the mixed bathing. The only drawback -was that, sooner or later, a time came when -there was no performance, because the magician -had been carried off by his familiar on a pitchfork.</p> - -<p>“As the French say, <i>nous avons changé tout -cela</i>. Familiars are as extinct as the dodo. Perhaps -it’s as well, but it makes it very much harder -to be a magician. In the first place you must know -all about astrology, anthropology, Egyptology and -all the other ologies. You must be well posted in -mathematics, hydrostatics, pneumatics and numismatics. -You must know all about clairvoyance, -palmistry and thought reading, sympathy and -antipathy, magnetism, mesmerism, wireless telegraphy, -X rays and all the other kinds of rays. -Of course you must be well up in Greek and Latin, -and a little Hebrew, not to mention a few other -things which I forget for the moment, but I won’t -stop to think of them now. When you have studied -these little matters fourteen hours a day for -nine or ten years, you will be as ‘chock-full of -science’ as old Sol Gills himself, and you will be -able to do all sorts of wonderful things, some of -which I hope to show you this evening.</p> - -<p>“Before I begin, there is just one little matter<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[214]</a></span> -I should like to mention. You hear people talk -about the quickness of the hand deceiving the eye. -I don’t know whether the quickness of the hand -ever does deceive the eye, but I want you to understand -that you must not expect anything of that -sort from <i>me</i>. I am naturally slow. I was born -twenty minutes after I was expected, and I have -been getting slower and slower ever since.</p> - -<p>“To-night, I intend to do everything even more -slowly than usual: so that you will only have to -watch me closely to see exactly how it is all done. -Then, when you go home, if you do as I do, and say -as I say, without making any mistakes, no doubt -you will be able to produce the same results. If -not, there must be ‘something wrong with the -works.’”</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_20" id="Footnote_20"></a><a href="#FNanchor_20"><span class="label">[20]</span></a> Since this was written Dr. Ellison has passed into the mysterious -beyond.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[215]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="A_FEW_WRINKLES">A FEW WRINKLES<a name="FNanchor_21" id="FNanchor_21"></a><a href="#Footnote_21" class="fnanchor">[21]</a></h2> - -<p>Every conjurer who has in him, as all conjurers -should have, the creative instinct of the artist, and -aims therefore at putting something of himself -into his work, must of necessity be to some small -extent an amateur mechanic. The hints which follow -are addressed to the reader in that capacity. -I have no pretension to teach him how to do things -in the way of construction, but merely to make the -doing of them easier. Though relating to matters -in themselves small, the “tips” which follow may -safely be said to come within the scope of Captain -Cuttle’s celebrated counsel, “when found make -a note of.” It often happens that the amateur -mechanic has to take considerable trouble and -pains in procuring some special requirement, -while there is already on sale, at small cost, just -the thing he wants, if he only knew what to ask for, -and where to get it. The paragraphs which follow -will, in some at any rate of such cases, supply the -needful information.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[216]</a></span></p> - -<p>1. For woodwork on a small scale, an old cigar -box will often be found suitable material. Where -such a box is not available or not suitable for the -particular work in hand, what is called “three-ply” -may supply the need. This consists of three -layers of thin wood glued together under pressure, -with the grain of the intermediate layer running -crossway to that of the other two, the tendency -to warp being thereby greatly reduced. Drawing-boards -are, for this reason, now usually made of -wood so combined, and a drawing-board makes for -many purposes a good enough <i>extempore</i> work-bench. -For a finer class of work, the amateur -mechanic, if he is willing to take the trouble, may -make his own three-ply. For this purpose he -should procure a supply of what is called “knife-cut” -veneer, <i>i.e.</i>, thin sheets of walnut, mahogany, -satin,—or other hard wood, and glue them together -with the white glue to be presently described. Veneer -merchants form a distinct trade, and are comparatively -few in number, but the resident in London -can obtain veneer and thin woods of all descriptions -from Messrs. McEwan & Son, 282 Old Street, -E. C. In country districts the shops which hold -agencies for “Hobbies” materials also sell planed-up -woods of various kinds, ranging like veneer -from one-sixteenth to half an inch in thickness.</p> - -<p>2. As a handy substitute for glue, most people -are acquainted with the virtues of Seccotine, in its -way a most useful preparation. But there are<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[217]</a></span> -many purposes for which Seccotine is too aggressively -viscous, while ordinary paste is not adhesive -enough. In such cases I can strongly recommend -<i>Pastoid</i>, a composition midway between glue and -paste. For all purposes for which paste (in small -quantity) is ordinarily used, Pastoid may be substituted -with advantage. I myself came across it -accidentally two or three years ago, “since when,” -like the gentleman in the soap advertisement, “I -have used no other.” The maker is Henry Roberts, -Middlesborough, but it should be obtainable -of any up-to-date stationer or fancy dealer. It is -supplied in glass jars, at sixpence and a shilling.</p> - -<p>3. Where an actual glue, of fine quality, is -needed, procure sheet gelatine, to be had of any -grocer. Cut into small pieces and melt in an -ordinary gluepot using water enough to make the -resulting solution about as thick as ordinary gum -water. It should be used as near boiling point as -possible, and the joined surfaces left to dry under -the heaviest pressure available. A joint made with -this glue is practically invisible.<a name="FNanchor_22" id="FNanchor_22"></a><a href="#Footnote_22" class="fnanchor">[22]</a></p> - -<p>4. For dividing up thin stuff (wood or cardboard), -into rectangular slabs, the handiest tool -is the “cutting gauge.” This is practically identical -with the better known “marking gauge,” save<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[218]</a></span> -that the “marker” is replaced by a little spade-pointed -cutter. This tool is only available for cutting -wood up to say eight inches in width, but to -the amateur attempting small work only, it will be -found invaluable.</p> - -<p>5. For staining wood or cardboard a deep dead -black I have found nothing better than the “Record -Jet Stain,” manufactured by the Record Polish -Company, Eccles, Manchester. It is normally -designed for staining leather only, the makers not -having apparently realised its usefulness in other -directions. It is to be had of any dealer in leather -goods, in twopenny and sixpenny bottles. In -many cases I have found it best to rub it in with -a pad, rather than to apply it with a brush, but -this will of course depend largely on the nature -of the article to be treated.</p> - -<p>6. An excellent polish for use after staining, or -for other purposes, is made by dissolving <i>white</i> -wax in turpentine, to the consistency of cream. -Applied sparingly, with plenty of friction to follow, -this produces a clean hard gloss, free from the -stickiness which is sometimes left after the use of -other polishes.</p> - -<p>7. For enamelling small articles use Maurice’s -Porceleine (the makers of which are Walter Carson -& Sons, Grove Works, Battersea, S. W.) procurable -at “oil and colour” men in tins from three-halfpence -upwards.</p> - -<p>8. For any article to be made of flat card or<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[219]</a></span> -mill-board, without folding or bending, preference -should be given to “Bristol” board, sold by artists’ -colour-men. This is somewhat more expensive but -is stiffer and harder and has a better surface than -the commoner articles.</p> - -<p>9. For joining wood to wood without glue where -there is no great thickness to be penetrated, -“needle-points,” procurable of any ironmonger, -will be found useful. These are stout eyeless -needles, of very brittle steel, about two inches in -length. To use them, bore with a fine bradawl a -hole partially through the wood, then drive in the -needle-point by gentle tapping with a hammer, and -when it has penetrated the desired depth snap off -all that remains above the surface.</p> - -<p>10. Also useful for many purposes are what are -called by drapers “blanket” pins. These are of -brass, and a card of such pins in three sizes, ranging -from two to three inches in length and varying -proportionately in thickness, may be bought for a -penny. Pins a trifle shorter and thinner than the -above are known as “laundry” pins. Apart from -their normal uses, pins of these kinds are very -useful for bending into hooks, or to cut up into -short lengths of stiff straight wire for pivots or -otherwise.</p> - -<p>11. For all effects dependent upon a thread pull -use, in place of ordinary thread, <i>plaited</i> silk fishing -line. This is procurable of any sports’ outfitter -or fishing tackle dealer, in twenty and forty<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[220]</a></span> -yard lengths, and in half a dozen grades of thickness, -the finest being not much thicker than a hair -line. The breaking strain of this is much greater -than that of ordinary thread, and it has the further -advantage that being plaited instead of -twisted it does not unroll or “kink” in use. Allcock, -of Redditch, a name familiar to all anglers, -is a noted maker of such line, but he has no monopoly -of its manufacture. It is usually sold -white, but may be easily dyed any desired colour.</p> - -<p>For this last valuable “tip” I am again indebted -to my often-quoted friend, Mr. Holt Schooling, -who, as an enthusiastic angler, is an expert as to -lines of all descriptions. The reader will find -numerous instances of the practical use of such -line in the earlier part of this book.</p> - -<p>A good way of dyeing line is to thread a needle -on to one end, and pass it by the aid of the needle -through one corner, moistened with the appropriate -dye, of a soft sponge, and then back again -through the dry part of the sponge to clean off any -excess of moisture. When dry, if necessary, -repeat the process.</p> - -<p>12. Square envelopes, for the purpose of forming -“nests” or otherwise, are now and then needed -by the conjurer, but envelopes precisely square -(save the small variety known as “pence” envelopes) -are not kept in “stock” by stationers in the -ordinary way. When such are needed the readiest -plan is to take an envelope of the long “bag” shape<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[221]</a></span> -and shorten it to an exact square, closing the lower -end as before. Envelopes of the above kind are -procurable in many varieties of paper, and in -widths ranging by various fractions of an inch -from four inches upwards.</p> - -<p>13. To make a line, thick or thin, run freely over -a pulley-wheel or through an eyelet, use as a lubricant -powdered talcum, otherwise known as French -chalk. This is equally useful for minimising friction -between wooden surfaces, or between wood -and metal, say between a pulley-wheel and the -pivot on which it turns. Where the slight extra -cost is not an obstacle the use of ivory as the material -of a pulley-wheel secures the perfection of easy -running.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>It is, I trust, hardly necessary to say that wherever -I have mentioned an article to be had by purchase, -my recommendation is based solely upon -practical experience of its merits. I have no interest, -direct or indirect, in any of the articles mentioned, -and my knowledge of their manufacturers -is derived solely from their respective labels.</p> - -<div class="footnotes"> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_21" id="Footnote_21"></a><a href="#FNanchor_21"><span class="label">[21]</span></a> This book having been written primarily with a view to British -readers, some of my recommendations will naturally be of no value to -my American friends, but I have not thought it necessary to delete -them. L. H.</p> - -</div> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a name="Footnote_22" id="Footnote_22"></a><a href="#FNanchor_22"><span class="label">[22]</span></a> For the information contained in this paragraph, as also that relating -to the use of Veneers I am indebted to Mr. Holt Schooling, who -is an expert in such matters. My own essays in the direction of fancy -cabinet-making have for the most part been limited to rough models to -be reproduced in finished shape by more practised hands.</p> - -</div> - -</div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[222]</a></span></p> - -<h2 id="LENVOI">L’ENVOI</h2> - -<p>With these last lines I lay down my pen, as I -have long since laid down the wand. I do so with -regret, for writing about magic has always been to -me a labour of love, but failing energy and failing -eyesight warn me that my day is over, and that -“the night cometh, wherein no man can work.”</p> - -<p>When I first began to discourse of magic, I had -the whole field, in a literary sense, to myself. That -state of things has long since ceased to be. Fertile -brains and ready writers have taken up my task, -and magic has now a worthy literature, growing -day by day. “So mote it be!”</p> - -<p>Furthermore, if I may be allowed a word of advice, -let me say that every lover of magic, be he -professional or amateur, should join a magical society. -No great work can be carried forward without -organization, and the success of such bodies as -The Magician’s Club and the Magic Circle here, -and the Society of American Magicians over seas, -has proved that magic is no exception to the rule.</p> - -<p>I must not close without a word of hearty thanks -to Harry Houdini, Oscar S. Teale and John W. -Sargent, of the Society of American Magicians, for -their generous offices in connection with the publication -of my book. With this last legacy to the -friends, at home and abroad, who have derived -pleasure or profit from my writings, I bid them -a cheery farewell.</p> - -<p class="right"><span class="smcap">Louis Hoffmann.</span></p> - - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Latest Magic, by -Professor Louis Hoffmann and Angelo Lewis - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LATEST MAGIC *** - -***** This file should be named 55279-h.htm or 55279-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/5/5/2/7/55279/ - -Produced by Chris Curnow and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was -produced from images generously made available by The -Internet Archive) - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9018f1d..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure1.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure1.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5a42e12..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure1.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure10.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure10.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 20ac164..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure10.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure11.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure11.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8e4d8a6..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure11.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure12.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure12.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 34e89a0..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure12.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure13.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure13.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 43a5035..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure13.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure14.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure14.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a597dec..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure14.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure15.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure15.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b4c3a7b..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure15.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure16.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure16.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e61b1f4..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure16.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure17.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure17.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fe71694..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure17.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure18.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure18.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1a66baf..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure18.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure19.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure19.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ee21f73..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure19.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure2.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure2.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1dc5f30..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure2.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure20.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure20.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4a10c5a..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure20.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure21.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure21.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 28480e3..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure21.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure22.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure22.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 711a222..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure22.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure23.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure23.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 72f5862..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure23.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure24.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure24.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cb9abfc..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure24.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure25-27.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure25-27.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0cdb594..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure25-27.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure28.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure28.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8e084bb..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure28.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure29.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure29.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a62be6f..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure29.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure3.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure3.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0a70154..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure3.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure30.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure30.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1f737a7..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure30.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure31.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure31.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f71360a..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure31.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure32-34.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure32-34.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e9f62ae..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure32-34.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure35.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure35.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7ecbbd2..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure35.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure36.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure36.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 368e154..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure36.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure37.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure37.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ec775de..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure37.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure38.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure38.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ba704f8..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure38.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure39.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure39.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b2c7c3a..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure39.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure4.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure4.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 87dab5b..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure4.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure40.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure40.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d11db84..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure40.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure41.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure41.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8a94edf..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure41.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure42.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure42.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0485fa2..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure42.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure5.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure5.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6167119..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure5.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure6.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure6.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b08ad5f..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure6.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure7.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure7.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 86dec2d..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure7.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure8.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure8.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 34ccfe7..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure8.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/figure9.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/figure9.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ae0a17e..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/figure9.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/55279-h/images/frontispiece.jpg b/old/55279-h/images/frontispiece.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f9b6332..0000000 --- a/old/55279-h/images/frontispiece.jpg +++ /dev/null |
